00O204 - Colombia Compra Eficiente
IIARD(UCS LTDA
NI! 900.138.4484
pNE1!
MusIda 19 No. 95.31/55 01.309
Oficina (+57)(1)7590737
http://sw.hardnefics.coni
CERTIFICACION
Senores: Ministerio de t=ducacion
El Departamento de Recursos Humanos de HARDNETICS LTDA, certifica que la señora MONICA
GYSSETH RIANO RODRIGUEZ identificada con cédula de ciudadanía N° 1.105.781 071 de
Honda, se encuentra vinculada a nuestra compañía con las siguientes condiciones:
Funciones:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Monitoreo de Servidores de aplicación Weblogic.
Supervisión de las estadísticas de rendimiento de Weblogic.
Monitoreo de Infraestructura SCA (OSB,SCA, BAM).
Instalación de Directorios OlD/OIM
Despliegue de Aplicaciones.
Pruebas de funcionamiento OSB, SOA, 8am
Tipo de contrato: Prestación de Servicios
Función: Consultora CAPA MEDIA Júnior
Inicio del contrato: 02 de Diciembre de 2.014
Finalización del contrato: 25 de Diciembre de
2015
Se expide por solicitud del interesado a los Dos (02) días del mes de Febrero de 2016.
Cordialmente,
,1 ks i 11 ki 111
71
~
'.
Ah
Liliana Isabel Losada Piamonte
Gerente de Operaciones
Hardnetics Ltda.
cel:(+57) (300)6642216
Oficina (+57) (1)7590737
E- mali: Uosadda@hardnetics.com
00O204
HARDEUCS LTDA
MT 900.138.448.4
Avenida 19 NO. 95.31/55 Of. 309
I1ADNEflCS
Oficina (+57)(1)7590737
CERTIFICACION
Senores: Ministerio de tclucacion
El Departamento de Recursos Humanos de HARDNETICS LTDA, certifica que la señora MONICA
GYSSETH RIANO RODRIGUEZ identificada con cédula de ciudadanía N° 1.105.781 071 de Honda, se
encuentra vinculada a nuestra compañía con las siguientes condiciones:
Funciones:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Monitoreo de Servidores de aplicación Weblogic.
Supervisión de las estadísticas de rendimiento de Weblogic.
Monitoreo de Infraestructura SOA (OSB,SOA, BAM).
Instalación de Directorios OID/OIM
Despliegue de Aplicaciones.
Pruebas de funcionamiento OSB, SOA, Bam
Tipo de contrato: Prestación de Servicios
Función: Consultora CAPA MEDIA Júnior
Inicio del contrato: 04 de Enero de 2.016
Finalización del contrato: 10 de Marzo de 2016
Se expide por solicitud del interesado a los Dos (02) días del mes de Febrero de 2016.
Cordialmente,
•Uks i 1111 :11 r
"
jh
a;v;;aiijpwi '
Liliana Isabel Losada Piamonte
Gerente de Operaciones
Hardnetics Ltda.
Cel:(+57) (300)6642216
Oficina (+57) (1)7590737
E- mail: llospdda@hprdnetics.com
00O205
PRICELESS C010t1A SAS
CERTWICA QUE
E] (La) seora) MONICA GYSSETH RIAÑO ROORIGUEZ. idelilicado(a)
, cédi.Ñ de ciudadana No. 1.105.781071 se encuentra wcado(a)a es
Compania desde el dia 10 de marzo de 2016 mediante con~ a temino
indefinido.
.e Au..ente desempa el cargo de ADMiNISTRADOR DE
APUCACIONES.
Se ede la presente cert,flcaóón en Bogá el 14 dejuho de 2016
Cordente,
lLáir
PRICE~O
øt
o'e4z'.1
.
OSCAR AVJER VELASQUEZ CARRILLO
!
RDEQSrlÓN HUMANA
PRICLESS COLOMBIA S.A.S.
NIT. 830.103.650.1
8o:
PRXELE* ¡ COLOUW S&1 CO1JACIL ¡A$
Catr 127A * E3 -¿5 Ce~ Eff4wT%~ C~ »m ^ 01 303
M0i Mei !(. 1 S Oft~ 69, Pa
Oc.t
PEX. (571 (7441414 F (571 $75737
(571 j744 %4 14
00O206
RPIUCA DE
f't4T*ÇVL4 PROF51O(VAL Nq.
!!2!N$ENO DE SISTEMAS
-....-.--.- ----j
-----.a
a--..-
(JCO207
REPU8LICA DE COLOMBIA
ÍDENTÍFICACION PERSONAL
CEDLiIA CE CIULAN.A
1.105.781.071
FUAÑO RODRÍGUEZ
GYSSETH
1
r
-
,
inner
consutdng
Bogotá D O., Septiembre 17 de 2016
Señores
FEDERACION NACIONAL DE MUNICIPIOS
Ciudad
Referencia: Licitación Pública 016 de 2016
El suscrito, MONICA GYSSETH RIAÑO RODRIGUEZ mayor de edad, domiciliado en Bogotá D.C.,
con cédula de ciudadanía Nro. 1.105.781.071 Expedida en Bogotá D.C., en atención al Concurso
correspondiente a la Licitación Publica número 016 de 2016, en mi calidad propuesto para el Rol de
Profesional 4.2 por medio del presente manifiesto la intención y me comprometo a trabajar con el
proponente INNERCONSULTING SAS, en caso de salir favorecido con la adjudicación del contrato
y certifico que no he participado en la preparación o elaboración de la presente convocatoria.
De igual manera, con la presente carta autorizo única y exclusivamente a INNERCONSULTING
SAS, para que presente mi hoja de vida como integrante del equipo de trabajo.
Atentamente,
O Jh
ONICA/GYSSETH RIAÑO RODRIGUEZ
.C. 1.1 05. 781.071 DE BOGOTA
.P. 25255180211CND
j (57-1)4757555
? Calle 119A # 70G91 - Bogotá, Colombia
www.innerconsutting.com
00O209
inner
consufti ng
PROFESIONAL 5.2
(ORACLE DATA QUALITY / BASE DE DATOS AMBIENTE RAC)
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
0CíJ210
DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA
Dii
PERFIL
Soy Profesional en Ingeniera de Sistemas e Informática, con amplia experiencia en
administración bases de datos, manteniendo la disponibilidad de la plataforma de Oracle y
SQL que alberga los diferentes sistemas de información del cliente. Desarrollo las
actividades de verificación, preparación de servidores, elaboración de lista de chequeo,
actividades periódicas de afinamiento, procedimientos, auditorías de apoyo a nuevas
actualizaciones, planeo los requerimientos solicitados y requeridos por el cliente. Realizo
la instalación, configuración y administración de servidores de bases de datos en
ambiente RAC manteniendo siempre la información íntegra y en línea a través de
diferentes arquitecturas en RAC, Red Hat Clustering, que mantienen las aplicaciones en
alta disponibilidad.
Experiencia en manejo de bases de datos: Instalación de ORACLE e instalación de la
instancia ASM, Verificación del estado del clúster que permite validar tanto en
preinstalación como en pos instalación. Componentes básicos para el funcionamiento del
clúster como espacio en disco, memoria, procesos, integridad del clúster.
Poseo experiencia en herramientas de Inteligencia de Negocios y Herramienta
desarrolladora: Business Objects XI: Administración de la Consola Central - CMC y
(Central Configuration Manager-CCM), generación de reportes integrados en: Crystal
Reports, Weblntelligence, Desktopintelligence y Xcelsius; experiencia en soporte a
usuario final, soporte técnico remoto.
Poseo gran capacidad de liderazgo, soy responsable, organizada, adaptable a cambios,
busco el cumplimiento de objetivos, promuevo el trabajo en equipo, poseo interés
permanente hacia el crecimiento personal y profesional.
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
0 0 11
Estuve a cargo de la definición de arquitectura e implementación de base de datos con
sus correspondientes reglas de integridad, consistencia y perfilamiento para el Proyecto
Lexbase.com
Participe en el Proyecto Nube privada Fundación Universidad Autónoma de Colombia
realizando actividades de verificación, preparación de servidores, elaboración de lista de
chequeo, instalación de productos Oracle Plataforma del sistema integrado de transporte
(ITS) Proceso De Registro De Foto Detección.
Cargo
Fecha
Teléfono
INGENIERO BASES DE DATOS
Mayo 23 de 2012 hasta la fecha
:4758811
• ALFA INGENIEROS
Desarrollo de soluciones analíticas de Data Warehouse: Extracción transformación,
integración, análisis y carga datos de sistemas ERP del cliente y de otros sistemas
heredados, usando los modelos lógicos de datos de la industria de Teradata.
Actividades realizadas:
Realización de especificaciones ETL (documento para la Extracción, transformación y
carga) para poblar la Bodega de datos. Elaboración de los esquemas (SQL Y DSF) de la
base de datos donde se describe la estructura de cada campo de la tabla, se construyen
los Shelis que proveen una interfaz de usuario para acceder a los servicios del sistema
operativo.
Manejo y utilizo la herramienta ETL: Datastage que soporta la extracción, integración y
transformación de altos volúmenes de datos.
Realizo la creación o modificación de querys de vistas y tablas para la base de datos, así
como los querys de los Store Procedures encargados de la carga histórica de algunos de
los procesos.
Elaboro documentación como: el plan de instalación y procedimiento operacional de
procesos DataStage (Jobs, sequences, querys y parámetros) desarrollados o
modificados, con el fin de cargar al DWH la información concerniente a dichos procesos.
Proyectos:
ETB, Movistar.
Cargo
Fecha
Teléfono
: Consultor
: Abril 2011 - Mayo 2012
: 213-1480
• TinySoft Ltda
Se realiza la documentación y redacción de procesos en proyectos de desarrollo de
software.
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
OCO 212
INFORMACIÓN PERSONAL
Fecha de Nacimiento
Cedula de ciudadanía
Lugar de Nacimiento
Estado Civil
Licencia de Conducción
Pasaporte N°
9 de julio de 1982
52903.350 de Bogotá
Bogotá D. C. - Cundinamarca
Casada
Categoría BI Cl
AQ988514
EXPERIENCIA LABORAL Y LOGROS
o INNERCONSULTINO S.A.S
Consultaría y desarrollo de soluciones informáticas de tecnología para el Sistema de
Ingresos y Prestaciones Económicas (SIPE) de la Caja de Seguro Social de la República
de Panamá en el sector salud y seguridad social.
Actividades realizadas:
Defino y aplico políticas de almacenamiento y gestión de datos. Desarrollo las actividades
de verificación, preparación de servidores, elaboración de lista de chequeo, actividades
periódicas de afinamiento, procedimientos, auditorías de apoyo a nuevas actualizaciones,
planeo los requerimientos solicitados y requeridos por el cliente.
Realizo la instalación, configuración y administración de servidores de bases de datos en
ambiente RAC manteniendo siempre la información íntegra y en línea a través de
diferentes arquitecturas en RAC. Red Hat Clustering, que mantienen las aplicaciones en
alta disponibilidad.
Desarrollo de soluciones analíticas de PL/SQL: Extracción transformación, integración,
análisis y carga datos para la Caja de Seguro Social de Panamá. Elaboración de los
esquemas (SOL Y CTL) de la base de datos donde se describe la estructura de cada
campo de las tablas. As¡ como la instalçión, configuración y administración de servidores
de base de datos en ambiente RAC.
Experiencia en manejo de bases de datos: Instalacion de ORACLE e instalación de la
instancia ASM, Verificación del estado del cluster que permite validar tanto en
preinstalación como en postinstalación. Componentes básicos para el funcionamiento del
cluster como espacio en disco, memoria, procesos, integridad del cluster.
Diseño y realización de Procesos. Pruebas. Requerimientos. Elaboración de
Documentación. Monitoreo de servidores Linux por medio del Terminal, en sistema
operativo Linux. Elaboración de gráficos en la herramienta Cacoo, tales como mapas
mentales, wireframes, diagramas UML, y de redes, entre otros.
Realicé la adecuación para el cargue de la Data para la Caja de Seguro Social de
Panamá.
Encargada de la transferencia y depuración de la información de forma segura, eficiente y
confiable de acuerdo con las especificaciones funcionales y no funcionales para "Cong Ty
Hoang Anh Victory" en el periodo comprendido entre el 15 de mayo de 2015 al 15 de
agosto de 2015.
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
00O213
Actividades realizadas
desarrollo de software.
: Documentación y redacción de procesos en proyectos de
Cargo
: Ingeniero Documentador
Fecha
Teléfono
: Abril 2010 Abril 2011
: 638 61 03
• ABITS COLOMBIA
Servicios de consultoría e implementación de herramientas de ingeniería de software, en
herramientas de Inteligencia de Negocios y Herramientas Desarrolladoras de Business
Objects XI: Administración de la Consola Central - CMC y (Central Configuration
Manager-CCM), generación de reportes integrados en: Crystal Reports, Weblntelligence,
Desktopintelligence y Xcelsius.
: Administración de la Consola Central - CMC, generación de
Actividades realizadas
Reports, Weblntelligence, Desktopintelligence y
reportes integrados en: Crystal
Xcelsius.
Proyectos:
ETB, carbones del CERREJÓN, PROPAL S.A., entre otros.
Consultor Business Intelligence
Cargo
Fecha
Teléfono
: Junio 2009 Abril 2010
: 5284440
• PANACA SABANA.
Utilización de la herramienta PuTTY, control de los torniquetes de acceso al parque,
verificación de su funcionamiento con respecto a la lectura de los brazaletes (códigos de
barras) respecto a la Base de datos, Configuración de sistemas WinPOS y demás
estaciones de trabajo, toma de información de las diferentes concesiones (restaurantes)
del parque.
Actividades realizadas
Configuración de sistemas winpos y análisis en sitio.
Cargo
Ingeniera
Fecha
Teléfono
Septiembre 2008 Mayo 2009
3077002
e
SOPORTE, INSTALACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO DE EQUIPOS DE CÓMPUTO
Amplia experiencia en el mercado de servicios informáticos y equipos de cómputo,
trabajando con ingenieros y técnicos especializados con un importante know-how.
Experiencia en soporte a usuario final, mantenimiento y reparación de hardware,
impresoras, instalación de software, manejo de equipos VoIP, cableado estructurado,
estructura IP, equipos de sistemas y computación.
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
00O214
Actividades realizadas
cómputo y redes
: Soporte, instalación y mantenimiento de equipos de
Cargo
Fecha
Teléfono
: Ingeniera
: Noviembre 2004 a Septiembre 2008
:4917615
. GUARDIANES COMPAÑÍA LÍDER DE SEGURIDAD
Asesoría y diseño en soluciones de conectividad inalámbrica para personas naturales,
jurídicas, colegios, entre otros; donde el proceso de análisis se combina con el control y
seguridad por medio de la conectividad inalámbrica (soluciones a través del protocolo de
Internet, Soluciones Integrales de Seguridad), Trabajando en conjunto con las empresas:
PEOPLE TIC - CENTINEL DE SEGURIDAD.
Actividades realizadas
sitio.
Cargo:
Fecha:
Teléfono:
:Mailing, gestión de mercadeo, asesoría y análisis en
Ingeniera
Noviembre 2007 Julio 2008
5335020 - 6109745
INSERTEL—ACTIVA
Instalación, mantenimiento de hardware, software, de equipos de sistemas y computación
cableada estructurada y administración de las salas de inscripción por parte del personal
de Acción Social de la Presidencia de la República
Actividades realizadas
Cargo:
Fecha:
Teléfono:
: Administración de equipos de sistemas.
Técnico en Telecomunicaciones
Junio - Noviembre 2007
4819336/37
SOFTWARE Y ALGORITMOS
Experiencia en: instalación, configuración, administración, migración y soporte a servidor
de correo Microsoft Exchange, mesa de ayuda, mantenimiento de equipos de cómputo y
redes, soporte a usuario final, mantenimiento de hardware y software, etc.
Actividades realizadas
:Backup de archivos de los usuarios finales,
configuración y migración de correo.
Cargo:
Técnico en sistemas
Fecha:
Mayo - Septiembre 2006
Teléfono:
6002600
• COMPUFÁCIL S.A
"Integración y Comercialización de Soluciones de Tecnología de la Información," que
involucran los servicios de Diseño, Implementación, Instalación, Mantenimiento, Soporte,
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
OC 0215
Administración, Capacitación y Suministro en Venta o Arriendo de Hardware y Software
de Plataforma, Virtualización y Seguridad.
Actividades realizadas
: Implementación, Instalación, Mantenimiento,
Soporte,Administración de Hardware y Software.
Cargo:
Fecha:
Teléfono:
Técnico en sistemas
Enero - Octubre 2005
8767376
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
OC 0216
1999 - 2006 Universidad Autónoma de Colombia
Ingeniería de sistemas
Bogotá
1993 - 1998 Instituto Distrital de Comercio Manuela Beltrán
Bogotá
Bachillerato técnico con énfasis en secretariado y contabilidad
IDIOMAS
71 2011
GOETHE - INSTITUT
Alemán - Nivel principiante.
El 2008-2009
Universidad Nacional de Colombia
Ingles Nivel intermedio.
Bogotá
Bogotá
OTROS
El 2010 DIPLOMADO EN BASES DE DATO ORACLE
El Diplomado se desarrolla apoyándose en algunos elementos tecnológicos que ofrece
Oracle 9i, además de liderar el apoyo de las gestiones y procesos de actualización
empresariales en relación con las Tecnologías de Información y Comunicaciones, en la
Unidad de Extensión de la Facultad de Ingeniería de la Universidad Distrital Francisco
Jose De Caldas con capacidad de estructurar la información formal de una organización,
mediante una Base de Datos creada, implementada y administrada a través de un SGBD
(Sistema Gestionador de Bases de Datos).
El 2009--2010 BUSINESS OBJECTS herramienta certificada por SAP.
Informes en las últimas herramientas de Inteligencia de Negocios y Herramientas
Desarrolladoras: Business Objects XI: Crystal Reports, Weblntelligence,
Destopklntelligence, Designer y Xcelsius, según las necesidades de información de cada
usuario, tales como facturas, declaraciones tributarias y reportes estadísticos, que ayudan
a cada integrante de la organización a entender mejor las operaciones del negocio y
tomar decisiones correctas. Abits Colombia LTDA
El 2007 - 2008
CCNA - CISCO ENGINEER - MICROSOFT CERTIFIED SYSTEMS
Curso especialista en diseñar e implementar la infraestructura de las soluciones
empresariales, basadas en la plataforma y software de los servidores de Microsoft.
Global Knowledge, experts teaching experts.
KASPERSKY LABS
El 2008
Participación charla técnico - comercial Kaspersky por parte de Kav Colombia limitada,
mayorista autorizado de Kaspersky Labs.
El 2008
SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM GEOVISION
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
Instalación y manejo del sistema Surveiltance System Geovision. Software Geovision
Surveillance System, sintonizadora de hasta 16 cámaras para tener el control total
de los movimientos de su sitio de interés a vigilar por Internet.
El 2007
DESARROLLO DE APLICACIONES MÓVILES CON JAVA 2 ME
Realizado con la empresa Makenta con amplia experiencia de sus profesionales y
expertos y las certificaciones internacionales en desarrollo de software de estos, junto con
el apoyo de grupos de investigación en universidades (caso grupo GITUN de la
Universidad Nacional de Colombia.
El 2005
CNEIS UNIVERSIDAD DE MANIZALES
Congreso Nacional De Estudiantes de ingeniería de Sistemas (Software Libre GNU
¡Linux) en la Universidad De Manizales con importantes temas como: Redes y
Telecomunicaciones, Sistemas de Información, Inteligencia Artificial, Desarrollos
Tecnológicos y Políticas, Conferencias, foros y Demostraciones
JORNADA UNIVERSITARIA DE SOFTWARE LIBRE
El 2003
El grupo Linux de la Universidad Distrital con la fil semana de Linux de la Universidad
Distrital y Primeras Jornadas Universitarias de Software Libre GLUD
Cl 2002
VII TALLER DE GESTIÓN EMPRESARIAL
Facultad de Ingeniería y el departamento de Informática y Sistemas UNIVERSIDAD
AUTONOMA DE COLOMBIA en calidad de participante
1998-1999 SOFTWARE
Windows 98 en adelante, Office 97, Internet, Mantenimiento de Equipos Conocimientos
básicos en lenguajes de programación como C++, Visual Basic, flash.
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
REFERENCIAS PERSONALES
ALEIDA RAMÍREZ
Cargo:
Ingeniera de Sistemas
Teléfono:
Periódico EL TIEMPO
3138347798
YAMILE RAMÍREZ
Cargo:
Administradora SAP
Teléfono:
Universidad del Rosario
2636754
REFERENCIAS LABORALES
OMAR SIERRA ALARCÓN
Cargo:
Ingeniero de Sistemas
Teléfono:
PANACA SABANA S.A.
Of: (571)3077002 ext. 4150
CARLOS E. CASTILLO FUGUET
Cargo:
Ingeniero de Proyectos
Teléfono:
People TIC Ltda.
(571) 5335020— Celular (314) 349 9768
DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA
C.0 52'903.350 de Bogotá
Diana Paola Castillo Peralta
(1 CO 21 i
UNIVERSIDAD DISTRITAL FRANCISCO JOSÉ DE CALDAS
UNIDAD DE EXTENSIÓN
FACULTAD DE INGENIERÍA
CERTIFICA QUE:
Documento de identidad No. CC 52.903.350 de Bogotá
ASISTIÓ Y APROBÓ EL DIPLOMADO EN
BASES DE DATOS
Con intensidad de 120 horas, dictado entre el 21 de julio de 2010y el 15 de septiembin
de 2010
En constancia firman:
MC
2Q2l
iralo lacabamo
Decaa*
Facvltad de I.ge.ieiia
In
C05
)s Ramírez
de Extensión
U.
Facultad de Iuge.ierfa
En la ciudad de Bogotá D.C., a los dieciséis (16) días del mes de septiembre de 2010
No. DB13..2010-02-004
GEOVISION DE COLOMBIA
CERTIFICA Á
PA OLA CASTILLO
C. C. 52.903.350
En la instalación y manejo del sistema Surveillance System Geovision
con una intensidad horaria de 4 horas
Bogota; 29 de Febrero de 2008.
,vIion
d€ Colombía
.069.7568
MARTHA CECILIA CARDENAS CARVAJAL
[ng/JULIO ENRQUE PINTO
GERENTE GEOVIS ION DE COLOMBIA
DIRECTOR PROYECTOS GEOVIS ION DE COLOMBIA
7zv Co(ombia Limitada
íMayorita autorizaío en Colombia Le 7(pspersky Labs
La"
[hace constar Ca participación cíe:
Pao(a Cati1Tt - (People Tic
COLOMBIA
a Ca charla técnico - come rciaíler[J'five(c(e 7(aspersk,y
Intensidad: 8 floras
(
7
flbiaÇa' 'Vn be Insi r
Gómez
Yayo 10 de 2008
Cisci uar
r
R
.
,p s
?rtlflcatlon
CSCO1 1,417644
Valid through July 11, 2011
cisco..
•ili.ilu.
cIsco
Cisco Career Certífications
Diana Paola Castiffilo
HAS SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED THE Cisco CAREER CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS AND IS RECOGNIZED AS A
Cisco Certífied Network Associate CCNA
july 11, 2011
Cisco ID No. CSCOI 1417644
VALIDTHROUGH
1
f
Validate this certificates authenticity at
www.cisco.com/go/verifycertificate
Certificate Verification No. 396424169072ANCN
John Chambers
Chairman and CEO
Cisco Systems, Inc.
OPCnx So4oe Pne wciAccas H ssx* Aanet BPX. CaaIyot
2øO6 C19C0 Sy0I!N1. Ir M r430 re&ereø. CCV.1hcaco og aid Lt* Ciac &3va1e or.duo kgie irad«~OP Coco Swems, tic, CEjnUIncJ the ivay Wo WoçE. jya Pry.arid Loam w aOIvtcø
C EM CCDP 'CIE CCP CCNA (.C.NP COSP Coco theCac re nfed øno4wor ExpÑil toy, $o OS Cco Proas Ceco 'yetems OBCO Sysremo Cap t 300 Crocó Oyere ogo UacO Unsly E re ireIoPv ErhuChanr,e& EroerFasi EWo.Swrrct. Fa04 Stop Foflow M
oc..
MOX.
Nesv.otkhrg
AcorMrpc Netwok Regtelrec Peckat, PIX, PrnCoyrect. ReIeMUX,
M
Stidy,
LigrrrSrroam.
UnSsye
CuteS
los.
PTV
iQ
Esportee
Uro
O
oo.
rO
Pto
Pa
drreao
$sorecarri
Wmyr§a For,Sheo OaOsve S1sStack. 30mo1.wrk, Witemol Caolevt
ScSPare Stoacest
SracWeo j!W Foes. Way ro imsame 'Yytjr iMmrM Qtii. vd TrasPac ero reç.04eed teoemare c Caco O erro Oc arcOfsx is of Ibarea or Ira USeS Orases erO corten oSte COtfltflOe.
MoStrar ríebr
erSronoO ti iSeo dcc,rneoS o' Weboto oro Irte orcporty el the espectro corare The
53 flr v.orct peSiar ocre. ro' arply a perireretep
5yigt)q) bolerOS caco aoci arp orrer co'rprery ücoç
3814051
LA REPUBLICA DE COLOMBIA
Y
LA UNIVERSIDAD AUTÓNOMA DE COLOMBIA
PERSONERIA JURIDICA No 264 DEL 4 DE FEBRERO DE 1972
RECONOCIDA COMO UNIVERSIDAD POR RESOLUCIÓN No. 03279 193 DEL MINEDLLCACIÓN
CONFIEREN EL TÍTULO PROFESIONAL DE
INGENIERA DE SISTEMAS
DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA
EXPEDIDA EN: B000TADC.
C. C. Oto. 52903.350
QUIEN CUMPLIÓ SATISFACTORIAMENTE CON LOS REQUISITOS ACADÉMICOS EXIGIDOS.
EN TESTIMONIO DE ELLO OTORGA EL PRESENTE
DIPL MA
DIiEREDE2006
8oGoT&D.c.
000
VIO,
,TOR
JECN
cz
cil
SECR RIO GENERAL
No.
17291
don
en lo
ECANC
Pe;or,er,a Jurdicó
No 2*34 de Febrero 4 le 3972
Re*ohjo6n No 032791W3
MioeclureciOn
Acta de Grado
Folio No. 3708
Acta No. 3700
En Bogotá D.C., a los 07 días del mes de diciembre de 2006, en el Auditorio
"Fundadores" de la Universidad Autónoma de Colombia, se reunieron los
Doctores MARÍA CLAUDIA LOMBO LIÉVANO Rectora de la Universidad,
ERNESTO RICO Secretario General, GERMÁN VELANDIA PELÁEZ
Decano (le la Facultad de INGENIERÍA, con el fin de llevar a cabo la
ceremonia de grado de la alumna DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA
con C.C. No. 52.903.350 de Bogotá D.C., quien llenó todos los requisitos que
los reglamentos de la Universidad exigen para optar al Titulo Profesional de
INGENIERA DE SISTEMAS.
El Rector tomó el Juramento reglamentario e hizo entrega del correspondiente
Diploma debidamente firmado, sellado y registrado en libro de radicación No.
53 - Folio No. 25972-C, así como la presente Acta con el sello de la
Universidad. Terminó sus estudios en el año 2005, jornada nocturna. Se
expide la presente copia del Acta de O
mes de diciembre de 2006.
ER1STO RICO
ec1etario General
á D.C., a los 07 días del
In
•1
,
••
4
r
44•
.I4
.
O •
,
.
.
...
;.
¿
si
',. .i..$
21
-
.
.,
•
p
' ''
Ivela..( 1,
4
a
,
l. • •
<.I
u... •
.
4
L
#
'?I
s-
.
::.:.:.::.:.::.: . .
•:
••
»
f
A• 1
. •
¼.
jb
;4
3
,
p
.v
, .'::, . , •
4#.
!
.
.
.
.
p
?
. .
fr
4If
4
•
.
REPUBLICA DE COLOMBIA
IDENTFJCACION PERSONAL
CEDULA DE CIUDADANIA
52.903.350
NUM Lli(
CASTILLO PERALTA
AI'ELLR)OS
DIANA PAOLA
1
-
• -t:- i
-•
-i - •'- • --
1IFM4
El Grupo Linux de la Universidad Distrital
Certifica que:
I'anla Castillo Peralta
identificado con C.C. 52903350 de Bogotá
Asistió al evento
III Semana Linux de la Universidad Distrital ,j
Primeras Jornadas Universitarias de Software Libre
Organizado por el Grupo Linux de la Universidad Distrital del 11 al 15 de octubre del añc
2004, el cual tuvo una duración de 40 horas.
Expedido en Bogotá D.C. a los 15 días del mes de octubre de 200'
tL7
Jorge Guevara
Coordinador General GLUD
Coordinador académico GLUD
VII
TALLER DE
GES TION
EMPRESARIA
La Facultad de Ingeniería y el Departamento de Informática y Sistemas
UNIVERSIDAD A UTONOMA DE COLOMBIA
Certifican que:
DIANA PA OLA CA S TILL O PERALTA
C. C. 52.903.350 de Bogota
Asistió al VII Taller de Gestión Empresarial
Dictado el 18 de abril de 2.004 con una
Yiaaa de 12 horas en calidad de
Participante
1
•
019~611 Ido de Gsbón Emxesan.
un lo
¡ng.,
Director
Departamento de Informática y Sistemas
¡ng. Beatriz Re repo Moni la
Organizadora Directora
Taller de Gestión Emnre aria!
u
RHV
M
FACULTAD DE INGENIERIA
Certifica que
UNIVERSIDAD
DE
MANIZALES
Dí.ij7.i.P.iol.i Castillo Peralta
Participé en el
w,i
Congreso internacional software libre GNU/Linux
Software libre para el mundo desde el eje de conocimiento
Realizado por la Facultad de inueníería ae la Uníuersídad de manizales
durante lOS oías 16.117 u 10 de marzo de 2005
7-)
7
•
Rector
Vicerrector Aca)éwiico
Decano
r' 4
UNIVERSIDAD
DE
MAN IZALES
Diana Paoía Castillo Peralta
Participó en el XIV Congreso Nacional de Estudiantes
de ingeniería de Sistemas
"Software libre para el mundo desde el eje de conocimiento"
Q,
Rector
Eço )a1
Carlos Alberto Cortés C.
José Femando Mej a
'Ylm Eduardo Ángel
Decano
Coordinador Docentes
Coordinador Estudiantes
manizales, marzo 18. 17 u 18 de 2005
,
inner
consulting
CERTIFICAMOS QUE:
Que DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA, identificada con el número de cedula
52.903.350 de Bogotá, se encuentra vinculada con nuestra compañía desde el 24
de mayo de 2012 como ingeniera en actividades relacionadas con productos Oracle
para entidades y compañías Privadas así:
Realizando la instalación, configuración y administración de servidores de base
'de datos en ambiente RAC, para el Sistema de Ingresos y Prestaciones
Económicas (SIPE) de la Caja de Seguro Social de la República de Panamá en
el sector salud y seguridad social.
• Para la adecuación y el cargue de la Data para la Caja de Seguro Social de
/ Panamá, desde el 15 de Octubre de 2008 hasta la fecha utilizando la
herramienta Oracle data Quality.
Efectúo para el Proyecto Nube privada ejecutado por esta compañía en la
Fundación Universidad Autónoma de Colombia en el periodo comprendido entre
el 15 de mayo de 2015 al 15 de Octubre de 2015. actividades de verificación,
/preparación de servidores, elaboración de lista de chequeo, instalación de
productos Oracle, base de datos ambiente RAC.
•
Proyecto para la transferencia y depuración de la información de forma segura,
eficiente y confiable de acuerdo con las especificaciones funcionales y no
funcionales para Gong Ty Hoang Anh Victory", utilizando herramientas Oracle
Data Quality, en el periodo comprendido entre el 15 de mayo de 2015 al 15 de
octubre de 2015.
(574) 4757555
Calle 119A # 706-91 Bogotá, Colombia
wwwtnnerconsuLtmg .com
0 CO233
,
inner
consu[ting
La anterior certificación se expide a solicitud del interesado a los trece (13) días del
mes de Septiembre del año Dos Mil Dieciséis (2016).
Cordialmente,
'1 /&
OLGkROCIO UTIERREZ L.
Directora AdrMtiva Y de Recursos Humanos
INNERCONSULTING S.A.S. CEL.(57-1)321 -4353847
FIJO (57-1) 4757555 EXT 311
E-MAIL: OGUTIERREZ@INNERCONSULTING.Com
I (57 1) 4757555
Ç) CaUe 119A # 706-91 Bogotá. Colombia
wwwinnerconsuiting.com
,
inner
cons 1dng
CARTA DE COMPROMISO DEL EQUIPO
Bogotá D O., Septiembre 16 de 2016
Señores
FEDERACION NACIONAL DE MUNICIPIOS
Ciudad
Referencia: Licitación Pública 016 de 2016
DIANA PAOLA CASTILLO PERALTA mayor de edad, domiciliado en
Bogotá D.C., con cédula de ciudadanía Nro. 52.903.350 expedida en Bogotá D.C,
El suscrito,
en atención al Concurso correspondiente a la Licitación Publica número 016 de 2016, en mi calidad
propuesto para el Rol de Profesional 5.1 base de Datos Ambiente Rac y Oracle DATA QYALITI por
medio del presente manifiesto la intención y me comprometo a trabajar con el proponente
INNERCONSULTING SAS, en caso de salir favorecido con la adjudicación del contrato y certifico
que no he participado en la preparación o elaboración de la presente convocatoria.
De igual manera, con la presente carta autorizo única y exclusivamente a INNERCONSULTING
SAS, para que presente mi hoja de vida como integrante del equipo de trabajo.
Atentamente,
DIANA PAOLA CAS ILLO PERALTA
C.C. 52.903.350 DE BOGOTA
T.P. 25255140357CND
(57 -1) 4757555
CaUe 119A # 70G-91 - Bogotá, Colombia
www.innerconsutting.com
00O235
inner
J! consulting
PROFESIONAL 5.3
(ORACLE SOA / BPM)
•
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
OCO23j
CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES
PERFIL PROFESIONAL
Ingeniero de Sistemas, Candidato MBA 2016Conocimiento en Mercadeo, Finanzas y logística con experiencia en arquitectura de software, diseño de
arquitecturas orientadas a servicio e implementación de aplicaciones de software. Interés profesional en
consultoría en dirección, mercadeo o gestión de operaciones.
FORMACIÓN ACADÉMICA
MBA Candidato 2016 Magíster
en Administración
Universidad de los Andes
Ingeniero de Sistemas, 2005
Universidad Distrital Francisco Jose de Caldas
CERTIFICACIONES Y CURSOS
Oracle SOA Suite llg: Build Composite Applications Ed 2, 2011
Oracle SOA Suite llg: Essential Concepts, 2011 Oracle Fusion
Middleware llg: Build Web Services Edl Oracle Uriiversity
Sun Certified Programmer for the Java 2 Platform Standard Edition 5.0, 2007 SL-275
lava Programming Language, 2007 Sun Microsystems, Sun Learning Services
EXPERIENCIA LABORAL
Stefanini.
Arquitecto SOA
Enero 2014-Actualmente
Funciones:
•
Acompañamiento técnico en la definición de procesos.
•
Diseñar y coordinar la implementación de plataformas tecnológicas de
aprovisionamiento.
•
Consultoría en diseño y desarrollo de componentes Orientados a SOA Logros:
•
Redefinicián de la plataforma de promociones del cliente que permite reducir el time-to market
en la creación de nuevas compañas promocionales.
•
Consultoría técnica para la presentación de propuestas de desarrollo Logros
•
Implementación de sistema de simulación de pensiones (Sector Seguros)
•
Acompañamiento e implementación de portal para la pre aprobación de créditos
universitarios (Sector Banca y Finanzas)
Ministerio de la protección Social
Septiembre de 2006- Marzo de 2007
Analista de Sistemas
Funciones
•
Análisis de la información histórica de los recobros por medicamentos y tutelas al Fosyga.
•
Seguimiento y auditoria a los paquetes mensuales de recobros por medicamentos y tutelas al
•
Seguimiento y auditoria a los paquetes por reclamaciones de Accidentes de Tránsito,
Fosyga.
Terrorismo, atención a desplazados y catástrofes naturales.
Logros
•
Análisis de las estructuras de datos de los recobros y su posterior definición de consultas
para hallar la información requerida por los stakeholders
Universidad Nacional
Febrero de 2006 - Agosto de 2006
Coordinador Unidad de Informática
Funciones
•
Coordinación de tareas de aulas y monitores de la unidad.
•
Acompañamiento y asesoría en el proceso de contratación de proveedores de insumos tecnológicos
•
Desarrollo de aplicaciones para el control de la unidad
Logros
•
Desarrollo de aplicación de reservas de terminales, generación de reportes y análisis de capacidad
de las terminales
Frontera Software
Diciembre de 2005 - Febrero de 2006
Ingeniero de Desarrollo
Funciones
Implementación de aplicaciones web
Logros
•
Desarrollo de una aplicación para la generación y gestión de reportes mediante la
integración inteligente con Cognos Report Net
REFERENCIAS
A solicitud del interesado.
OCO23
REF'úBLICA DE COLOMBIA
MINISTERIO DE EDUCACIÓN NACIONAL Y EN SU NOMBRE
LA UNIVERSIDAD DISTRITAL.- FRANCISCOJOSE DE CALDAS
CONFIERE EL TÍTULO DE
i*
45ngi,nw
Qcani(o tSvit ruitíue
Con CO. No. 50.09MI3
-
QUIEN CUMPLIÓ CON LAS CONDICIONES ACADÉMICAS REQUERIDAS.
EN TESTIMONIO DE ELLO OTORGA EL PRESENTE
DIPLOMA
EN LA CIUDAD DE BOGOTÁ D.C., A LOS 26 DíAS DEL MES DE AQS/O
DE =5
w
lí,~AW
," 01
No.
cc
01756
Libro de Registro E
Rep. 7263
Folio NO.
/87
DRACLE
UNIVERSITY
CERTIFICADO
,de
SE
ASISTENCIA COMPLETA
CERTIFICA
QUE
CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES
C.C. 80.099.473
HA
FINALIZADO
ORACLE
EXITOSAMENTE
UNIVERSITY
EL
CURSO
EN
DE
Oracle SOA Suite llg: Build Composite Aplications
29 Agost..A1..09,S.ept....de.2011
lnst
ctor
Fecha
Learn Oracle From Oracle.
C147?O
................................282955.0
ID de Inscripción
DRACLE
UNIVERSITY
CERTIFICADO
de
SE
ASISTENCIA COMPLETA
CERTIFICA
QUE
CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES
C.C. 80.099.473
HA
FINALIZADO
ORACLE
EXITOSAMENTE
UNIVERSITY
EL
CURSO
EN
DE
Oracle SOA Suite llg: Essential Concepts
q
ns
uctor
25 Julio al 01 Agosto 2011
Fecha
Learn Oracle From Oracle.
C1477Q
2843779
ID de Inscripción
DRACLE
UNIVERSITY
CERTIFICADO
de ASISTENCIA
SE
COMPLETA
QUE
CERTII1cA
CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES
C. C. 80.Q99.473
HA
FIN ALIzADo
ORACLE
EXITOSAMENTE
UNIVERSITY
EL
CURSO
EN
DE
Oracle Fusion Middleware llg: Build Web Services
1 la!2 .de Julio 2011
structor
Fecha
Learn Oracle From Oracle.
C14710
243777
ID de Inscripción
Sun.
microsystems
IN RECOGNITION THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT:
CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES
C.C. 80.099.473
HAS AT1ENDED A COURSE OF INSTRUCTION IN:
SL-275 JAVA PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
TRAINING CENTER:
CYBERTRAINING Y CIA LTDA.
DATE/DURATION:
Camilo Andres Cruz Nieves
HAS FULFILLED ALL REQUIREMENTS AS A
SUN CERTIFIED PROGRAMMER
FOR THE JAVATM 2 PLATFORM, STANDARD EDITION 5.0
On December 6, 2007
jonathan 1. Schwartz, Chief ¿xecutive Officer and President, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
5j-ava-
Karie Wiflyerd, Vice President and Chief Learning Officer, Sun Educational Services
REP
.I..ff,BLICA DE COLOMBIA
IDENTIFICACION PERSONAL
CEDULA DE CIUDADANIA
APELLIDOS
stefanini
Informática
& Tecnología
CERTIFICACION
Hago constar que el (la) Señor(a) CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES, identificado (a) con Cédula de
Ciudadanía No 80099473 de BOGOTA, labora con INFORMÁTICA & TECNOLOGIA STEFANINI S.A.
MT. 800.114.672-1, desde el 7 de Enero de 2014, con un Contrato a Término Indefinido, desempeñándose
como PROFESIONAL OUTSOURCING,desarrollando actividades de instalación y configuración de
herramientas Oracle SONM Suite en alta disponibilidad
La presente se expide a solicitud del (la) interesado(a), en la ciudad de Bogotá D.C., el día 7 de
Septiembre de 2016.
Atentamente,
Jrtt eoO.114.872-t
Area de Nómina y Contratación
Informática & Tecnología Stefanini S.A.
Calle 122 No. 23 -46 Piso 5 Bogotá - Colombia
T 57 (1) 745 4777 F 57 (1) 7454777 ext. 117 www stefaninicolombia.com
indro
INDRA COLOMBIA LTDA NIT. 830.013.774-1
CERTIFICA
Que el señor CRUZ NIEVES CAMILO ANDRES identificado con cédula de ciudadanía número
80,099.473, labora para esta empresa desde el 13 de Abril de 2011 a Julio 15 de 2012, con un
contrato a término INDEFINIDO, como Ingeniero Senior T3 desarrollando actividades de
implementación de aplicaciones SOAOSB.
y..
Dada a solicitud del interesado, a los 20 días del mes de Mayo del año 2013.
Atentamente,
a"4
ffi
A PATRICI A
5L TDA
BELTRA
DIRECTORA RECURSOS HUMANOS !VAOS
Indra Colombia Ltda.
Nit. 830.013.774-1
Calle 96 No. 13 - 11
Bogotá D.C.
T + 57 i 646 36 00 F
+ 57 1 646 36 22
www,ndracpmoany.c
tJCO24s
lf
a cc
3t
REPUBLICA DE COLUM1Mç
CONSEJO PROFESIONAL NACIONAL DE INGENUERIA
COPNIA
1
JLA PROFES. 10I NAL , No
NDI rLI:,
SI.l
9Pj)P1Pi iJLi 4» Ty
~Al
(/
16103
4
(
:
DR
iVES
•J-
'73,
D DISTRITAL
alo`, DE
çALQ
'''-
•, -
flI*MA
$G & *ON&
306 031 31/1
Este es un documento público expedido en virtud de
la Ley 842 de 2003, que autoriza a su titular para
ejercer como ingeniero en todo el Territorio Nacional,,
En caso de extravío debe ser remitida al COPNIA
Calle 78 No. 9 57 Oficina 1301
TeL 3220102 Bogotá D.C.
r
,
inner
consulting
Bogotá O O., Septiembre 16 de 2016
Señores
FEDERACION NACIONAL DE MUNICIPIOS
Ciudad
Referencia: Licitación Pública 016 de 2016
El suscrito, CAMILO ANDRES CRUZ NIEVES mayor de edad, domiciliado en Bogotá D.C., con
cédula de ciudadanía Nro 80.099.473 Expedida en Bogotá D.C. en atención al Concurso
correspondiente a la Licitación Publica número 016 de 2016, en mi calidad propuesto para el Rol de
Profesional por medio del presente manifiesto la intención y me comprometo a trabajar con el
proponente INNERCONSULTING SAS en caso de salir favorecido con la adjudicación del contrato
y certifico que no he participado en la preparación o elaboración de la presente convocatoria.
De igual manera, con la presente carta autorizo única y exclusivamente a INNERCONSULTING
SAS, para que presente mi hoja de vida como integrante del equipo de trabajo.
Atentamente,
CAMILO AN7RES CRUZ NIEVES
C.Ó. 80.099A73 DE BOGOTA
T.P. 2525'141054CND
tJ (571) 4757555
Calle 119A # 70G -91 Bogotá, Colombia
www.innerconsutting.com
,
inner
consulting
PROFESIONAL 6
(MICROSOFT VISUAL STUDIO ENTREPISE / MICROSOFT TEAM
FOUNDATION)
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G -91 / Bogotá, Colombia
00O251
CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ
31
ita
PERFIL PROFESIONAL
Gestión Informática y Administrativa., Conocimientos Administración de BD SOL Server 2008-2012,
ORACLE 11 g, MySQL Y Postgress, Implementacion, migraciones y Administracion de SharePoint y
Project 365/2013/2010/2007, Administracion y parametrización de TFS Team foundation Server'
2013 Ultimate. Arquitectura y administración de despliegues de versiones, esquematización de
integración continua entre diferentes ambientes (Desarrollo, pruebas y producción) PHP, HTML y
MySqI. Joomia. Comunicaciones Planeación Estratégica, Trabajo en Equipo, Excelentes Relaciones
interpersonales y capacidad para asumir responsabilidades. Terminal Server. Metodologías
Microsoft FrameWork y/o ITIL V3 2011.
Garantizar la correcta operación, utilización, estabilidad, disponibilidad, seguridad y desempeño de
los sistemas de información de la compañía, de acuerdo al plan estratégico de la Gerencia de
Sistemas, a las normas de auditoria y a los estándares definidos por la compañía.
EXPERIENCIA Y LOGROS
Periferia IT - Banco Falabela: CM Configuration Manager
Febrero 08 a Septiembre 2 de 2016
Migración de Código fuente de la herramienta Tortoise SVN a TFS Team Foundation Server 2013
Realización de despliegues
Versionarníento de Linea Base
Control del Ciclo de Vida del software
Herramientas: Visual Studio 2013~ SOL Server 2008 R2, Oraclellg,
Ejecucion de pruebas de componentes de software, compilación y publicación en ambiente de
Certificacion, y Core Bancario.
Administración de Team Foundation Server, arquitectura de TFS acorde a las políticas corporativas
y acordadas con los grupos de construcción : Branching an Merging entre ramas de diferentes
ambientes (Desarrollo, pruebas y Produccion).
GENEBSYS SAS CM Configuration Manager
30 de noviembre de 2015 hasta el 09 de febrero de 2016.
Administrador de Codigo fuente en el ciclo de vida de las aplicaciones en Control Versiones de
software y gestión de cambios, funciones:
1.Levantamiento y documentación del proceso de Administración de la configuración y elaboración
de propuesta de mejora de proceso.
2. Despliegues de versiones (Cambios Estandard, Normales y Emergentes).
3. Integración de fuentes en TFS Branches. desde Pruebas hasta Principal y LIB (Liberación).
o r n'
Gestor de Versiones y Despliegues de software:
• Administrador de Team Foundation Server, versionamiento y verificación de mezclas entre
diferentes ambientes de software, compilaciones, y creación de labels, verificación de
formatos de solicitud de despliegue.
Rol de Integrador:
• Verificación de las guías de integración en ambientes de desarrollo, pruebas,
preproducción y producción.
• Verificación de Cargue de fuentes en TFS y merges hacia los branch destino del
despliegues, creación de labeis.
WSP Bogotá Colombia (Consultores Regionales Asociados Ltda): Julio 2013 a 21 de Febrero
2014 Profesional de Base de Datos 1. Jefe Inmediato Jeifer Espinosa (Especialista de BD). Cel:
3165231712.
Interventoría en Componente de Bases de Datos a los Subsistemas de Recaudo, Control de Flota,
SISU e infraestructura al Concesionario Recaudo Bogotá en la implementación de la Fase III. de
Transporte Masivo Transmilenio S.A.
• Verificación de integridad y confidencial ¡dad de Información, disponibilidad y seguridad (BD
Oracle 11 en Tx de Recaudo)
• Trazabilidad de las transacciones de Uso de TISC (tarjeta inteligente sin contacto)
• Creación y Ejecución de Scripts que permiten conocer los escenarios de riesgo sobre
validaciones, recargas, venta, traslados de saldo, listas negras y cierres diarios de agente.
• Apoyo en Sql Server 2008 sobre la BD de Flota.
• Apoyo en MySql y Postg res sobre BD de Servicio al Ciudadano.
Acrecer Ltda.:Sept. 2012 a Marzo de 2013 Desarrollo y administrador de plataforma de SharePoint
Server 2010 y Project Server 2010.
Acompañamiento en implementación y administración de plataforma de proyectos, creación de sitios
y subsitios, creación de webparts, creación de plantillas de sitios en Project Pro, publicación en
Project Server, creación de calendarios de empresa, administración de recursos, línea base, tiempo
planeado, tiempo real, seguimiento de ruta critica.
FVS: Fondo de vigilancia y seguridad de Bogotá: 28/12/2011 - 27/06/2012 Interventor de
Conectividad Sistema Integrado de Video Vigilancia Contrato 620/2010. Teléfono: 2973220
Funciones:
• Verificación de conectividad CCTV
• Conocimientos profundos de AXXON y Citiloj
• Pruebas Funcionales y no funcionales a Mussor" software para reconocimiento de placas y
conteo vehicular e interfaz para manejo de la analítica de video, en todos los subsistemas
Vehículos, Colegios, Fronteras, Localidades y Centros de Monitoreo.
• Apoyo Administrativo: Verificación de Cumplimiento de los términos del contrato en la parte
técnica, y funcional reportando al departamento de planeación y jurídico para que tomen
medidas según el caso.
SENA
Centro de Servicios financieros Julio 2011 - a Diciembre 2011 Tutor Virtual —Administración
proyectos de desarrollo de software, Instructor SharePoint Foundation 2010-2013, Bases de
Datos.Teléfono.: 5461500
Funciones:
• Impartir formación a diferentes sectores de la población: Jóvenes vulnerables, madres cabeza
de hogar, adultos mayores, y jóvenes con discapacidad física y mental.
• Difundir esquema de enseñanza del SENA: Formación por proyectos, técnicas didácticas
activas y estrategia metodológica.
Centro de Desarrollo Agroempresarial de Chía: Sep2010 a Dic 2010
Cargo Asesor de integración. Manejo plataformas moodle, blackboard, sofiaplus.Teléfono: 5950060
ACCION S.A. - BCSC: Marzo 1 de 2011 a 22-06 de 2011 Analista Asistencia Tecnológica SAT
Banco Caja Social (contrato temporal remplazo licencia de mate rnidad).Teléfono: 3485000
Funciones:
• Actualización de PinPad
• Soporte Mesa de Ayuda Nivel II (Directorio Activo, generación de cupones basado en
journals de sucursales aplicativo de ORACLE)
• Apoyo logístico proceso de migración de Windows 2003 a windows 2008
• Apoyo alistamiento oficinas móviles.
SENA Chía: Sep-2010 a Dic-2010 Cargo Asesor de integración. Manejo plataformas moodle,
blackboard, sofiaplus.Teléfono: 5950060
•
Asesorar a los colegios en los procesos de integración de la educación media vocacional
con la educación técnica profesional.
•
Dirección de proyectos, basado en las competencias del SENA, para los programas de
Técnicos y Tecnológicos.
Grupo Skies Colombia Ltda.- Departamento de Informática.
Teléfono: 6211377 Jefe Inmediato: Jorge Caldas
Cargo : Administrador de Infraestructura - IT Manager
Marzo 2009 a Julio 2010 -
Funciones:
•
•
•
•
•
Administración de SharePoint
Análisis y diseño de lntranet, e implementación con joomla
parametrización de SISAYD "helpdesk"
Administración de Red y Servidores, Filtrado de seguridad,
Integración de Datos Dispositivos Móviles a programa contable SIlGO, S.O. Windows Server
2003 R2 File Server en Linux Centos 5.2
Noviembre 1998 —Diciembre 2005 y Enero
AGS Colombia- Unidad de Informática.
2007 - A Febrero 2009 Teléfono: 6738636 Ing. Fernando Cifuentes
Ing. De Soporte SQL
Funciones:
•
•
•
•
Soporte Funcional Aplicaciones desarrolladas en Visual Fox
Administrador Directorio Activo, Administración de Firewall, Realización de Pruebas
Productos en Desarrollo Monitoreo Canales de datos.
Medición del Performance Servidor de aplicaciones y Base de Datos: Win 2003 Server, Linux
Red Hat, Políticas de seguridad, Administración de comunicaciones y redes (canales. Proxy
Server, enrutadores, hosting).
Velar por una Infraestructura Tecnológica acorde con las necesidades de la empresa.
La Previsora S.A.- Subgerencia de Informática.
3485630Ext.: 6800 ing. Carolina Cabrera
Funciones:
Enero 2 de 2006 a SeptI06 Teléfono:
•
•
•
•
•
Administración de Perfiles de Usuario Red y Aplicativo Corporativo SISE.
HelpDesk a Nivel Nacional.
Soporte escritorio remoto a usuarios de diferentes sucursales a nivel nacional,
Mantenimiento preventivo y correctivo de desktop, clientes delgado de HP, clusterEx de
Servidores de SQL, Exchange y Terminal.
Desarrollo e implementación de SharePoint 2007 Visual Basic .NET 2005
LB Ingenieros y Biólogos Ltda.Tetéfono: 2128044 Rocío Obregón
Jefe de Sistemas Ene 1995— Oct 1998
Funciones:
• Administración y Gestión de Tecnología
• Edición de informesPlanes de Manejo Ambiental, Estudios de Impacto Ambiental, Planes de
contingencia.
• Soporte técnico de infraestructura oficina de sistemas
• Participación en reuniones con grupo de trabajo interdisciplinario de ingenieros geógrafos,
civiles, geólogos, químicos, sociólogos en proceso de alimentación de SIG "Sistema de
Información Geográfica, Autocad, Arcad y Arquinfo etc.
SENA Centro de Hotelería Regional Bogotá
Instructor
Oct 1997— Dic 1998 Teléfono: 5461600
. Impartir formación de Informática Básica y Sistemas Operacionales.
Coruniversitec
Auxiliar de Centro de Computo
Enero 1993— Enero 1994.
• Apoyo en las practicas de laboratorio de Sistemas en las catedras de Pascal, Lenguaje C,
FoxPro y Visual Basic.
FORMACIÓN PROFESIONAL
Pregrado Ingeniería de Sistemas
Universidad Autónoma De Colombia
Bogotá, Diciembre de 2004 (Terminado)
•
Diplomado Convenio con la Alcadía de Bogota y la UNAD "SIG Sistema Integrado de
Gestión. Agosto 24 1 2012" (144 Horas).
Cursos Virtuales de:
• Plataformas Virtuales "Moodle",
• Linux Básico, Calidad en el desarrollo de Software
• Firewall y VPN
• Diseño de Casos de Uso
• Ingles Niveles: Beginner, Elementary, preintermediate, Intermediate y Proeficient, Modulo de
Seguros¡ y II.
• Project Server 2010 y 2013
• Share Point Server 2010 y 2013 Enterprise
• Team foundation 2013
• Integracion de (Sharepoint, Project y Team foundation Server 2013)
En espera de prestar con entereza y dedicación mis servicios profesionales a su compañía, quedo
atento a cualquier comunicación,
César Augusto Adarme Rodríguez
Ingeniero de Sistemas
T.P. No. 2525521 5825CN1J
C.0 No. 79.507.741
CO255
atuctt
o&
O,
COPNIA
(
)
CERTIFICADO DE VIGENCIA Y ANTECEDENTES DISCIPLINARIOS
N° E2016WEB00100239
REPÚBLICA DE COLOMBIA
CONSEJO PROFESIONAL NACIONAL DE
INGENIERÍA
COPNIA
EL DIRECTOR GENERAL
CERTIFICA:
1 Que ADARME RODRIGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO identificado (a)
inscrito(a) en el Registro Profesional Nacional que lleva esta entid
Profesional N° 25255-215825 CND desdeel (los)tres (3) día(s)
nía N° 79507741, se encuentra
DE SISTEMAS can Matrícula
del ano dos mil once (201 l).
2 Que la (el) Matricula Profesional es la autorización que ,expide el Estado pra que el. titular ejerza su profesion en todo el
territorio de la República de Colombia de conformidad con lo dispuesto en la1..ey 842 de 2003
3 Que la (el) referida (o) Matricula Profesional se encuentra vigente por lo cual el profesional certificado actualmente NO
está impedido para ejercer la profesión.
-
4 Que el profesional NO tIene antecedentes disciplinarios etico profesionales
y
5. Que la presente certificación tiene una validez de seis (6) meses se expide en Bogotá, D.C., a los dieciseis (16) días del
......
mes Uunio) del año dos mil dieciseis (2016).
.;
J.
-15
(
R5 EN DARlO OCHOA ARBELÁ
Firma del titular ()
() Con el fin de verificar que el titular autoriza su participación en procesos estatales cie selección de contratistas. La falta de firma del titular no invalida el
Certificado.
El presente es un documento público expedido clectróncamenta con firma digital que garantiza su plena validez juridica y probatoria según lo establecido en
la Ley 527 de 1999.
Para verificar la integridad e inalterabOdad del presente documento consulte en el sitio web htlp:/igdccumentalcopnia.gov.co/invesiteCSV indicado el código
que se encuentra en el costado izquierdo de este documento
Calle 78 N°9-57 Piso 13— Bogotá D.C. Pbx: 3220102 . Correo-e: info@copnia.gov.co
www.copna .gov.co
CONSEJO PROFESIONAL NACIONAL DE INGENIERÍA - COPNIA
Calle 78 N°9 - 57 Teléfono: 3220102- Bogotá DC.
email: itiIocopnia.gov.co - pqr@copniajgov.co
www.copnia.gov.co
wn
_______
182
U
Jb
... .....
REPUBLICA DE COLOMBIA
IDENTilCACIONPERÓNAL.
.-
.
CEDULDFCRUADANIA
NUMERO
79507.741
.'.
'ADARME RODRIGUEZ
APELLiDOS • •
-
-
OESAR AUGUSTO
J
OQ27
LA REPUBLÍCA DE COLOMBIA
• \.
.-.•
/
LA UNIVERSIDAD^AUTONOMA DE COLOMBIA
PERSONERkJURIO!CANo. 264 DEL4 DE FEBRERO DE 1972
RECONOCIDA COMO UNIVERSIDAD POR RESOLUCIÓN No. 03279 Ii DEL MSNEDUcACIÓN
CONFIEREN EL TÍTULO PROFESIONAL DE
INGENIERO DE SISTEMAS
A
CÉSAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRÍGUEZ
C. C. No. 79.07.741
L M. Na T745?0 O. M. 51
EXPEDIDA EN: BOGOTÁ. O. E.
QUIEN CUMPLIÓ SATISFACTORIAMENTE CON LOS REQUISITOS ACADÉMICOS EXIGIDOS.
EN TESTIMONIO DE ELLO OTORGA EL PRESENTE
DIPLOMA
io DE DICIEMBRE DE 2004
BOGOTÁ, o. G.
cz
cc
RECTOR
..
.
.-
...
..
No..'
PereOnO Jurfdt
No. 284 de Feb
Acta de Grado
Acta No. 4341
Folio No. 4341
En Bogotá D.C., a los 10 días del mes de diciembre de 2004, en el Auditorio
"Fundadores" de la Universidad Autónoma de Colombia, sE reunieron los
Doctores CARLOS OSSA ESCOBAR Rector de la Universidad, GONZALO
ARAQUE PRIETO Secretario General, LUIS EDUARDO MACHADO
HERNÁNDEZ Decano(E) de la Facultad de INGENIERÍA, con el fin de
llevar a cabo la ceremonia de grado del alumno CÉSAR AUGUSTO
ADARME RODRÍGUEZ con C.C. No. 79.507.741 de Bogotá, D.F., quien
llenó todos los requisitos que los reglamentos de la Universidad exigen para
optar al Titulo Profesional de INGENIERO DE SISTEMAS."
El Rector tomo el juramento reglamentario e hizo entrega., del correspondiente
Diploma debidamente firmado, sellado y registrado en libro de r'No
47 - Folio No 22949-A, así como la presente Acta cut
o de la
Universidad. Tenmnó sis estudios en el afio.2000 Serancia que el
graduado tiene dfinida su situación militar según Libr"'. 774590 Distrito
militar 51
•Se expide la presente co
cta de Gradcf
mes de diciembre d
General
otá D.C., a los 10 días del
t972
-'•;—a-
Zt
f -' -55
yOl AFMUOoyL .oj
fl, PMG Grop L"1 SIo Tomd k1d IflI.
44(0) 1~4574.10, F
1 O> i tQAÁIO5
Ta
Eot\.286M2,
V
IP
J
11P13 60G Et ,d
,
--
k
i
..TbOGCoS
R*lacdTM o(Ib 00 ot0o,.m Co1
SU
--
e
e
PErifEria IT
Group
CERTIFICACIÓN
•
CONTÁCT&
BUSINESSIT
PERIFERIA IT CORP S.A.S identificado con NIT. 900.320.011-9, certifica que e!
señor(a), CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ identificado(a) con cédula
de ciudadanía número 79.507.741 de Bogotá D.0 presta sus servicios de
asesoría y consultoría en sistemas bajo un contrato a término indefinido, desde
el 08 de febrero del 2016, en el cargo de CONSULTOR, desempeñando las
siguientes funciones:
•
•
Manejo de: Tfs, SQL server, visual estudio 201 0,2013, Oracle, JIS,
SharePoint, SVN Tortoise.
Labores como migración de fuentes, branching, merging,
bifurcación, compilación publicado, despliegues, actualización de
fuentes (líneas básicas de aplicativos)
Esta certificación se expide conforme a solicitud del interesado con destino A
QUIEN INTERESE; Esta solicitud se expide a los 15 días del mes de septiembre
de 2016.
Cordialmente
ALBA ROCIO SANCHEZ ZABALA
Human Talent Manager
Av. Carrera 9* 115-06/30
Of. 604 Centro Empresarial
Tierra Firrre (57.1)6000080
CIUDAD DE MÉXICO
Insurgentes No. 863 Piso 7
Col. Nápoles CP.03810
1+52 551 5005-6865
*
COOIEXPRESS
P€rif€ria IT
ManpowerGroup
Manpower Professional Ltda.
Calle 98 022-64 oficina 501
Edificio Calle lOO
Bogotá
Colombia
T: 6010066
F: 6010309
irlfo@manpower.com.co
www.manpower.com
CERTIFICA
Que el(la) señor(a) ADARME RODRIGUEZ, CESAR AUGUSTO, identificado(a) con
cédula de ciudadanía No. 79507741, laboró en nuestra empresa desde el 13 de Abril
de 2015 hasta el 17 de Noviembre de 2015, desempeñando el cargo de
CONFIGURATION MANAGER
en nuestro cliente
HEWLETT PACKARD
COLOMBIA, gestionando las siguientes funciones:
•
Integración de despliegues de software de las versiones liberadas de las
aplicaciones asignadas a la fabrica HPE (Hewiet Packard Enterprise) en Team
Foundation Server con destino a los ambientes de Pruebas, Pruebas de Carga
y Producción
•
Verificación de Formatos de solicitud de despliegues a ambientes de Pruebas,
pruebas de carga y producción.
•
Verificación de los artefactos subidos en TFS, compilación y toma de
evidencias para el despliegue.
•
Operación de CA Desk Manager: Gestion, Creación de cambios, asignación de
tareas y cambios a los responsables, requisitos para envio de despliegues
•
Administración de Herramienta PTS "Administración de Tiempo invertido por la
Fabrica en la Gestión de la Demanda de los requerimientos, cambios e
incidentes solicitados por el cliente a la Fabrica de Desarrollo.
111,
•
•
Generación de reportes de PTS, creación de cambios, solicitudes e incidentes
para el registro de horas por parte del equipo de desarrollo.
•
Creación y Administración de Listas en SharePoint, para almacenar y llevar
una trazabilidad de los pases enviados a pruebas y producción.
•
Administración de SharePoint integrado con Tearn Foundation Server, donde
se almacena todos los artefactos generados con la gestión de despliegues.
Página 1de2
Maripower Professional Ltda.
N1r800159100-4Jr
02 2
• .-) ,-•.,
-•,• --, .,. 'r /.
ACRECER TEMPORAL LTDA
CERTIFICA
ADARME RODRIGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO identificada con la cédula de ciudadanía No.
Que, la señor
79507741, ha laborado en ACRECER TEMPORAL LTDA como empleado en misión con contrato de trabajo por
la duración de la labor contratada, así:
EMPRESA USUARIA
r
SOFTSA.S
CARGO
ADMINISTRADORDE
PLATAFORMA GP
FECHA DE
INGRESO
1
FECHA DE
tTERMINACIOW
031091201 2
1510312013
SUELDO BASICO
PROM. OTROS 1 PROM. OTROS
DEVENGADOS
DEVENGADOS
PRESTAC.
NOPRESTAC.
1
1
1
2.000.000
FUNCIONES.
•
Acompañamiento en Instalacion, configuracion e implementacion de plataforma de gerencia de proyectos.
Instalacion de sharepoint, proyect server
.
creación de sitios y subsitios de proyectos, sitio de calidad,
creación de calendarios de empresa, campos personalizados, plantillas de sitios, plantillas de proyecto, tipos
de proyectos, EDT, elaboracion de manuales de gerente de proyecto, manual del consultor, seguridad, listas,
versionamiento.
•
capacitación a gerentes de proyecto en uso de la herramienta de proyect server, publicacion de proyectos y
reprogramacion, elaboracion de videos de operación funcional de la plataforma.
Sr '<pide a solicitud de la interesada , en la ciudad de Bogotá, D.C., el 29 de Mayo de 2013
CONTRATACION
ACRECER TEMPORAL
NIT: 860521035-3
Cra 7 N° 74-56 Piso 10
FAX: 3133901
BOGOTÁ, D.C.
www.acrecer.com.co
TEL 3134001 /10
acrecer@acrecer.com.co
OO1G3
ALCA.OIA MAYOR
DE BOGOTÁ D.C.
irq
A QUIEN INTERESE
LA SUSCRITA SUBGERENTE TECNICA
DEL FONDO DE VIGILANCIA Y SEGURIDAD DE BOGOTA
CERTIFICA QUE:
NOMBkÉ DEL CONTRATISTA CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ
LIDENTIFICAC1ON
C.C. 79507741
CLASE DE CONTRATO
PRESTACION DE SERVICIOS PERSONALES
FVS
NUMERO DEL CONTRATO
844 DE 2011
OBJETO
EL CONTRATISTA SÉ COMPROMETE CON EL
FONDO DE VIGILANCIA Y SEGURIDAD DE
BOGOTÁ
BAJO
AUTONOMÍA
E
SU
INDEPENDENCIA, A PRESTAR SUS SERVICIOS
PROFESIONALES EN EL PROYECTO 6134,
CONFORME A LAS ACTIVIDADES QUE SE
RELACIONAN EN LA CLÁUSULA QUINTA DEL
DEMÁS
PRESENTE
CONTRATO Y
LAS
INHERENTES
NATURALEZA
DEL
A
LA
CONTRATO QUE SE REQUIERAN PARA
SATISFACER EL OBJETO DEL MISMO.
TERMINO DE EJECUCION
SEIS (6) MESES
FECHA DE INICIO
28/12/2011
FECHA DE TERMINACION
27/06/2012
HONORARIOS MENSUALES
3.932.000.00
ESTADO DEL CONTRATO
EN EJECUCIÓN.____________________
-
$
La presente certificación se expide de acuerdo con la información que reposa en los
archivos Sistematizados de la Entidad, a los Veintinueve (29) días del mes de Junio de
dos mil Doce (2012).
CáD
ZOLINA FUENTES RIG Z
Subgerente Técni(E).
Proyecló: Sandra Jeennette Caballero Tmote - Abogada Oficina ?saa Juridica FVS
Mariela Pardo Coqredor - Jefe Oficina Asesonia 3 jridIca, 'Y
Revisó
OC24
Calle 12 No 7-14
Tel: 297 32 20
www.fvs.gov.co
n
Ne
-..•
T
BOGOA
HU'7ANA
indra
INDRA COLOMBIA' LTDA
NIT. 830.013,774-1-
CER,TIFICÁ.
Que el se4'io ADARME RODRíGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO idenhficado con códula de ciudadanía
numero 79.507.741 laboro para nuestra compañía, desde el 26 de Mayo de 2014 hasta el 10 de
Abril del 2015 corno TECNICO DE SISTEMAS, cóh un contrato de trabajó a TERMINO INDEFINIDO
y se desempeño como GESTOR DE CAMBIOS GESTOR DE VERSIONES Y DESPLIEGUES,
INTEGRADOR con las siguientes funciones:
CARGO': Gestor de Cambios:
• Los gestores de carnbiosconfrolan el ciclo de vida de los Cambios.
• Su objetivo pnmano es viabilizar la realización de Cambios beneliciosos con im mínimo de
interrupcioñes en laprestación' de servicics de TI,
• Planear y presidir las reuniones del CAB y ECAB
• Autorizar o rechazar él cambio una vez el CABo ECAB haya tomado una deislón
• Publicar y enviar Iaagenda.de cambios
• Realizar el seguimiento al cambio desde el registro del requenmiento hasta su complehtud y
'revisión,
• Resólver los conflictos sobre los cuales no haya acuerdo.en el CAB o el ECÁS
Participar en la redefinición del alcance de aquellos cambios no exitosos
• Registrarlos rosultadosen eklosumq para el informe mensual
• Elaboración de informe mensual dé Cambios
CARGO: Integrador-Gestor de Versiones y Despliegues-Gestor de la configuración del software
• Validar y aprobarlas guías da integración.
• Reahzar control de calidad de las gulas 09.161W000 Mantener una bitácora de todas las
guías de integración aplicadas, aprobacfonesy ambientes afectados con la misma
• Actualizar los objetos cambiados al Repositorio de Fuentes y de la base de datos coma la
dllma línea base de ejecutables y objetos fuentes en lb diferentes ambiéflt$.
Indra Colambla Ltda.
Nit. 830.013.774-1
Callo 96 No. 13- U
Bbgot.á, D;C.
Ti,57646OO
E+571646%22
ifl
.m
SENA
7^V
Regional Distrito Capital
Centro de Servicios Financieros
ACTA DE LIQUIDACIÓN DEL CONTRATO DE PRESTACION DE SERVICIOS No. 918 DEL 15
DE JULIO DE 2011, CELEBRADO ENTRE EL SENA CENTRO DE SERVICIOS FINANCIEROS
REGIONAL DISTRITO CAPITAL Y ADARME RODRIGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO
-
Entre los suscritos a saber JORGE ALBERTO BETANCOURT RODRIGUEZ, domiciliado en
Bogotá, D.C. identificado(a) con la cédula de ciudadanía No. 19.389.053 de Bogotá, en su calidad
de Subdirector del Centro de Servicios Financieros, Regional Distrito Capital del Servicio Nacional
de Aprendizaje SENA, de conformidad con la Resolución de Nombramiento No. 732 del 17 de Abril
dé 2006 y Acta de Posesión No. 0029 del 16 de Mayo de 2006, debidamente facultado por la
Resolución No. 02039 del 2004 y quien en adelante se denominará SENA, por una parte y por la
otra ADARME RODRIGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO, identificado con la cédula de ciudadanía No.
C.C. 79507741, obrando en su propio nombre en calidad de CONTRATISTA, de común acuerdo
procedemos a efectuar la liquidación del Contrato de Prestación de Servicios arriba mencionado
así:
OBJETO: Prestación de servicios de carácter temporal para impartir 600 horas en la Unidad de
Tecnología e informática en el área de formación de informática y tecnologías de la información y
las comunicaciones (TIC) y formación en ambientes virtuales de aprendizaje
FECHA DE IN1CIACION: 15 DE JULIO DE 2011
FECHA DE TERMINACION: 17 DE DICIEMBRE DE 2011
DURACION: 600 horas o 5 meses y 10 días o hasta agotar el presupuesto sin exceder el
30/12/2011
BALANCE ECONOMICO
Valor del Contrato
Valor ejecutado
Valor adeudado por el Sena
Valor sin ejecutar
SUMAS IGUALES
$12.874.800,00
-
$12.874.800
$12.874.800.00
$12.874.800.00
Se deja constancia escrita que EL CONTRATISTA cumplió a entera satisfacción con el objeto
contractual y pago de seguridad social
Se suscribe la presente acta por las partes intervinientes, en Bogotá, D.C. a los 22 días del mes de
diciembre de 2011.
CUE~Z CESAR AUGUSTO
MDARM'E-R
-ODPkfG
C.C. 79507741 de Bogotá
CONTRATISTA
L
Jorg/ Alberto BetancuRodriguez
Subdi ector Centro de picios Financieros
SENA i
Ir
01
Ana Cristina Ma ugo Gonzalez
Supervisor
SENA: CONOCIMIENTO Y EMPRENDIMIENTO PARA TODOS LOS COLOMBIANOS
Ministerio de la Protección Social
SERVICIO NACIONAL DE APRENDIZAJE
Carrera la 65-10 PBX 546 16 00 Fax 548 16 78 - wwv,.senaedIJço Bogotá, D.C. - Colombia
OCO2GG
PREVISORJX
ugO'
LA GERENCIA DE GESTIÓN HUMANA Y RECURSOS FISICOS DE
LA PREVISORA S.A. COMPAÑIA DE SEGUROS, Y A SOLICITUD
DEL INTERESADO
CERTFICA:
Que el señor CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME ROORIGUEZ,
identificado con Cédula de Ciudadanía No. 79.507.741, presté sus
servicios en esta Entidad con contrato a Termino Fijo, desde el 02 de
enero de 2006 y hasta el 01 de octubre de 2006, desempeñando
como último cargo el de AUXILIAR ADMINISTRATIVO de la
SUBGERENCIA SOPORTE TECNICO Y OPERACIONES.
Dada en Bogotá D.C. a los veinticuatro (24) días del mes de
noviembre dé dos mil once (201 1)
r ot-. A
HRVOR
GRISALES
na y Recursos Físicos
t IIOu q Ar.r.1
aø
4i
rti;
la previso. Si'..,
Cornpafki de S;w6
ki() i45) 57
Mi. a0.002. 400-
&,e ck A'.cic'ój ,4 C!rnzr
(1)348 7555
0 8OOOi 051
,,iø•.' c,... -,
GRUPO9KIE.B
CALLE 936 No 17-25
OFICINA 401
80GDTÁ COLOMBIA
571.621.1377
WWW.6 RU Po SKI ES .COM
CER TIF1CA ClON
RH-146-201 1
GRUPOSKIES COLOMBIA LTDA con Nit. 830.122.841-2 certifica
que el Señor CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ identificado
con Cédula de Ciudadania No 79.507.741 de Bogotá, laboro en
nuestra empresa desdeel 2 de marzo de 2009. hastael 8 de julio de
2010, con contrato a termino indefinido, desempeñando el cargo de
INGENIERO DE SISTEMAS, con las siguientes funciones:
Especialista. línea Tecnológica Windows
> :AdministraciÓn de Servidor de archivos Linux (Centos 52) y
enlace con Servidor Windows 2003 Server R2
) Administrador
de
infraestructura
dé Tecnología (redes,
comunicaciones, datos y servidores)
Soporte funcional SIlGO
Soporte tecnico integración de datos (dispositivos móviles SI IGO)
) Diseño e implementación :de mesa de ayuda SISA&D.
> Administración de proveedores de tecnología.
La presente c6dificació n-se expide a solicitud del interesado a los 23
días del mes de noviembre:de 2011
LI
8
Dp o de Recursos Humanos
OO269
W W W • [3 P U P [:1 3 Kl E
C ORUNIVERSITEC
fl
copoQ&cIÓNWiNR'
EuGA*ou Y 1FCIOtoG1A
INSMUCM DE CeucICIÓ4 SQ9RY
PERSONER1A JURIDICA No. 2286/83-260194 M.E.N.
HACE CONSTAR QUE:
El (a) señor (a) CESAR AUGUSTOADÁRMERODRIGUEZ identificado (a) con la
cédula de ciudadanía No..79 507 410 de Bogotá laboró como Auxiliar de
Sistemas para CORUNJVERSITEC ;:en la modalidad de contrato a término fijo
inferior a un año en los siguientes periodos:
• Del 25 de febrero de 1994 at9de enero de 1995
Los anteriores contratos han sido liquidados y pagados en su totalidad.
Se expide a solicitud del interesado (a) y en constancia se firma en la ciudad de Bogotá
D. C.. a los veintidós (22) días del mes de diciembre ;de 2011.
Atentamente,
I
ARTHA ROCIO SOLORZANO ROMERO
Secretaria General
BOGOTA, D.C.: CALLE 34 No. 15-36 - PBX: 578 0330 - 232 1600 - FAX: 510 1899
TULtJA: Entrada Parque Carlos Sarmiento Lora - TEL.: (072) 224 1904 - FAX: 224 2976
www.corunlversitec.edu.co
jrf,r
'T'e?YU1gf3x
,ç
id Pai
00O270
127 geneb
Bogotá, 19 de septiembre de 2016
A QUIEN INTERESE
Certificamos que el señor CÉSAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRÍGUEZ, identificado con
cédula de ciudadanía 79.507.741 de Bogotá, trabajó en la empresa GENEBSYS SAS
desde el 30 de noviembre de 2015 hasta el 09 de febrero de 2016, con un contrato
laboral a término fijo, desempeñando el cargo de PROFESIONAL 1 y desempeñando
las siguientes funciones para el proceso ITIL de Administración de la Configuración en
Compensar:
1. Levantamiento y documentación del proceso de Administración de la
configuración y elaboración de propuesta de mejora de proceso.
2. Despliegues de versiones (Cambios Estandard, Normales y Emergentes).
3. Integración de fuentes en TFS Branches, desde Pruebas hasta Principal y LIB
(Liberación).
4. Capacitación, operación básica del TFS a nuevos integrantes del Grupo:
branching, merging; creación de labeis (etiquetas), compilación y publicación.
Para el desarrollo de sus funciones el ingeniero Adarme utilizaba Las siguientes
herramientas:
• Microsoft Team Foudation Server
• Visual Estudio
• Microsoft SQL Server
• Microsoft SharePoint
• CA Desk Manager
Cualquier información adicional con gusto atenderemos.
Atentamente,
POSADA DE LAS CASAS
Celular: (320)234-0207
Representante Legal GENEBSYS
NIT: 900378520-6
indra
INDRA COLOMBIA LTDA
NIT. 830.013.7741
C.ERTIFICA
Que el señor ADARME RODRIGUEZ CESAR AUGUSTO identificado con cédula de ciudadanía
numero 79507 741 laboro paranuestra compañia, desde el 26 de Mayo de 2014 hasta el 10 de
Abril del 2015 como TECNICODESISTEMAS, con un contrato de trabajo a TERMINO INDEFINIDO
y se desempeño como GESTOR DE CAMBIOS, GESTOR DE VERSIONES Y DESPLIEGUES,
INTEGRADOR con las siguientes funciones:
CARGO: Gestor de Cambios
•
•
•
•
Los gestores de cambios contrlan el dio de vida de los Cambios;
Su objetivo primario es viabilizar la -realización de Cambios beneficiosos con un mínimo de
interrupciones en Ia.prestación de: servicios de TI,
Planear y presidir lasreunlones del CAB y ECAB
Autorizar o rechazareftambiÓuna vez el CAB o ECAB haya tomado una decisión.
Publicar y enviar la agenda de cambios.
Realizar el seguimiento al cambio desde el registro del requerimiento hasta su complebtud y
revisión,
Resolver los conflictos sobre los cuales no haya acuerdo en el CAB o el ECAB.
Participar en la redefinición del alcance de aquellos cambios no exItosos
•
•
Registrarlos resultados:en el insumo para el informe mensual
Elaboración de infome mensual de Cambios
•
•
•
•
CARGO: Integrador-Gestor de Versiones y Despliegues-Gestor de la configuración del software
• Validar y aprobar las guias de integración.
• Realizar control de calidad de las gulas de integración Mantener una bitacora de todas las
guías de integración aplicadas1 aprobaciones y ambientes afectados con la misma.
• Actualizar los objetos cambiados al Repositono de Fuentes y de la base de datos como la
última linea base de ejecutables y objetos fuentes en los diferentes ambientes.
Indra Colombia Ltda.
f4it. 830.013.774-1
Calle 96 No. 13-11
8ogotáD.C.
T +37 1 646 36 00
F -.- 571 46 3622
10I *J
InÁr,r,sn.nsn., rn,v,
.
O!'0272
Bogotá O C.. Septiembre 16 de 2016
,
inner
consulting
Señores
FEDERACION NACIONAL DE MUNICIPIOS
Ciudad
Referencia: Licitación Pública 016 de 2016
El suscrito,
CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ
mayor de edad,
domiciliado en Bogotá D.C., con cédula de ciudadanía Nro.79.507.741 Expedida
en Bogotá D.C., en atención al Concurso correspondiente a la Licitación Publica
número 016 de 2016 en mi calidad propuesto para el Rol de Ingeniero Profesional
06. por medio de la presente manifiesto la intención y me comprometo a trabajar
con el proponente INNERCONSULTING SAS , en caso de salir favorecido con la
adjudicación del contrato y certifico que no he participado en la preparación o
elaboración de la presente convocatoria.
De igual manera, con la presente carta autorizo única y exclusivamente a
INNERCONSULTING SAS, para que presente mi hoja de vida como integrante del
equipo de trabajo.
Atentamente,
CESAR AUGUSTO ADARME RODRIGUEZ
CC. 79.507.741 DE BOGOTA
T.P. 25255215825CND
{57 11, 4757555
Calle 119A 70G 91 Bogotá, Colombia
wwtflneç(onsLtttt(3,com
00O273
,
inner
consutting
PLAN DE GESTION
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
P
inner
consulting
WBS
Adquisición infraestructura FCM
Adquisición equipos
1L
[Adquisición Ucencias
Licencia STATA
Servidores
Almacenamiento
Servicios Oracle
[Servicios Microsoft
'Suite team foundation1 JActualización VmwarJ
HA Desarrollo
6.0
11
Oracle V M
i
Shutter stock
8 laptops
Servicios Chassis
¡ [
Documentación
__ jAdobe creativeCioud
[Servicios VMWare
Oracle Viví Manager
i
1L
Servicios STATA
1L
Instalacion en Work
station
Configuración
L
Suite team foundation
HA
incluirBiades
Suite team foundationi
HA Producción
Confiurar NICS
Configuración
integración LAN
1
Servicios
almacenamiento
1
instalación y
configuración PURE
11
ConstataVM
fig
Creación deRAID
'Config cliente servidor'
licencia nueva y vieja
integración SAN
[Adobe Creative Cioud
1
1
H
g Workstation
Vmware Vsphere 6
Red Hat
75 PC
Linux Red Hat
Web Logic
30 I pone
2 switches
H
Windows Server CAL
40
Visual Studio
Microsoft MSDN
I
H
Suite administración
plataforma MSDN
1
' Confi
clientes team
foundation
identlty Manager
Configuración 2
Workstation
_[0racie DB en RAC
Oracle Enterprise 1
Viví
Visual studio
Enterprise
1
Sacar 2 blad
j
J
Crear y presentar
lvolumen
a hvPervisori
Comisionamiento
eléctrico
Config switch borde
i
H
integración cluster
activo
integración switch
activo
1
1
1
instalación y
de la
—1 configuración
suite
Creación y conflg de
roles
1
]
1
Instalación
aplicaciones en
lestaciones de trabajoj
-4
,
inner
consu Iti ng
Antecedentes
La Federación Colombiana de Municipios requiere el fortalecimiento de su sistema de
infraestructura y la implementación de nuevo software, por lo que se contrata un tercero
que realice dicha gestión.
Dentro del proyecto se incluyen procesos de Adquisición, instalación, configuración y
puesta en funcionamiento de equipos de cómputo (Servidores, estaciones de trabajo,
computadores), almacenamiento, software e infraestructura de tecnología de
información y comunicaciones.
Siguiendo las normas de la organización y sus necesidades, el proyecto debe seguir todos
los lineamientos de PM! para la gestión de proyectos. Para esto se pondrá a disposición
de la entidad todas las plantillas requeridas (organigrama, cronograma, descripción de
cargos, listas de control etc) para el desarrollo del proyecto.
Gestión de cambios
Inicio
-
Necesidad de
cambio
Realizar
.
Debe
verica
si
Evaluación
Verilicacion y
documentación
Si
No
Ajustes
b:
a>
sí
No
L
<:A:p
Cambio
rechazado
Aplicarcambio
Fin
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
No
,
inner
consutting
Gestión del recurso humano
El recurso humano asignado para desarrollar las actividades listadas en el pliego de
condiciones se define a continuación
Cantidad de profesionales: 8
Perfil
Gerente de
proyectos
Profesional de
virtualización y
backup
Profesional de
servidores
Profesional de
Web Logic y
Balanceadores
de Carga
Profesional de
OID OIM
Funciones
Gestionar todos los planes y actividades del
proyecto, siguiendo lineamientos de PM!.
Generación de planes detallados para gestión
del proyecto.
Documentación durante todas las etapas del
proceso.
Definición de plan de implementación de los
sistemas de virtualización y almacenamiento
Instalación de los sistemas de virtualización y
almacenamiento
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con
virtualización y almacenamiento
Definición de plan de implementación de los
sistemas de servidores
Instalación de los sistemas de servidores
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con
servidores
Definición de plan de implementación de web
logic y balanceadores de carga
Instalación y configuración software weblogic
y balanceadores de carga
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con weblogic
y balanceadores de carga
Definición de plan de implementación OID y
OIM
Instalación y configuración software OID y
OIM
•
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
Disponibilidad
100%
100%
50%
40%
30%
,
inner
consufting
Profesional de
ODQ y base de
datos RAC
Profesional
Oracle SOA y
BPM
Profesional
Visual Studio
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con OID y
OIM
Definición de plan de implementación Oracle
Data Quality y bases de datos Oracle en
ambiente RAC
Instalación y configuración software Oracle
Data Quality y bases de datos Oracle en
ambiente RAC
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con Oracle
Data Quality y bases de datos Oracle en
ambiente RAC
Definición de plan de implementación Oracle
SOA y BPM
Instalación y configuración software Oracle
SOA yBPM
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con Oracle
SOA yBPM
Definición de plan de implementación
Profesional Visual Studio
Instalación y configuración software
Profesional Visual Studio
Soporte para profesionales de software y
hardware en temas relacionados con
Profesional Visual Studio
30%
30%
30%
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Calle 119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
0 C278
inner
consutting
Project Charter
NOMBRE DEL
PROYECTO
GERENTE DEL
PROYECTO
NECESIDADES
DEL PROYECTO
Adquisición, instalación, configuración y puesta en funcionamiento de equipos
de cómputo (Servidores, estaciones de trabajo) computadores),
almacenamiento, software e infraestructura de tecnología de información y
comunicaciones para fortalecer la plataforma tecnológica de la Federación
Colombiana de Municipios - Dirección Nacional Simit.
Camilo Alberto Hernandez Sanabria
Dotar a la Federación Colombiana de Municipios - Dirección Nacional
SIMIT de los elementos de hardware y software necesarios para el
fortalecimiento tecnológico, entre los que se encuentra servidores,
almacenamientos, computadores, licencias.
Prestar los servicios profesionales para la instalación y configuración de
las adquisiciones, así como la instalación y configuración de las
herramientas Oracle adquiridas previamente
DESCRIPCION
DEL PROYECTO
Caracteristicas
Adquisición de tecnología de punta para el desarrollo de nuevos
proyectos
Adquisición del recurso humano de excelente calidad, requerido para la
implementación de las nuevas tecnologías
Justificación
El crecimiento de las necesidades de la Dirección Nacional SIMIT ha llevado a
requerir un fortalecimiento de la infraestructura de tecnología. Los nuevos
proyectos a desarrollar obligan a la prestación de nuevos y mejores servicios
para el desarrollo de la misión del SIMIT
Relación del proyecto con la misión
Ofrecer a los funcionarios la mejor infraestructura para facilitar su desempeño
y trabajo misional
Permitir el desarrollo de soluciones que faciliten el relacionamiento con los
municipios
e
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
O Calle 119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
UCC27j
inner
consufting
Entregables
Diseño de bajo nivel de la solución (virtualización, conectividad,
direccionamiento, etc)
Licenciamiento en fisico
Documentación de producto
Pruebas y Documentación de proyecto aprobada
Supuestos y Restricciones
La Federación Colombiana de Municipios - Dirección Nacional
SIMIT cuenta con una infraestructura de centro de datos básica para
la instalación de los equipos
FCM pondrá a disposición del equipo de trabajo, parte de los
funcionarios del área de infraestructura para facilitar el trabajo,
ingresos, confirmaciones, ventanas de mantenimiento etc.
Se trabajaran todos los días hábiles en el desarrollo del proyecto
ADMINISTRACIÓN
Reporte de Progreso
Se realizaran reuniones quincenales internas, semanales con el
proveedor de equipos. Constantemente se hará
monitoreo a dudas o problemas que se presenten
Reporte de utilización de recursos
Se analizara silos recursos destinados son suficientes, en caso de ser
necesario se redistribuyen los recursos
En caso de presentarse cambios que afecten los recursos se realizara
un análisis con el fin de minimizar los impactos
Control del proyecto
Los líderes de las diferentes gerencias reportaran a al PM quien a su
vez reporta al Gerente respectivo
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
Calle 119A
# 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
O'O2SO
•
inner
consutdng
Ciclo de vida del proyecto
R
e
C
u
r
s
o
S
Tiempo
Proceso
Compra
4 semanas
Instalación
Pruebas y
Entrega
3 semanas
1 semanas
o
•
Ingeniería
Migracic5n
3 semanas
1 semanas
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
O Calle 119A #
70
G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
0CO2S1
, mr
Librol
1ng
Área
'
Conocimiento
Grupo de Procesos
•I(3i•
n
Entradas
Salidas
Herramientas y tecnicas
INICIACIÓN
integración
41 Desarrollar el Acta de ConstItucIón del Proyecto
Enunciado del trabajo del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
INICIACIÓN
Integración
4.1 Desarrollar el Acta de Constitución del Proyecto
Caso de negocio
Técnicas de facilitación
INICIACIÓN
Integración
4.1 Desarrollar el Acta do Constitución del Proyecto
Acuerdos
INICIACIÓN
Integración
41 Desarrollar el Acta de Constitución del Proyecto
Factores ambientales de le empresa
INICIACIÓN
Integración
41 Desarrollar el Acta de Constitución del Proyecto
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Integración
4.2 Desarrollar el Plan para la Dirección del Proyecto
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Integración
4.2 Desarrollar el Plan para la Dirección del Proyecto
Salidas de otros procesos
Técnicas de facilitación
PLANIFICACIÓN
Integración
4.2 Desarrollar el Plan para la Dirección del Proyecto
Factores ambientales de la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Integración
4.2 Desarrollar el Plan para la Dirección del Proyecto
Activos de los procesos de la organización
EJECUCIÓN
Integración
43 Dirigir y Gestionar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Plan pare la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
EJECUCIÓN
Integración
4.3 Dirigir y Gestionar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Solicitudes de cambio aprobadas
Sistema de Información para la dirección de proyectos Datos de desempeño del trabajo
EJECUCIÓN
Integración
43 Dirigir y Gestionar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Reuniones
EJECUCIÓN
Integración
4.3 Dirigir y Gestionar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Activos de los procesos de la organización
EJECUCIÓN
Integración
43 Dirigir y Gestionar el Trabajo del Proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
44 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
Solicitudes de cambio
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.4 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Pronóstico del cronograma
Técnicas analíticas
Informes de desempeño del trabajo
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.4 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Pronósticos de Costos
Sistema de información para la dirección de proyectos Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.4 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Cambios validados
Reuniones
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
44 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Información de desempeño del trabajo
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Entregables
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
44 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
44 Monitorear y Controlar el Trabajo del Proyecto
Activos de los procesos de la organización
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.5 Realizar el Control Integrado de Cambios
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
Solicitudes de cambio aprobadas
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.5 Realizar el Control Integrado de Cambios
Informes de desempeño del trabajo
Reuniones
Registro de cambios
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
45 Realizar el Control Integrado de Cambios
Solicitudes de cambio
Herramientas de control de cambios
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.5 Realizar el Control Integrado de Cambios
Factores ambientales de la empresa
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Integración
4.5 Realizar el Control Integrado de Cambios
Activos de los procesos de la organización
CIERRE
Integración
4.6 Cerrar el Proyecto o Fase
Plan pare la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
CIERRE
Integración
4.6 Cerrar el Proyecto o Fase
Entregables aceptados
Técnicas analíticas
Reuniones
Actualizaciones a les documentos del proyecto
Transferencia del producto, servicio o resultado final
Actualizaciones a los activos de los procesos de la
organización
CIERRE
Integración
4.6 Cerrar el Proyecto o Fase
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.1¡Planificar la Gestión del Alcance
Pian para la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
Plan de gestión del alcance
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.11Planificar la Gestión del Alcance
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Reuniones
Plan de gestión de los requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.1 Planificar la Gestión del Alcance
Factores ambientales de la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.1 Planificar la Gestión del Alcance
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Plan de gestión del alcance
Entrevistas
Documentación de requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Plan de gestión de los requisitos
Grupos focales
Matriz de trazabilidad de requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Plan de gestión de los Interesados
Talleres facilitados
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Acta de constitución dei proyecto
Técnicas grupales de creatividad
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.21Recopilar Requisitos
Registro de interesados
Técnicas grupales de toma de decisiones
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Observaciones
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Prototipos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Estudios comparativos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
Diagramas de contexto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.2 Recopilar Requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.3 Definir el Alcance
Pian de gestión del alcance
Juicio de expertos
Enunciado del alcance del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.3 Definir el Alcance
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Análisis del producto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.3 Definir el Alcance
Documentación de requisitos
Generación de alternativas
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.3 Definir el Alcance
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Talleres facilitados
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.4 Crear la EDTIWBS
Plan de gestión del alcance del proyecto
Descomposición
Linea base del alcance
PLANIFICAOÓN
Alcance
5.4 Crearla EDT/WBS
Enunciado del alcance del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.4 Crearla EDT/WBS
Documentación de requisitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Alcance
5.4 Crearla EDT/WBS
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Entregables aceptados
PLANIFICACIÓN
Cuestionarios y encuestas
Análisis de documentos
Alcance
5.4 Crear la EDT/WBS
Activos de los procesos de la organización
3EGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.5 Validar el Alcance
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Inspección
'GUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.5 Validar el Alcance
Documentación de requisitos
Técnicas grupales de toma de decisiones
GUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
Validar el Alcance
(+571)4757555
www.Irrnerconsutting.ccs
Calle 119A 0 70 G -91 / Bogotá, Colombia
Matriz de trazabilidad de requisitos
Solicitudes de cambio
Información de desempeño del trabajo
.
Librol
mr
ca ng
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.5 Validar el Alcance
Entregables verificados
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.5 Validar el Alcance
Datos de desempato del trabajo
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.6 Controlar el Alcance
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.6 Controlar el Alcance
Documentación de requisitos
Solicitudes de cambio
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.6 Controlar el Alcance
Matriz de trazabilidad de requisitos
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.6 Controlar el Alcance
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Alcance
5.6 Controlar el Alcance
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Actualizaciones a los documentos deIyecto
1'
""
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.1 Planificar la Gestión del Cronograma
Pian para la dirección del proyecto
Juicio de expertos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.1 Planificar la Gestión del Cronograma
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Técnicas analíticas
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
Reuniones
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Análisis de variación
información de desempeño del trabajo
Plan de gestión dei cronograma
Planificar la Gestión del Cronograma
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Planificar la Gestión del Cronograma
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Tiempo
Definir las Actividades
Plan de gestión del cronograma
Descomposición
Tiempo
6.2 Definir las Actividades
Línea base del alcance
Planificación gradual
Atributos de las actividades
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.2 Definir las Actividades
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Juicio de expertos
Lista de hitos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.2 Definir las Actividades
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Plan de gestión del cronograma
Método de dlagramaclón por precedencia (PDM)
Diagramas de red del cronograma del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Lista de actividades
Determinación de las dependencias
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Atributos de las actividades
Adelantos y retrasos
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Lista de hitos
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Enunciado del alcance del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.3 Secuenciar las Actividades
Factores ambientales da la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.3 .Secuenciar las Actividades
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.41Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Pian de gestión del cronograma
Juicio de expertos
Recursos requeridos para las actividades
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.41Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Lista de actividades
Análisis de alternativas
Estructura de desglose de recursos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.41Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Atributos de las actividades
Datos publicados de estimaciones
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.4 Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Calendarios de recursos
Estimación ascendente
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.4 Estimar los Recursos da las Actividades
Registro de riesgos
Software de gestión de proyectos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.4 Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Estimados de costos de las actividades
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.4 Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Factores ambientales de la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.4 Estimar los Recursos de las Actividades
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.S1Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Plan de gestión del cronograma
Juicio de expertos
Estimación de la duración de las actividades
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Lista de actividades
Estimación análoga
Actualizaciones a los documentos dei proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Atributos de las actividades
Estimación pararnétrica
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Recursos requeridos para las actividades
Estimación por tres valores
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Calendarios de recursos
Técnicas grupales de toma de decisiones
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Enunciado del alcance del proyecto
Análisis de reservas
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Registro de riesgos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Estructura de desglose de recursos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Factores ambientales de la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.5 Estimar la Duración de las Actividades
Activos de los procesos de la organización
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
66 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Plan de gestión del cronograma
Análisis de la red del cronograma
Línea base del cronograma
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
lista de actividades
Método de la ruta crítica
Cronograma del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
-
2
j
Lista de actividades
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Atributos de la actividad
Método de cadena crítica
Datos del cronograma
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Diagramas de red del cronograma del proyecto
Técnicas de optlmización de recursos
Calendarios del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Recursos requeridos para las actividades
Técnicas de modelado
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Calendarios de recursos
Adelantos y retrasos
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Estimación de la duración de las actividades
Compresión del cronograma
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Enunciado del alcance del proyecto
Herramienta de programación
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Registro de riesgos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Asignaciones de personal al proyecto
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Estructura de desglose de recursos
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Factores ambientales de la empresa
PLANIFICACIÓN
Tiempo
6.6 Desarrollar el Cronograma
Activos de los procesos de la organización
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Revisiones del desempeño
Información de desempeño del trabajo
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Cronograma del proyecto
Software de gestión de proyectos
Pronóstico del cronograma
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
Técnicas de optimización de recursos
Solicitudes de cambio
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
§Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Calendarios del proyecto
Técnicas de modelado
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Datos del cronograma
Adelantos y retrasos
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Tiempo
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Compresión del cronograma
•
(.571) 475 75 55
www.ÍnnerconsultIn.co
Q
Calle 119A a 70 G -91 / Bogotá. Colombia
1
mr
Librol
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO YCONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFCACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJEC(JCIN
EJECUOÓN
EJECUCIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL.
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
kJECUOÓN
( JECUCIÓN
Tiempo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Costo
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Calidad
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
-
(.571) 475 75 55
CC Ø www.lnrserconsulung.co
Q Calle 119A 0 70 G -911 Bogota, Colombia
6.7 Controlar el Cronograma
7.1 Planificar la Gestión da Costos
7.1 Planificar la GestIón de Costos
7.1 Planificar la Gestión de Costos
7.1 Planificar la Gestión de Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 E stimar los Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.2 EstImar los Costos
7.2 Estimar tos Costos
7.2 Estimar los Costos
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.1 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7,3 Determinar el Presupuesto
7.4 Controlar los Costos
7.4 Controlar los Costos
7.4 Controlar los Costos
7.4 Controlar los Costos
74 Controlar los Costos
7.4 Controlar los Costos
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.1 Planificar la Gestión de la Calidad
8.2 Realizar el Aseguramiento de Calidad
8.2 Realizar el Aseguramiento de Calidad
8.2 RealIzar el Aseguramiento da Calidad
8. Realizar el Aseguramiento de Calidad
8.2 Realizar el Aseguramiento de Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
8.3 Controlar la Calidad
9.1 Planificarla Gestión de los Recursos Humanos
9.1 Planificar la Gestión de los Recursos Humanos
9.1 Planificar la Gestión de los Recursos Humanos
9.1 Planificarla Gestión de los Recursos Humanos
9.1 Planificar la Gestión de los Recursos Humanos
9.2 Adquirir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.2 AdquirIr el Equipo del Proyecto
9.2 Adquirir el Equipo del Proyecto
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los costos
Plan de gestión de los recursos humanos
línea base del alcance
Cronograma del proyecto
Registro de riesgos
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los costos
Línea base del alcance
Estimación de costos de las actividades
Basa de las estimaciones
Cronograma del proyecto
Calendarios de recursos
Registro da riesgos
Acuerdos
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan pare la dirección del proyecto
Requisitos de financiamiento del provecto
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Registro de Interesados
Registro de riesgos
DocumentacIón de requisitos
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gastlón de la calidad
Plan de mejoras del proceso
Métricas de calidad
Medidas de control de calidad
Documentos del proyecto
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Métricas da calidad
Listas de verificación de calidad
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio aprobadas
Entregablu
Documentos del proyecto
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Pian para la dirección del proyecto
Recursos requeridos para las actividades
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los recursos humanos
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Herramienta de programación
Juicio de espartos
Técnicas analíticas
Reuniones
Plan de gestión de los costos
Juicio de expertos
Estimación análoga
Estimación paramétrlca
Estimación ascendente
Estimación por tres valores
Análisis de reservas
Costo de la calidad
software de gestión de proyectos
Análisis de ofertas de proveedores
Técnicas grupales de toma de decisiones
Agregación de Costos
Análisis de reservas
Juicio de expertos
Relaciones históricas
Conciliación del límite de financiamiento
Estimación de costos de las actividades
Base de las estimaciones
Actualizaciones e los documentos del proyecto
Gestión del valor ganado
Pronósticos
índice de desempeño del trebejo por completar (TCPI)
Revisiones del desempeño
Software de gestión de proyectos
Análisis de reservas
Análisis Costo-Beneficio
Costo de la calidad
Siete herramientas básicas de calidad
Estudios comparativos
Diseño de experimentos
Muestreo estadístico
Herramientas adicionales de planificación de calidad
Reuniones
Herramientas de gestión control de calidad
Auditorias de calidad
Análisis de procesos
información de desempeño del trabajo
Pronósticos de costos
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan pera la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Siete herramientas básicas de calidad
Muestreo estadístico
Inspección
Revisión de solicitudes de cambio aprobadas
Medidas de control de calidad
Cambios validados
Entregables validados
Información de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
5,,
y
y
Organigramas descripciones de cargos
Creación de relaciones de trabajo
Teoría organizacional
Juicio de espartos
Reuniones
Asignación previa
Negociación
Adquisición
Línea base de costos
Requisitos de financIamiento del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Plan de gestión de la calidad
Plan de mejoras del proceso
Métricas de calidad
Listas de verificación de calidad
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
1'
'"
'
Plan de gestión de los recursos humanos
Asignaciones de personal al proyecto
Calendarios de recursos
Actualizaciones al plan pare la dirección del proyecto
nr
#
Í( ')i
Librol
ng
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
_NIFICAClÓN
9NiFiCACIdN
PNIFICACIÓN
C)
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Recursos Humanos
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Comunicación
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Rleso
R~ Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
¡Riesgo
(+571) 475 75 55
CIL www.lnnerconsultlng.co
Calle 119A1 70 G -911BoQOta. Colombia
9.2 Adquirir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.2 Adquirir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.3 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
93 Desarrollar el Equipo del Proyecto
9.4 Dirigir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.4 Dirigir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.4 Dirigir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.4 Dirigir elEquipo dalProyecto
9.4 Dirigir el Equipo del Proyecto
9.4 Dirigir el Equipo del Proyecto
10.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Comunicaciones
10.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Comunicaciones
10.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Comunicaciones
10.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Comunicaciones
101 Planificar la Gestión de las Comunicaciones
10.2 Gestionar las Comunicaciones
10.2 Gestionar las Comunicaciones
10.2 Gestionar las Comunicaciones
10.2 Gestionar las Comunicaciones
102 Gestionar las Comunicaciones
10.3 Controlar les Comunicaciones
103 Controlar las Comunicaciones
10.3 Controlar las Comunicaciones
10.3 Controlar las Comunicaciones
10.3 Controlar les Comunicaciones
11.1,Planificar la Gestión de los Riesgos
11.1 Planificar la Gestión de los Riesgos
11.1 Planificar la Gestión de los Riesgos
11.1 Planificar la Gestión de ion Riesgos
11.1 Planificar la Gestión de loa Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 #Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.2 Identificar los Riesgos
11.3 Realizar el Análisis Cualitativo de Riesgos
11.3 Realizar el Análisis Cualitativo de Riesgos
11.3 Realizar el Análisis Cualitativo de Riesgos
11.3 Realizar el Análisis Cualitativo de Riesgos
11.3 Realizar el Análisis Cualitativo de Riesgos
11.3 Realizarel Análisis Cualitativo deRiesgos
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
Plan de gestión de los recursos humanos
Asignaciones de personal el proyecto
Calendarios de recursos
Plan de gestión da los recursos humanos
Asignaciones da personal al proyecto
Evaluaciones del desempeño del equipo
Registro de incidentes
Informes del desempeño del trabajo
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Registro de Interesados
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Pian de gestión de las comunicaciones
Informes de desempeño del trabajo
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Comunicaciones del proyecto
Registro de incidentes
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección dei proyecto
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Registro de Interesados
Factores ambientales de La empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los riesgos
Pian de gestión de los costos
Plan do gestión del cronograma
Plan de gestión de la calidad
Plan de gestión de los recursos humanos
Linee base del alcance
Estimación de costos de las actividades
Estimación de la duración de las actividades
Registro de Interesados
Documentos del proyecto
Documentos de las adquisiciones
Factores ambientales de te empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los riesgos
Linee base del alcance
Registro de riesgos
Factores ambientales de le empresa
Activos de los procesos dala organización
Plan do gestión de los riesgos
Plan de gestión de los costos
Plan de gestión del cronograma
Registro de riesgos
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Equipos virtuales
Análisis de decisiones multicriterlo
Habilidades Interpersonales
Capacitación
Actividades de desarrollo del espíritu de equipo
Reglas básicas
Coublcaclón
Reconocimiento y recompensan
Herramientas para la evaluación del personal
Observación y conversación
Evaluaciones del desempeño del proyecto
Gestión de conflictos
Habilidades Interpersonales
Evaluaciones del desempeño del equipo
Actualizaciones a los factores ambientales de la empresa
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los factores ambientales de la empresa
Análisis de requisitos de comunicación
Tecnología de la comunicación
Modelos de comunicación
Métodos de comunicación
Reuniones
Tecnología de la comunicación
Modelos de comunicación
Métodos de comunicación
Sistemas de gestión de la Información
Informar el desempeño
Sistemas de gestión de la Información
Juicio de expertos
Reuniones
Plan de gestión de las comunicaciones
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Técnicas analíticas
Juicio de expertos
Reuniones
Plan de gestión de los riesgos
Revisiones a la documentación
Técnicas de recopilación de Información
Análisis con lista de verificación
Análisis de supuestos
TécnIcas de dlagramaclón
Análisis FODA
Juicio de expertos
Registro de riesgos
Comunicaciones dei proyecto
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos deir e
, cto
' "1"
información de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos delrov,
ecto
Evaluación de probabilidad e impacto de los riesgos
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Matriz de probabilidad a impacto
Evaluación de la calidad de los datos sobre riesgos
Categorización de riesgos
Evaluación dala urgencia de los riesgos
Juicio deexpertos
Técnicas de recopilación y representación do datos
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Técnicas de análisis cuantitativo de riesgos y de modelado
Juicio de expertos
mr
Librol
i-
PLAN$FICACÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
CIERRE
CIERRE
CIERRE
INICIACIÓN
INICIACIÓN
INICIACIÓN
INICIACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
PLANIFICACIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
EJECUCIÓN
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROl.
SEGUIMIENTO Y CONTROL
Y
•
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Riesgo
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Adquisiciones
Interesados
interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
Interesados
linteresados
(.571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsuUingo
Q
Calle 119A 0 70 G -911 Bogotá. Colombia
11.4 Realizar el Análisis Cuantitativo de Riesgos
_11...5 Planificar la Respuesta a los Riesgos
11.5 Planificar la Respuesta a los Riesgos
11.5 Planificar la Respuesta a los Riesgos
113 Planificar la Respuesta a los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
11.6 Controlar los Riesgos
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión da las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión da las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión da las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.1 Planificar la Gestión de las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.2 Efectuar las Adquisiciones
12.3 Controlar las Adquisiciones
12.3 Controlar las Adquisiciones
12. Controlar las Adquisiciones
12.3 Controlar las Adquisiciones
12.3 Controlarlas Adquisiciones
12.3 Controlar las Adquisiciones
12. Controlar las AdquIsiciones
12.4 Cerrar las Adquisiciones
12.4 Cerrar las Adquisiciones
12.4 Cerrar las Adquisiciones
13.1 Identificar a los Interesados
Identificar a los Interesados
dentificar a los Interesados
13.1 Identificar a los Interesados
13.2 Planificar la Gestión de los Interesados
Planificar la Gestión de los Interesados
13.2 Planificar la Gestión de los Interesados
13.2 Planificar la Gestión de los Interesados
13. Gestionar la Participación de los Interesados
13.3 Gestionar la Participación de los Interesados
13.3 Gestionar la Participación de los Interesados
13,3 Gestionar la Participación de los Interesados
13. Gestionar la Participación de los Interesados
13.4 Controlar la Participación de los Interesados
13.4 Controlar la Participación de los Interesados
13.4 Controlar la Participación de los Interesados
13.4 Controlar la Participación de los Interesados
13.4 Controlarla Participación de los Interesados
.
_.!•
_.!•
_.!•
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los riesgos
Registro de riesgos
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Registro de riesgos
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
informes de desempeño del trabajo
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Documentación de requisitos
Registro de riesgos
Recursos requeridos para las actividades
Cronograma del proyecto
Estimación de costos de las actividades
Registro de interesados
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de las adquisiciones
Documentos de las adquisiciones
Criterios de selección de proveedores
Propuestas de los vendedores
Documentos del proyecto
Decisiones de hacer o comprar
Enunciados del trabajo relativo a adquisiciones
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Documentos de las adquisiciones
Acuerdos
Solicitudes de cambio aprobadas
Informes de desempeño del trabajo
Datos de desempeño del trabajo
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Documentos da las adquisiciones
Acta de constitución del proyecto
Documentos de las adquisiciones
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Registro de Interesados
Factores ambientales de la empresa
Activos de los procesos de la organización
Plan de gestión de los Interesados
Plan da gestión de las comunicaciones
Registro de cambios
Activos da los procesos de la organización
Plan para la dirección del proyecto
Registro de incidentes
Datos de desampaRo del trabajo
Documentos del proyecto
Estrategias para riesgos negativos o amenazas
Estrategias para riesgos positivos u oportunidades
Estrategias de respuesta a contingencias
Juicio de expertos
Reevaluación de los riesgos
Auditorías de los riesgos
Análisis de variación de tendencias
Medición del desempeño técnico
Análisis de reservas
Reuniones
Análisis de hacer o comprar
Juicio de expertos
Investigación de mercado
Reuniones
y
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
información de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos delrocto
' ""
'
Plan de gestión de las adquisiciones
Enunciados del trabajo relativo a adquisiciones
Documentos de las adquisiciones
Criterios de selección de proveedoras
Decisiones da hacer o comprar
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Conferencia de oferentes
Técnicas de evaluación de propuestas
Estimaciones Independientes
Juicio de espartos
Publicidad
Técnicas analíticas
Negociación de adquisiciones
Vendedoras seleccionados
Acuerdos
Calendarios de recursos
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Sistema de control de cambios del contrato
Revisiones del desempeño de las adquisiciones
inspecciones auditorias
informar el desempeño
Sistemas de pago
Administración da reclamaciones
Sistema de gestión de registros
Auditorías de la adquisición
Nagociacion de adquisiciones
Sistema de gestión de registros
Análisis de interesados
juicio de expertos
Reuniones
Información de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos deIroecto
Juicio de expertos
Reuniones
Técnicas analíticas
Pian de gestión de tos Interesados
Actualizaciones a los documentos del proyecto
Métodos de comunicación
Habilidades interpersonales
Habilidades de gestión
Registro de Incidentes
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos deiroycto
''"
Sistemas de gestión dala información
Juicio de espartos
Reuniones
Información de desempeño del trabajo
Solicitudes de cambio
Actualizaciones al plan para la dirección del proyecto
Actualizaciones a los documentos deIcto
y
'"''
Adquisiciones cerradas
"
.
"' ZCLI903 U.
"'
"
Registro da interesados
ir
mr
co.
Librol
Ing
Fuente: A gulde to the proJect management body of knowledge (PMBOK gulde) (5th cd.). (2013).
Newtown Square, Pa.: Project Management Institute. Newtown Square, Pa.: Project Management Institute.
Elabora Samantha Naholi Rivera Otan
Elaborado por:
Iván Rivera, PMP
Este obra está bajo una licencia de Creative Commons Este obra está bajo una licencie de Creative Commons Reconocimlento-NoComerclal-Compartirlgual 3.0 Unported.
http://Ivanrivera-pmp,blogspot.com.co/p/pmbok-5-ltl http://ivanrtvera.pmp.blogspot.com.co/p/pmbok-5-ittos-entradas-herramientas-y.html
(+571) 475 75 ss
www.innerconsultlng.co
Q
Calle 119A1 70 G -911 Bogotá Colombia
,
inner
consulting
CRONOGRAMA
•
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
e) Calle 119A # 70 G -91 / Bogotá, Colombia
0
p r .q8
O
I9OOI.
04)00)077
6407
F.
77004)70014*
063.06916
0217-021010
77612.062318
0224-085818
0631.1416610
764774467016
704614.74462416
644621.74462176
744624-0.4418
065.041116
0.4 12-021115
0610-0027410
048) 0)00Il16)0700. 648 J 46501140)0 601-44-8204801002450144920564.4% JO 9 0LUX)V 90140)050140)0) 80146202$
141
10)700017 74610201%
16662800 20(1212016
A4l4*74.44.47o*y k.**394 4.4001)0)07474746464
10110)201* 71772)2616
0.64.16664• 40440•74711.690
300
177100078 74)770017
444*24)9404046441146*1
200
340424)00)14.74(2,20.4247741,4)0 000 1
3501
10,10,201C 25ninio
6444)44647,442444404447
3543
177(00076 24611)3016
0.39244.40 06,02 404642(1404006400,1l
204'
77770)2071 64)1146616
62,047702 T*741,204 *706.703007446
274'
1011002011 10110717
077444700004 3.4sl.0'00104'd'o.',
lo'
247(7)3071 29610018 70910_11 121
G~
167
24711.07777 29110078
Mic~.
5341
16)162010 211202016
1-27
177100016 14)100016
747100017 24)100076
10)100016 25(110016
7001772011l10110016
449677*66U00010246 11019
624.78462% 1021046404. C4148.I C7664
3474
A~$~ Lt~ 042*04 94000,
20
10070(20161101022016
069.0404409)0000*444)541*V4p*l0*6
124'
1041772011 28770.0018
7727
177100718 26100016
84?
1471077418 17)162078
2400 400) L~ Red 6slU46.ElO.lp
00074)0
6040045.02 CAL 124*74.
0260071021240944970440 (lWpO,•
647
6460404047*644 4672l4PI.ko,,, 001744
641
1 k*30840146106l4Il04d*
1*
191472016 121100018
10(10)0776 17)1472016
1347
16)18)2600 2*20)2010
24)110718
70146094.16779
1227
1412009.*,77*6.477..12
2641
semao do 0~
310
74)100017 277110018
$012804403947.
7241
24)16.2616 141720018 124
50120014040440
747
24/110810 0201272016 101213
5~ SIATA,
549
311100710 64)1102216 II
6301200(6 1
0,1#044477111404o%4l6*46661..P174,Wol*164'
2771772016 3111072616 11
3.467*4404046403*7446064649
147
11072076 11072.0676 27222324252
0446370274077044.1004462624*
707
16170016 16(12)2618 33.14,315 37.3e
29760816 27772)2066
10044044.06346604. 8,0004 4466447
C2l44ol000%p2o4%7o01o4o02o. l00%0.71007403
07
14)120016 2467272010
2471202077 20)120676
61)12,207% 28)1202018
í-OTI.o041.6044.00,.4004*.16
0367
CJ%2424419% 7176%3401.7644640*74801*$GJ**441*7
147192016 2122)2616
14)10(2016 14)1272016
3347
17114)2016 3771172010
247
391272616 2112)201*
7746.44620211*7671,646*7404*6*702.726?
26720016 21)120018
647401474607
11006•0t48404
-
,
inner
consulting
ANEXOS T CNICOS
•
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
O Calle 119A # 70 G -91 / Bogotá, Colombia
i 30
Listado de cursos ofrecidos
Curso oficial:
•
PMP ultima versión para dos (2) personas. -/
Curso oficial y certificación:
• ¡SO 27000 y Cobit para dos (2) personas. v
• Oracle Suite OCA/OCP para dos (2) personas /
•
Oracle WebLogic para una (1) persona.
•
Oracle ldentity Analytics Administration para una (1) persona. .-
•
Oracle SOA Suite para una (1) persona
•
Oracle BPM Suite para (1) persona
•
Oracle Data Quality para una (1) persona
• Oracle VM 3.0 para una (1) persona.
Almacenamiento Adicional
Se oferta un almacenamiento con sistema con velocidad de lectura mayor a
99.000 IOPS con bloque de 32 50%/50% Read and Writes que incluye
software de reducción de patrones, cifrado, de-duplicación y compresión.
inner
consufting
Anexo
Técnico
1
1;
(
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
O"C292
Bogotá D.C. 15 de Septiembre de 2016
y
Señores
FCM
Licitación Publica 018 DE 2016
Ciudad
LENOVO ASIA PACIFIC LIMITED SUCURSAL COLOMBIA informa que la empresa
INNER CONSULTING pertenece a la red de distribuidores autorizados para
comercializar y distribuir equipos de la unidad DCG Data Center Gmup Lenovo
ThlnkServers®, Lenovo System X®, Lenovo Storage products, Lenovo Networking,
solución de garantías Lenovo ThinkPlus® y servicios asociados DCG. Las marcas
registradas y líneas de productos anteriormente mencionadas, son propiedad hoy de
LENOVO y cuentan con presencia y representación en más de cinco continentes y en
Colombia por más de diez años.
Cordialmente,
Cesar Rueda
DCG Value Channel.
LENOVO ASIA PACIFIC LIMITED SUCURSAL COLOMBIA.
Nit.900.030.538-3
Lenovo.com/co
Bogotá D.C.
Cra 9 No. 7649 Ofc. 203
T (571) 3138080
r C 233
Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
The x240 M5 supports the attachment of the Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node. By using the FIex System
PCIe Expansion Node, more PU Express cards can be attached, such as High IOPS SSD adatpers, fabric
mezzanine cards, and next-generation graphics processing units (GPU) to supported Fiex System compute
nodes. This capability is ideal for many applications that require high performance I/O, special
telecommunications network interfaces, or hardware acceleration that uses a PCI Express card. The PCIe
Expansion Node supports up to four PCIe 2.0 adapters and two more Fiex System expansion adapters.
The PCIe Expansion Node is attached to a Fiex System compute node, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10. PCIe Expansion Node attached to the x240 M5
The ordering information for the PCIe Expansion Node is shown in the following table.
Table 20. Ordering part number and feature code
Part number Feature code Description
81 Y8983
Al BV
Maximum supported
Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node 1
The PCIe Expansion Node has the following features:
•
Support for up to four standard PCIe 2.0 adapters:
•
o Two PCIe 2.0 x16 slots that support fuII-length, full-height adapters
o Two PCIe 2.0 x8 slots that support half-Iength, low-profile adapters
Support for PCIe 3.0 adapters by operating them in PCIe 2.0 mode
•
Support for one fuIl-length, full-height double-wide adapter (that uses the space of the two fui¡-Iength,
fuIl-height adapter slots)
•
Support for PCIe cards with higher power requirements; a single adapter card (up to 225W) or to two
adapters (up to 150W each)
•
Two FIex System I/O expansion connectors to further expand the I/O capability of the attached
compute node
Note: The use of the PCIe Expansion Node requires that the x240 M5 Compute Node have both processors
installed.
For more information, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide: http://lenovopress.comftipsü9ü6
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
Product Guide
The Lenovo Fiex SystemTM x240 M5 Compute Nade is a high-performance server that off ers enhanced
security, efficiency, and reliability features to handie business-critica¡ workloads. The blade server is based
an the Intel Xeon E5-2600 v3 processors. It features up to 18 cores and uses new TruDDR4 Memory,
which runs at speeds up to 2133 MHz.
Suggested uses: Database, virtualization, enterprise appíications, collaboration and email, streaming
media, web, HPC, and cloud applications.
Figure 1 shows the Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Nade.
Figure 1. FIex System x240 M5 Compute Nade
Did you know?
The x240 M5 Compute Nade uses TruDDR4 Memory DIMM technalogy, which offers higher clock speeds,
faster data transfer rates, and runs at a lower voltage (1.2V). With DDR4 technology, memory DIMMs can
now operate at speeds up to 2133 MHz, which provides lower latency times and enhanced camputing
power. The TruDDR4 Memory portfolio includes RDIMMs with advanced error correction for reliability,
performance, and maximum memory capacity. In addition, TruDDR4 Memory supports memory
performance that exceeds industry standards.
The x240 M5 Compute Nade integrates Ieadership security and reliability. System x Trusted Platform
Assurance, an exclusive set of System x features and practices, establishes a faolproof security
foundation for yaur workloads. Enterprise-class data protection is provided with optional self-encrypting
drives and simple, centralized key management through Security Key Lifecycle Management. Diagnostic
tools facilitate reduced dawntime and costs.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
r
'
Key featu res
The Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Node is a high-availability, scalable compute nade that is optimized to
support the next-generation microprocessor technology. It is ideally suited for medium and large
businesses. This section describes the key features of the server.
Scalability and performance
The x240 M5 offers the following features to boost performance, improve scalability, and reduce costs:
• Improves productivity by offering superior system performance with up to 18-core processors, up
to 45 MB of L3 cache, and up to 9.6 GT/s QPI interconnect links.
• Supports up to two processors, 36 cores, and 72 threads, which maximizes the concurrent
execution of multi-threaded applications.
• lntelligent and adaptive system performance with energy efficient Intel Turbo Boost Technology
allows CPU cores to run at maximum speeds during peak workloads by temporarily going beyond
processor thermal design power (TDP).
• Intel Hyper-Threading Technology boosts performance for multithreaded applications by enabling
simultaneous multithreading within each processor core, up to two threads per core.
• Intel Virtualization Technology integrates hardware-level virtualization hooks that allow operating
system vendors to better use the hardware for virtualization workloads.
• Intel Advanced Vector Extensions 2.0 (AVX 2.0) enable acceleration of enterprise-class workloads,
such as databases and enterprise resource planning.
• Up to 2133 MHz memory speeds with two DIMMs per channel that are running at 2133 MHz to help
maximize system performance.
• Up to 1.5 TB of memory capacity with 64 GB load-reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs)
• Optional support for high-performance PCIe-attached NVMe Flash Storage solid-state drives
(SSDs) can significantly improve I/O performance.
• Supports the Storage Expansion Node, which provides another 12 hot-swap, 2.5-inch drive bays for
local storage.
• Up to 32 virtual I/O ports per compute nade with available 10 Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters, which
offers the choice of Ethernet, iSCSI, or Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) connectivity.
• The x240 M5 offers PC¡ Express 3.0 /0 expansion capabilities that improve the theoretical
maximum bandwidth by 60% (8 GT/s per link), compared with the previous generation of PU
Express 2.0.
• With Intel Integrated I/O Technology, the PCI Express 3.0 controller is integrated into the Intel Xeon
processor ES family. This integration helps to dramatically reduce I/O Iatency and increase overall
system performance.
• Support for high-bandwidth I/O adapters, up to two in each x240 MS Compute Nade.
• Support for 10 G Ethernet, 16 G Fibre Channel, and FDR InfiniBand.
• Supports the PCIe Expansion Node for support for up to six more I/O adapters.
• High-speed USB 3.0 port for connectivity to externa¡ devices.
Availability and serviceability
The x240 M5 provides the following features to simplify serviceability and increase system up-time:
• Chipkill, memory mirroring, and memory rank sparing for redundancy ¡f there is a non-correctable
memory failure.
• Tool-less cover removal provides easy access to upgrades and serviceable parts, such as CPU,
memory, and adapter cards.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
2
• Hot-swap drives support integrated RAID 1 redundancy for data protection and greater system uptime.
• A light path diagnostics panel and individual light path LEDs to quickly lead the technician to failed
(or failing) components. This feature simplifies servicing, speeds up problem resolution, and helps
improve system availability.
• Proactive Platform Alerts (including PFA and SMART alerts): Processors, voltage regulators,
memory, interna¡ storage (SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs, NVMe SSDs, flash storage adapters), fans,
power supplies, RAID controllers, and server ambient and sub-component temperatures. Alerts can
be surfaced through the system IMM to managers such as Lenovo XClarity Administrator, VMware
vCenter, and Microsoft System Center. These proactive alerts let you take appropriate actions in
advance of possible failure, thereby increasing server uptime and application availability.
• Solid-state drives (SSDs), which offer significantly better reliability than traditional mechanical HDDs
for greater uptime.
• Built-in Integrated Management Module II (IMM2) continuously monitors system parameters,
triggers alerts, and performs recovering actions if there is a failure to minimize downtime.
• Built-in diagnostics that uses Dynamic Systems Analysis (DSA) Preboot speeds up troubleshooting
tasks to reduce service time.
• Three-year customer replaceable unit and on-site Iimited warranty; next business day 9x5. Optional
service upgrades are available.
Manageability and security
The foliowing powerful systems management features simplify the local and remote management of the
x240 M5:
• The x240 M5 includes an IMM2 to monitor server availability and perform remote management.
• Integrated industry-standard Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) enables improved setup,
configuration, and updates, and simplifies error handling.
• Integrated Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.2 support enables advanced cryptographic
functionality, such as digital signatures and remote attestation.
• System x Trusted Platform Assurance, an exclusive set of System x security features and practices,
establishes a foolproof security foundation for workloads by delivering firmware that is securely
built, tested, digitally signed, and verified before execution.
• The server offers enterprise-class data protection with optional self-encrypting drives and simple,
centralized key management through Security Key Lifecycle Management.
• Industry-standard AES Ni support for faster, stronger encryption.
• Integrates with the IBM® FIex SystemTM Manager for proactive systems management. It offers
comprehensive systems management for the entire FIex System platform that helps to increase uptime, reduce costs, and improve productivity through advanced server management capabilities.
• Lenovo Fabric Manager simplifies deployment of infrastructure connections by managing network
and storage address assignments.
• Intel Execute Disable Bit functionality can help prevent certain classes of malicious buffer overflow
attacks when combined with a supporting operating system.
• Intel Trusted Execution Technology provides enhanced security through hardwarebased resistance
to malicious software attacks, which allows an application to run in its own isolated space that is
protected from al) other software that is running on a system.
Energy efficiency
The x240 M5 offers the foliowing energy-efficiency features to save energy, reduce operational costs,
increase energy availability, and contribute to the green envíronment:
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
• Component-sharing design of the FIex System chassis provides ultimate power and cooling
savings.
• The Intel Xeon processor E5-2600 v3 product family offers signtficantly better performance over the
E5-2600 v2 family while fitting into the same thermal design power (TDP) Iimits.
• Intel lnteuigent Power Capability powers individual processor elements Qn and off as needed, which
reduces power draw.
• Low-voltage Intel Xeon processors draw Iess energy to satisfy demands of power and thermally
constrained data centers and telecommunication environments.
• Low-voltage 1.2V DDR4 memory DIMMs use up to 20% Iess energy compared to 1.35V DDR3
DIMMs.
• Solid state drives (SSDs) use as much as 80% Iess power than traditional spinning 2.5-inch HDDs.
• The x240 M5 uses hexagonal ventilation holes, which are a part of Calibrated Vectored CoolingT 1
technology. Hexagonal holes can be grouped more densely than round holes, which provides more
efficient airflow through the system.
Locations of key components and connectors
Figure 2 shows the front of the server.
Two 25' hot-swap
S
USB 3.0 Console breakout
port
cable port
Power
button
LED 2D barcode
panel supportinfo
Figure 2. Front view of the Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Node
Figure 3 shows the Iocations of key components inside the server.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
4
Figure 3. Inside view of the Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Node
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
5
Standard specifications
The foliowing table Iists the standard specifications.
Table 1. Standard specifications
Components Specification
Modes
9532-x2x, 9532-x4x, 9532-x6x
Firmware
Lenovo-signed firmware
Form factor
Standard-width compute node.
Chassis
support
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis.
Processor
Up to two Intel Xeon processor E5-2600 v3 product family CPUs with 18 cores (2.3 GHz), 16 cores
(2.3 GHz), 14 cores (up to 2.6 GHz), 12 cores (up to 2.6 GHz) or 10 cores (up to 2.6 GHz), 8 cores
(up to 3.2 GHz), 6 cores (up to 3.4 GHz), or up to 4 cores (up to 3.5 GHz). Two QPI Iinks up to 9.6
GTps each. Up to 2133 MHz memory speed. Up to 45 MB L3 cache.
Chipset
Intel 0612
Memory
Up to 24 DIMM sockets (12 DIMMs per processor). RDIMMs and LRDIMMs are supported.
Memory types cannot be intermixed. Memory speed up to 2133 MHz. Four memory channels per
processor (3 DIMMs per chan nel).
Memory
maximums
With LRDIMMs: Up to 1.5 TB with 24 64 GB LRDIMMs and two processors
With RDIMMs: Up to 768 GB with 24 32 GB RDIMMs and two processors
Memory
pratection
ECC, optional memory mirroring and memory rank spanng.
Disk drive
bays
Two 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drive bays that support SAS, SATA, and SSDs. Optional
support for 2.5-inch NVMe Enterprise POle SSDs. Optional support for up ta faur 1 .8-inch SSDs in
place of the two 2.5-inch bays. Up to 12 more 2.5-inch drive bays with the optional Storage
Expansion Nade.
Maximum
internal
storage
With two 2.5-inch hot-swap dríves: Up to 3.2 TB that uses 1.6 TB 2.5-inch SATA SSDs or up to 2.4
TB that uses 1.2 TB SAS HDDs. An intermix of SAS HDDs or SATA HDDs or SSDs ¡s supported.
With two 2.5-inch NVMe SSDs: Up to 4 TB that uses 2 TB NVMe 2.5-inch G3HS Enterprise Value
PCIe SSDs.
With four 1 .8-inch SSDs: Up to 3.2 TB that uses 800 GB 1 .8-inch SSDs.
More storage is available with an attached Fiex System Storage Expansion Node.
RAID support RAID-O, RAID-1 and RAID-1 E with integrated ServeRAID M1210e controller (LSI SAS3004-based)
or optional ServeRAiD M5215. Optional RAID-5 support with ServeRAlD M1200 RAID-5
Enablement Kit and 1 .8-inch SSDs
Network
interfaces
x2x models: None standard; optional 1 Gb or 10 GbE adapters.
x4x models: Two 10 GbE ports with EN41 72 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter.
x6x models: Two 10 GbE ports with CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter.
PC¡
Expansion
slots
Two 1/0 connectors for adapters. PC¡ Express 3.0 xl 6 interface. Includes an Expansion Connector
(PCIe 3.0 xl 6) to cannect an expansian nade, such as the PCIe Expansion Nade. PCIe Expansion
Nade supports two fui¡-height PCIe adapters, two low-profile PCIe adapters, and two FIex System
I/O adapters.
Parts
Frant: One USB 3.0 port and ane consale breakout cable port that pravides local KVM and serial
ports (cable standard with chassis; more cables optional).
Interna¡: Optional SD Media Adapter pravides two SD Media slots for VMware vSphere hypervisor
support (RAID 1 pair).
UEFI, Integrated Management Module 2 (IMM2) with Renesas SH7758 controller, Predictive
Systems
management Failure Analysis, Iight path diagnostics panel, autamatic server restart, remote presence. Support
for Lenavo XClarity Administratar, IBM FIex System ManagerTM, IBM Systems Director, Active
Energy Manager, and Lenovo ToolsCenter.
Lenavo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
Components Specification
Security
features
Power-on password, administrators password, Trusted Platform Module 1.2.
Video
Matrox G200eR2 video core with 16 MB video memory ¡ntegrated into the IMM2. Maximum
resolution is 1600x1 200 at 75 Hz with 16 M colors.
Limited
warranty
Three-year customer-replaceable unit and Qn-site limited warranty with 9x5/NBD.
Operating
systems
supported
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 and 2012 R2, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 and 7, SUSE Linux
Enterprise Server 11 and 12, VMware vSphere 5.1, 5.5 and 6.0. For more information, see
SuppuL
op€ating syrr
Service and
support
Optional service upgrades are available through Lenovo warranty services: 4-hour or 2-hour
response time, 8-hour fix time, 1 -year or 2-year warranty extension, remote technical support for
Lenovo hardware and selected Lenovo and original equipment manufacturer (OEM) software.
Dimensions
Width: 215 mm (8.5 inches), height 51 mm (2.0 inches), depth 493 mm (19.4 inches).
Weight
Maximum configuration: 7.1 kg (15.6 lb).
The x240 M5 servers are shipped with the foliowing items:
• Statement of Limited Warranty
• lmportant Notices
• Documentation CD that contains the installation and User's Guide
Standard modeis
Table 2 Iists the standard modeis.
Table 2. Standard modeis
I/o
slots
(used
Intel Xeon Processor
Model (2 maximum)*
Memory
Disk
adapter
Disk bayst
(used/max)
10
Disks GbE
max)
/
Modeis with no Ethernet adapter standard
9532A2x
lx E5-2609 v3 6C 1.9GHz 15MB
1600MHz 85W
lx 16 GB
(1600 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
9532B2x
lx E5-2620 v3 6C 2.4GHz 15MB
1866MHz 85W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
9532C2x
lx E5-2630 v3 80 2.4GHz 20MB
1866MHz85W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
9532D2x
lx E5-2640 v3 80 2.6GHz 20M
1866MHz90W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
012
9532F2x
lx E5-2650L v3 12C 1.8GHz 30MB lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
2133MHz 65W
MHz
M1210e
(0 / 2)
Open Open
0/2
9532G2x
lx E5-2650 v3 100 2.3GHz 25MB
2133MHz 105W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
9532H2x
lx E5-2660 v3 100 2.6GHz 25MB
2133MHz 105W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
9532J2x
lx E5-2670 v3 120 2.3GHz 30MB
2133MHz 120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 25" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
Intel Xeon Processor
Model (2 maximum)*
Memory
Disk
adapter
Disk bayst
(used/max)
10
Disks GbE
I/o
sots
(used
/
max)
9532L2x
lx E5-2680 v3 12C 2.5GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5' hot-swap
(0/2)
MHz
M1210e
Open Open
0/2
9532M2x
lx E5-2690 v3 120 2.6GHz 30MB
2133MHz135W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
MHz
Open Open
0/2
9532N2x
lx E5-2697 v3 14C 2.6GHz 35MB
2133MHz145W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open Opon
0/2
9532Q2x
lx E5-2698 v3 16C 2.3GHz 40MB
2133MHz135W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
MHz
(0/2)
Open Open
0/2
Models with EN41 72 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter standard
9532B4x
lx E5-2620 v3 60 2.4GHz 15MB
1866MHz85W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
112
9532D4x
lx E5-2640 v3 80 2.6GHz 20MB
1866MHz90W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532H4x
lx E5-2660 v3 100 2.6GHz 25MB
2133MHz105W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532J4x
lx E5-2670 v3 120 2.3GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M121Oe
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532L4x
lx E5-2680 v3 120 2.5GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
Modefs with CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabnc Adapter standard
9532B6x
lx E5-2620 v3 60 2.4GHz 15MB
1866MHz85W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532D6x
lx E5-2640 v3 8C 2.6GHz 20M
1866MHz9OW
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532H6x
lx E5-2660 v3 100 2.6GHz 25MB
2133MHz 105W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532J6x
lx E5-2670 v3 120 2.3GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Open 2x 10
Gb
1/2
9532L6x
lx E5-2680 v3 120 2.5GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
lx 16 GB 2133 ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap
MHz
M1210e
(0/2)
Opon 2x 10
Gb
1/2
* Processor detall: Processor quantity, model, cores, core speed, L3 cache, memory speed, power TDP
rating.
t The two 2.5-inch drive bays can be replaced with four 1 .8-inch SSD bays.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 MS (E5-2600 v3)
NEBS-compliant modeis
The foliowing table Iists the available modeis that are NEBS compliant when used with the Lenovo Fiex
System Carrier-Grade Chassis, 7385-DCx.
Table 3. NEBS-compliant modeis
Model Intel Xeon Processor
(2 maximum)*
Memory
Disk
adapter
Disk bayst
Disks 10
GbE
I/O slots
(used/max)
9532RAx
lx E5-2608L v3 6C 2.0GHz
15MB 1866MHz52W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hotM1210e
swap (012)
Open Open 0/2
9532RBx
lx E5-2618L v3 8C 2.3GHz
20MB 1866MHz 75W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hotM1210e
swap (0 / 2)
Open Open 012
9532RCx
lx E5-2628L v3 1 O 2.0GHz
25MB 1866MHz 75W
lx 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hotswap (0/2)
M1210e
Open Open 0/2
9532RDx
lx E5-2648L v3 12C 1.8GHz
30MB 2133MHz 75W
lx 16 GB
2133 MHz
ServeRAID 2.5' hotswap (0/2)
M1210e
Open Open 0 /2
9532REx
lx E5-2658 v3 12C 2.2GHz
30MB 2133MHz 105W
lx 16 GB
2133 MHz
ServeRAID 2.5" hotswap (0/2)
M1210e
Open Open 0 / 2
* Processor detall: Processor quantity, model, cores, core speed, L3 cache, memory speed, power TOP
rating.
TopSeller modeis
The following table lists the available TopSeller modeis.
Table 4. TopSeller modeis
Model Intel Xeon Processor
(2 maximum)*
Memory
Disk
adapter
Disk bayst
Disks 10
GbEt
I/O
slots
TopSeller modeis - North America
9532Elx
2x E5-2620 v3 60 2.4GHz 15MB
1866MHz85W
2x 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap Open CN4022 1/2
M1210e
(0/2)
9532E2x
2x E5-2640 v3 80 2.6GHz 20MB
1 866MHz 90W
4x 16 GB
(1866 MHz)
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap Open CN4022 1 / 2
M1210e
(0/2)
9532E3x
2x E5-2650 v3 100 2.3GHz 25M
2133MHz105W
4x 16 GB
2133 MHz
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap Open CN4022 112
M1210e
(0/2)
9532E4x
2x E5-2670 v3 12C 2.3GHz 30MB
2133MHz120W
8x 16 GB
2133 MHz
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap Open CN4022 1/2
M1210e
(0/2)
9532E5x
2x E5-2690 v3 120 2.6GHz 30MB
2133MHz135W
8x 16 GB
2133 MHz
ServeRAID 2.5" hot-swap Open CN4022 1/2
M1210e
(0/2)
* Processor detall: Processor quantity, model, cores, core speed, L3 cache, memory speed, power TDP
rating.
t The two 2.5-inch drive bays can be replaced with four 1 .8-inch SSD bays.
t Modeis come standard with a CN4022 2-port 10Gb Converged Adapter
Lenovo Fiex System x240 MS (E5-2600 v3)
9
Chassis support
The x240 M5 Compute Node is supported in the FIex System chassis as usted in the foliowing table.
Table 5. Chassis support
Chassis modeis
Descnption
Supports x240 M5 (9532)
8721-HC1 based:
8721 -Al x, LRx, DCx
8721-K1G, El Y, E2Y
Lenovo Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
with CMM (68Y7030) standard
Yes
8721 -HC2 based:
8721-ALx, DLx
8721-E3Y, E4Y
Lenovo Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
with CMM2 (00FJ669) standard
Yes
7385-DCx
Lenovo Fiex System Carrier-Grade Chassis
Yes
Up to 14 x240 M5 Compute Nodes can be installed in the chassis; however, the actual number that can
be installed in a chassis depends on the foliowing factors:
• TDP power rating for the processors that are installed ¡n the x240 M5
• Number of power supplies that are installed in the chassis
• Capacity of the installed power supplies (2100 W or 2500 W)
• Chassis power redundancy policy that is used (N+1 or N+N)
The foliowing table provides guidelines about what number of x240 M5 Compute Nodes can be installed.
For more information, use the Power Configurator, which is found at the foliowing website:
http://ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/resources/powerconfig.htrn
The foliowing color coding was used In the table:
• Green = No restriction on the number of x240 M5 Compute Nodes that can be installed
• Yellow = Sorne bays must be left ernpty in the chassis
Table 6. Maximum number of x240 M5 Compute Nodes that can be installed based on installed power
supplies and power redundancy policy used
x240 M5
TDP
rating
2100 W power supplies installed
N+1, N=5
6 power
supplies
N+1, N=4
5 power
supplies
55W
.14
14
65W
4
75W
2500 W power supplies installed
N+1, N=3
5 power
supplies
N+N, N=3
6 power
supplies
N+1, N=5
6 power
supplies
N+1, N=4
5 power
supplies
11
11
14
14
14
11
11
14
4
14
'* 11
11
N+1, N=3 N+N, N=3
4 power 6 power
supplies supplies
52W
-
.
-
14.
-
.
14
14
14
14
14
14
-- 14
14
14
14
-
85W
14
14
11
11
14
- 14
90W
14
14
11
11
14
14
14
105W
14
14
11
11
14
14
13
14
120W
14
14
11
11
14
13
14
-
-------14
-
-
14
135W
113
11
11
114
- 14
12
13
145W
13
11
11
14
14
¡12
13
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
10
Processor options
The x240 M5 supports the processor options that are usted in the foliowing table. The server supports one
or two processors. The table also shows which server modeis have each processor standard, if any.
Table 7. Processor options
Part
number
Feature code*
Intel Xeon processor description
Modeis
where used
00JX063
A5T1 / A5SJ
Intel Xeon E5-2603 v3 60 1.6GHz 15MB 1600MHz 85W
-
00KJ052
AS35 / AS3F
Intel Xeon E5-26081- v3 6C 2.0GHz 15MB 1866MHz 52W
-
00JX062
A5T2 / A5SK
Intel Xeon E5-2609 v3 6C 1.9GHz 15MB 1600MHz 85W
A2x
00KJ051
AS34 IAS3E
Intel Xeon E5-26181- v3 8C 2.3GHz 20MB 1866MHz 75W
-
00JX060
A5T3 / A5SL
Intel Xeon E5-2620 v3 60 2.4GHz 15MB 1 866MHz 85W
B2x, B4x, B6x
00KJ048
AS31 / AS313
Intel Xeon E5-2623 v3 40 3.0GHz lOMB 1866MHz 105W
-
OOKJ050
AS33 / AS3D
Intel Xeon E5-26281- v3 100 2.0GHz 25MB 1 866MHz 75W
-
00JX059
A5T5 / A5SN
Intel Xeon E5-2630 v3 80 2.4GHz 20MB 1866MHz 85W
02x
00JX061
A5T4 / A5SM
Intel Xeon E5-26301- v3 80 1.8GHz 20MB 1866MHz 55W
-
00JX066
A5T6 / A5SF
Intel Xeon E5-2637 v3 40 3.5GHz 15MB 2133MHz 135W
-
00JX058
A5T7 / A5SQ
Intel Xeon E5-2640 v3 80 2.6GHz 20MB 1866MHz 90W
02x, D4x, 06x
00JX065
A5T8 1 A5SR
Intel Xeon E5-2643 v3 60 3.4GHz 20MB 2133MHz 135W
-
00KJ049
AS32 / AS3C
Intel Xeon E5-26481- v3 120 1.8GHz 30MB 2133MHz 75W
-
00JX056
ASTA /A5ST
Intel Xeon E5-2650 v3 100 2.3GHz 25MB 2133MHz 105W
G2x
00JX057
A5T9 / A5SS
Intel Xeon E5-26501- v3 120 1.8GHz 30MB 2133MHz 65W
F2x
00KJ044
AS2X/AS37
Intel Xeon E5-2658 v3 120 2.2GHz 30MB 2133MHz 105W
-
00JX055
A5TB / A5SU
Intel Xeon E5-2660 v3 100 2.6GHz 25MB 2133MHz 105W
H2x, H4x, H6x
00JX064
A5TC / A5SV
Intel Xeon E5-2667 v3 80 3.2GHz 20MB 2133MHz 135W
-
00JX054
A5TD / A5SW
Intel Xeon E5-2670 v3 120 2.3GHz 30MB 2133MHz 120W
J2x, J4x, J6x
00JX053
A5TE / A5SX
Intel Xeon E5-2680 v3 120 2.5GHz 30MB 2133MHz 120W
L2x, L4x, L6x
00KJ047
AS30 / AS3A
Intel Xeon E5-2683 v3 14C 2.0GHz 35MB 2133MHz 120W
-
00KJ046
AS2Z / AS39
Intel Xeon E5-2685 v3 120 2.6GHz 30MB 2133MHz 120W
-
00JX052
A5TF / A5SY
Intel Xeon E5-2690 v3 120 2.6GHz 30MB 2133MHz 135W
M2x
00JX051
A5TG / A5SZ
Intel Xeon E5-2695 v3 140 2.3GHz 35MB 2133MHz 120W
-
OOJX050
A5TH / A5TO
Intel Xeon E5-2697 v3 140 2.6GHz 35MB 2133MHz 145W
N2x
00KJ045
AS2Y/AS38
Intel Xeon E5-2698 v3 160 2.3GHz40MB 21331VIHz 135W
Q2x
00KJ043
AS2W 1 AS36
Intel Xeon E5-2699 v3 180 2.3GHz 45MB 2133MHz 145W
-
* The first feature code is for processor 1 and second feature code is for processor 2.
Memory options
TruDDR4 Memory uses the highest quality components that are sourced from Tier 1 DRAM suppliers and
only memory that meets the strict requirements of Lenovo is selected. It is compatibility tested and tuned
on every System x server to maximize performance and reliability. TruDDR4 Memory has a unique
signature that is programmed into the DIMM that enables System x servers to verify whether the memory
that is installed is qualified or supported by Lenovo. Because TruDDR4 Memory is authenticated, certain
extended memory performance features can be enabled to extend performance over industry standards.
11
Lenovo FIex System x240 MS (E5-2600 v3)
ç
From a service and support standpoint, Lenovo memory automatically assumes the Lenovo system
warranty and Lenovo provides service and support worldwide.
The foliowing table lists the supported memory opttons.
Table 8. Memory options for the x240 M5
Part
number
Feature Description
code
Modeis
where used
Registered DIMMs_(RDIMMs)
46W0784 A5136
4GB TruDDR4 Memory (1Rx8, 1.2V) PC4-1 7000 CL15 2133MHz LP RDIMM
-
46W0788 A5135
8GB TruDDR4 Memory (1 Rx4, 1.2V) PC4-1 7000 C1-1 5 2133MHz LP RDIMM
-
46W0792 A5B8
8GB TruDDR4 Memory (2Rx8, 1.2V) PC4-1 7000 CL15 2133MHz LP RDIMM
-
95Y4821
ASD9
16GB TruDDR4 Memory (2Rx4, 1.2V) PC4-1 7000 CL15 2133MHz LP RDIMM
AlI modeis
95Y4808
A5UJ
32GB TruDDR4 Memory (2Rx4, 1.2V) PC4-1 7000 CL1 5 2133MHz LP RDIMM
-
Load-reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs)
46W0800 A5139
32GB TruDDR4 Memory (4Rx4, 1.2V) PC41 7000 CL15 2133MHz LP LRDIMM
-
95Y4812
64GB TruDDR4 Memory (4Rx4,1.2V) PC4-17000 CL15 2133MHz LP LRDIMM
-
A5UK
The server supports up to 12 TruDDR Memory DIMMs when one processor is installed and up to 24
DIMMs when two processors are installed. Each processor has four memory channels, and there are three
DIMMs per memory channel (3 DPC). RDIMMs and LRDIMMs are supported, but the mixing of these
different types is not supported. UDIMMs are not supported. DIMMs can be installed individually; however,
instali them in sets of four (one for each of the four memory channels) for performance reasons.
The following rules apply when the memory conf iguration is selected:
• Mixing of different types of DIMMs (RDIMM and LRDIMM) in the same server is not supported.
• The maximum number of supported ranks per channel is eight.
• The maximum quantity of DIMMs that can be installed in the server depends on the number of
CPUs, DIMM rank and operating voltage, as shown in the Maximum quantity' row in the foliowing
table.
• Al¡DIMMs in all CPU memory channels operate at the same speed, which is determined as the
lowest value of the foliowing factors:
o Memory speed that is supported by the specific CPU.
o Lowest maximum operating speed for the sehected memory configuration that depends on
rated speed, as shown in the "Maximum operating speed section in the foliowing table.
The foliowing table shows the maximum memory speeds that are achievable based on the installed
DIMMs and the number of DIMMs per channel. The table also shows the maximum memory capacity at
any speed that is supported by the DIMM and maximum memory capacity at rated DIMM speed. In the
table, cells that are highhighted in gray indicate when the specific combination of DIMM voltage and
number of DIMMs per channel still allows the DIMMs to operate at the rated speed.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
12
Table 9. Maximum memory speeds
RDIMMs
Specífication
LRDIMMs
Single rank
Dual rank
Quad rank
Part numbers
46W0784 (4 GB)
46W0788 (8 GB)
46W0792 (8 GB)
95Y4821 (16 GB)
95Y4808 (32 GB)
46W0800 (32 GB)
95Y4812 (64 GB)
Rated speed
2133 MHz
2133 MHz
2133 MHz
Rated voltage
1.2 V
1.2 V
1.2 V
Operating voltage
Maximum quantity*
1.2 V
1.2 V
1.2 V
24
24
24
Largest DIMM
8 GB
32 GB
64 GB
Rank
Max memory capacity
192 GB
768 GB
1.5 TB
Max memory at rated
speed
128 GB
512 GB
1.0 TB
One DIMM per channel
2133 MHz
2133 MHz
2133 MHz
Two DIMMs per channel
2133 MHz
2133 MHzt
2133 MHzt
Three DIMMs per channel
1600 MHz
1600 MHz
1866 MHzt
Maximum operating speed (MHz)
r
* The maximum quantity that is supported is shown for two processors that are installed. When one
processor is installed, the maximum quantity that is supported is haif of that shown.
t This speed is achieved only when Lenovo TruDDR4 memory is used
The foliowing memory protection technologies are supported:
• ECC
• Memory mirroring
• Memory sparing
If memory mirroring is used, DIMMs must be installed in pairs (minimum of one pair per CPU), and both
DIMMs in a pair must be identical in type and size.
If memory rank sparing is used, a minimurn of one quad-rank DIMM or two single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs
must be installed per populated channel (the DIMMs do not need to be identical). In rank sparing mode,
one rank of a DIMM in each populated channel is reserved as spare memory. The size of a rank vares
depending on the DIMMs that are installed.
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
f
Interna¡ storage
The x240 M5 server has two 2.5-inch hot-swap drive bays that are accessible from the front of the blade
These bays connect to the integrated ServeRAID M1210e 12 Gbps SAS/SATA
server (see guíe
controller.
4
The integrated ServeRAID M1210e controller has the following features:
• Based on the LSI SAS3004 RAID-on-Chip (ROC)
• 12 Gbps controller with four ports
• PCIe x4 Gen 2 host interface
• Two SAS ports routed internally to the two hot-swap drive bays
• Supports RAID-O, RAID-1 and RAID-1 E
• Optional support for SED drives
• Optional support for RAID-5 and 4x 1 .8-inch drive bays
The onboard Ml 21 Oe controller optionally supports self-encrypting drives (SED5) with the addition of
Features on Demand ¡¡cense upgrade, ServeRAID M1200 Series Zero Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade, 00AE930.
This ¡¡cense upgrade enables the LSI MegaRAID SafeStore service which off ers instant secure erase and
local key management for SEDs.
The two 2.5-inch front-accessible drive bays can be replaced with four 1 .8-inch drive bays. two 1 .8-inch
bays replacing each 2.5-inch bay, by using the ServeRAID M1200 RAID 5 Enablement Kit, OOJX141. This
kit contains a replacement backplane to connect the four 1 .8-inch SSDs. The kit also includes ServeRAID
M1200 Zero Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade (Feature on Demand license), which adds RAID 5 support.
The two standard 2.5-inch SAS/SATA drive bays can also be replaced with new PCIe NVMe (Non-Volatile
Memory Express) drives that are directly connected to the PCIe bus of the second processor. Such
connectivity, when combined with SSD drives, ensures the lowest possible latency whíle still using a
standard drive form factor.
2nd processor required: Support for NVMe drives requires a replacement drive backplane for the two
2.5-inch drives plus the second processor must also be installed in the server. The kit containing the
backplane, NVMe Enterprise PCIe SSD Enablement Kit for FIex System x240 M5, is listed in the following
table.
Table 10. Interna¡ storage upgrades
Part number Feature Name and description
code
00AE930
A51-15
ServeRAID Ml 200 Series Zero Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade for Systems-FoD
Maximum
supported
1
OOJX141
A5SF
ServeRAID M1200 RAID 5 Enablement Kit for Fiex System x240 M5
1
OOJX1 77
A5SH
NVMe Enterprise PCIe SSD Enablement Kit for Fiex System x240 M5
1
OOJX142
A5SE
ServeRAID M5215 with 2GB Flash Enablement - Fiex System x240 M5
1
Supported drives are listed in the 1nternal drive options section. The ServeRAID M5215 is described in
the next section.
ServeRAID M5215 SAS/SATA controller
The ServeRAID M5215 SAS/SATA controller isan advanced RAID controller based on the LSI SAS 3108
chipset. The M5215 replaces the onboard SAS controller in the compute node and supports highperformance RAID-0 and RAID-1 to the two interna¡ 2.5-inch drive bays. The M5215 is installed at the front
of the server over the top of the drive bays, as shown in the following figure.
Lenovo Flex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
14
Note: The use of the ServeRAID M5215 requires that the second processor be installed.
Figure 4. ServeRAID M5215 SAS/SATA controller installed in the FIex System x240 M5
The part numbers to order the ServeRAID M5215 controller and feature upgrade are usted in the foUowing
tabla
Table 11. ServeRAID M5215 SAS/SATA controller
Part
number
Feature Name and descnption
code
Maximum
supported
Adapter
OOJX1 42
A5SE
ServeRAID M5215 with 2GB Flash Enablement
¡1
Feature on Demand upgrades
47C871 O
A3Z7
ServeRAID M5200 Series Performance Accelerator for FoD (MegaRAID
FastPath)
1
The ServeRAID M5215 option includes the following components:
• RAID controller
• Flash power module
• Replacement 2-drive backplane
The following figure shows the adapter, flash power module and backplane that are included in the option.
The included backplane replaces the standard backplane that carne with the server. The backplane also
serves as the conduit to route the PCIe signals from the second processor to the RAID controller.
Lenovo Flex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
3
Figure 5. ServeRAlD M5215 SAS/SATA controller
Note: The ServeRAiD M5215 installed in the x240 M5 only supports twa 2.5-inch drives using the supplied
backplane. 1 .8-inch drives are not supported.
The ServeRAiD M5215 SAS/SATA controller has the foliowing features:
• Eightinterna¡ 12 Gbps SAS/SATA ports (also supports 6 Gbps)
•
PU Express 3.0 x8 host interface
• 12 Gbps throughput per port
• LSI SAS3108 12 Gbps RAID on Chip (ROO) controller
• Onboard 2 GB data cache (DDR3 running at 1866 MHz)
• Support for RAID levels O and 1
• Standard flash power module (supercapacitor-based) provides the power capacity needed to offload the cache to flash in the event of a power failure
• Support SAS and SATA HDDs and SSDs
• Support for intermixing SAS and SATA HDDs and SSDs; mixing different types of drives in the same
array (drive group) is not recommended
• Support for self-encrypting drives, SEDs (LSI MegaRAID SafeStore)
• Optional support for SSD performance acceleration with MegaRAID FastPath
• Support for up to 64 virtual disks, up to 128 arrays, and up to 16 virtual disks per array
• Support for logical unit number (LUN) sizes up to 64 TB
• Configurable stripe size up to 1 MB
• Compliant with Disk Data Format (DDF) configuration on disk (COD)
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• MegaRAID Storage Manager management software
The Performance Accelerator upgrade (47C8710), ¡mplemented using the LSI MegaRAID FastPath
software, provides high-performance I/O acceleration for SSD-based virtual drives by using an extremely
low-latency I/O path to increase the maximum I/O per second (IOPS) capability of the controHer. This
feature boosts the performance of applications with a highly random data storage access pattern, such as
transactional databases. Part number 4708710 is a Feature on Demand license.
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
16
Interna¡ drive options
The 2.5-inch drive bays support SAS or SATA HDDs or SATA SSDs. The followfng tables Iist the supported
2.5-inch drive options.
•
•
•
•
•
Table 12: 2.5-nch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS/SATA HDDs
Table 13: 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SAS/SATA HDDs
Table 14: 15-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS/SATA SSDs
Table 15: 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SAS/SATA SSDs
Table 16: 2.5-inch hot-swap NVMe SSDs
Table 12. 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS/SATA HDDs
Maximum
Part number
Description
Feature
supported
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 10K
00WG685
AT89
300GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00WG690
AT8A
600GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00WG695
AT8B
900GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00WG700
AT8C
1 .2TB 10K 1 2Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00NA251
ASBH
900GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
2
00NA241
ASBF
600GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS 512e HDD
2
00NA261
ASBK
1.2TB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
2
00NA271
ASBM
1.8TB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
2
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 15K
00WG660
AT8,4
300GB 15K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00WG665
AT85
600GB 15K 1 2Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
2
00NA221
ASBB
300GB 15K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
2
00NA231
ASBD
600GB 15K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
2
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb NL SAS
00NA491
AT7Z
1 T 7.2K 12Gbps NL SAS 2.5" G3HS HDD
2
00NA496
AT80
2TB 7.2K 1 2Gbps NL SAS 2.5 G3HS 512e HDD
2
2.5-inch hot-swap SED HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 10K
00WG705
AT8D
00WG710
00NA291
300GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS SED
2
AT8E
600GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS SED
2
ASBR
600GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS 512e SED
2
00WG715
AT8F
900GB 10K 12Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS SED
2
00WG720
AT8G
1 .2TB 10K 1 2Gbps SAS 2.5" G3HS SED
2
OONA301
ASBT
1 .2TB 10K 1 2Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS 512e SED
2
1
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
17
Table 13. 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SAS/SATA HDDs
Part number
Feature
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 6
A2XC
90Y8877
A2XD
90Y8872
A282
81Y9650
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 6
O0AJ1 11
1 A4TQ
IA4VB
00AJ300
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 6
OOAJ121
A4TT
]
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 6
00AJ136
A4TW
OOAJ141
A4TX
00NA526
AT81
81Y9722
A1NX
81V9726
A1NZ
81Y9730
IMAV
Description
G SAS 10K
300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5 SFF G2HS HDD
600GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5 SFF G2HS HDD
900GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5 SFF HS HDD
Gb SAS 15K
1146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
1600GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 25 G2HS HDD
Gb NL SAS
500GB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5 G3HS HDD
Gb NL SATA
500GB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5 G3HS HDD
1TB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5' G3HS HDD
2TB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5" G3HS 512e HDD
250GB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5 SFF HS HDD
500GB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5 SFF HS HDD
1 1TB 7.2K 6Gbps NL SATA 2.5" SFF HS HDD
Maximum
supported
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Table 14. 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS/SATA SSDs
Part number
Feature
Description
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 12 Gb SAS - Enterprise Performance (10+ DWPD)
00FN379
AS7C
200GB 12G SAS 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise SSD
00FN389
AS7E
400GB 12G SAS 2.5" MLC G3HS Enterprise SSD
00FN399
AS7G
800GB 12G SAS 2.5" MLC G3HS Enterprise SSD
IOOFN409
AS7J
1.6T8 12G SAS 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise SSD
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
M aximu m
supported
2
2
2
2
18
Table 15. 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SAS/SATA SSDs
aximum
Part number
Feature
Description
Tsupported
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SAS - Enterprise Capacity
00NA671
1 ASW6
3.84TB 6Gb SAS Enterprise Capacity G3HS MLC SSD
2
2.5-inch_hot-swap_SSDs - 6 Gb SAS - Enterprise Performance (10+ DWPD)
00AJ212
A4UB
1 400GB SAS 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise SSO
2
00AJ21 7
A4UC
800GB SAS 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise SSD
2
2.5-inch_hot-swap_SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Enterprise Performance (10+ DWPD)
00YC320
AT9C
Intel S3710 200GB Enterprise Performance SATA G3HS 2.5 SSD
[2
00YC325
AT9D
Intel S3710 400GB Enterprise Performance SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
12
00YC330
AT9E
Intel S3710 800GB Enterprise Performance SATA G3HS 2.5 SSD
L2
2.5-inch_hot-swap_SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Enterprise Mainstream (3-5 DWPD)
00YK212
A(J3C
Intel S3610 480GB Enterprise Mainstream SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
OOYK21 7
AU3D
Intel S3610 800GB Enterprise Mainstream SATA G3HS 2.5« SS
2
00YK222
AU3E
Intel S3610 1.2TB Enterprise Mainstream SATA G3HS 2.5 SSD
2
00YK227
AU3F
Intel S3610 1.6TB Enterprise Mainstream SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00AJ395
A577
120GB SATA 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise Value SSD
2
00AJ400
A578
240GB SATA 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise Value SSD
2
00AJ405
A579
480GB SATA 2.5 MLC G3HS Enterprise Value SSO
2
00AJ410
A57A
800GB SATA 2.5" MLC G3HS Enterprise Value SSD
2
00AJ355
A56Z
120GB SATA 2.5" MLC HS Enterprise Value SSO
2
00AJ360
A570
240GB SATA 2.5 MLC HS Enterprise Value SSD
2
00AJ365
A571
480GB SATA 2.5 MLC HS Enterprise Value SSO
2
00AJ370
A572
800GB SATA 23" MLC HS Enterprise Value SSO
2
2.5-inch_hot-swap_SSOs - 6 Gb SATA - Enterprise Entry (<3 DWPO)
00WG620
AT93
Intel S3510 120GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00WG625
AT94
Intel S3510 240GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00WG630
AT95
Intel S3510 480GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00WG635
AT96
Intel S3510 800GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00YC385
AT8R
120GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSD
2
00YC390
AT8S
240GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
00YC395
AT8T
480GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
OOYC400
AT8U
960GB Enterprise Entry SATA G3HS 2.5 SSO
2
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
19
' 1/
Table 16. 2.5-inch hot-swap NVMe SSDs
Part number
Maximum
supported
Feature Description
2.5-inch_hot-swap_SSDs - NVMe - Enterprise Performance (10+ DWPD)
00YA818
AT7V
00YA821
AT7W
00YA824
AT7X
00YA827
AT7Y
Intel P3700 400GB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Performance PCIe SSD
Intel P3700 800GB NVMe 2.511 G3HS Enterprise Performance PCIe SSD
2
Intel P3700 1 .6TB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Performance PCIe SSD
Intel P3700 2.OTB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterpnse Performance PCIe SSD
2
2
2
2.5-snch_hot-swap_SSDs - NVMe - Enterprise Mainstream (3-5 DWPD)
A5RW
P3600 400GB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Value PCIe SSO
90Y3227
2
A5RX
P3600 800GB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Value PCIe SSD
2
90Y3233
A5RY
P3600 1 .6TB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Value PCIe SSD
2
90Y3236
A5RZ
P3600 2.OTB NVMe 2.5 G3HS Enterprise Value PCIe SSO
2
90Y3230
The supported 1 .8-inch SSDs are Hsted in the following table. The use of 1 .8-inch drives requires the
ServeRAID M1200 RAID 5 Enablement Kit, OOJX141. The ServeRAiD M5215 is not supported.
Table 17. 1 .8-inch SSDs
Part number
Feature
Description
Maximum
supported
1 .8-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Enterprise Mainstream (3-5 DWPD)
00AJ335
A56V
120GB SATA 1.811 MLC Enterprise Value SSD
4
A56W
240GB SATA 1.811 MLC Enterprise Value SSD
4
00AJ345
A56X
480GB SATA 1.8 MLC Enterprise Value SSD
4
00AJ350
A56Y
800GB SATA 1.8 MLC Enterprise Value SSO
4
00AJ340
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
20
Fiex System Storage Expansion Node
The x240 M5 supports the attachment of the Fiex System Storage Expansion Node. The Fiex System
Storage Expansion Nade provides the ability to attach another 12 hot-swap 2.5-inch HDDs or SSDs Iocafly
to the attached compute nade. The Storage Expansion Node provides storage capacity for Network Attach
Storage (NAS) workloads, which provides flexible storage to match capacity, performance, and reliability
needs.
The foliowing figure shows the Hex System Storage Expansion Node attached to a compute nade.
Figure 6. FIex System Storage Expansion Nade (right) attached to the x240 M5 (Ieft)
The ordering information for the Storage Expansion Nade is shown in the following table.
Table 18. Ordering part number and feature code
Part number
Feature code
Description
Maximum
supported
68Y8588
A3JF
FIex System Storage Expansion Nade
1
The Storage Expansion Nade has the foliowing featu res:
• Con nects directly to supported compute nades via a PCIe 3.0 interface to the compute node's
expansion cannector (see the internal view in the Locations of key components and connectors
sectian).
• Supports 12 hot-swap 2.5-inch drives, accessible via a sliding tray.
• Supports 6 Gbps SAS and SATA drives, both HDDs and SSDs.
• Based on an LSI SAS2208 6 Gbps RAID on Chip (ROC) controller.
• Supports RAID-O, 1, and 10 as standard. JBOD also supported. Optional RAID-5 and 50 with cache
upgrade.
• Optional 512 MB or 1 GB cache with cache-to-flash super capacitar off oad and RAID 5/50 suppart.
Notes:
• The use of the Storage Expansion Node requires that the x240 M5 Compute Nade have both
processors installed.
• The Storage Expansion Node uses a different hot-swap drive tray (G2HS) to the x240 M5 (G3HS).
As a result, the SEN drives and x240 M5 drives not interchangable.
For more information, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide: http://Ienovopress.um/tipsO914
Lenovo Fiex System x240 MS (E5-2600 v3)
21
C 3 05
Internal tape drives
The server does not support an internal tape drive. However, it can be attached to externa¡ tape drives by
using Fibre Channel connectivity.
Optical drives
The server does not support an internal optical drive option, however, you can connect an externa¡ USB
optical drive. See http://supportienovo.cornien!docurnents/pdQl 1281 for information about available
externa¡ optical drives from Lenovo. Alternatively, use the remote media feature of the lMMv2 and the
Chassis Management Module.
Note: The USB port on the compute nodes supplies up to 0.5 A at 5 V. For devices that require more
power, another power source is required.
EN41 72 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter
Sorne models of the x240 M5 (those with a model of the form 9532-x4x) include the Fiex System EN41 72
2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter installed in slot 1. Table 2 lists the modeis with this adapter standard. These
models require that a compatible Ethernet switch be installed in I/O module bays 1 and 2 of the chassis.
The EN41 72 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter includes the following features:
• Two-port 10 Gb Ethernet adapter
• Single ASIC controller that uses the QLogic BCM57840 ASIC
• PC¡ Express 3.0 x8 host interface
• B and 10 Gb auto- negotiation)
• Full line-rate performance
• Supports vNlC - Switch Independent Mode
For more ¡nformation about this adapter, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide, available from:
http://Ienovopress.com/tipsl 087
CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
Sorne modeis of the x240 M5 (those with a model of the forrn 9532-x6x) include the FIex System CN4052
2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter installed in slot 1. Table 2 lists the models with this adapter standard.
These modeis require that a compatible Ethernet switch be installed in I/O module bays 1 and 2 of the
chassis.
The CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter includes the foliowing features:
• Two-port 10 Gb Ethernet adapter,
• Optional support for FCoE and ¡SCSI via an Features on Demand license upgrade.
• Single ASIC controller that uses the Emutex XE1 04 design.
• PCIe Express 3.0 x8 host interface (8 GT/s).
• Connection to 1 Gb or 10 Gb data center ¡nf rastructure (1 Gb and 10 Gb auto- negotiation).
• Fui¡ line-rate performance.
• Supports NIC virtualization (vNIC) up to four virtual ports per physical port. Supports Virtual Fabric
Mode, Switch Independent Mode, and Unified Fabric Port Mode.
For more information about this adapter, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide, avallable from:
http://lenovopress.com/tipsl 164
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
22
I/O expansion options
The x240 M5 has two I/O expansion connectors for attaching VO adapter cards. There is a third expansion
connector that is designed to connect an expansion node, such as the PCIe Expansion Node. The I/O
expansion connectors are a high-density, 216-pin PCIe connector. Installing I/O adapter cards aliows the
server to connect with switch modules in the Fiex System Enterprise Chassis. Each siot has a PC¡ Express
3.0 xl 6 host interface and both slots support the same form-factor adapters.
The following figure shows the location of the I/O expansion connectors.
Figure 7. Location of the I/O adapter slots in the Flex System x240 M5 Compute Node
Ah/O adapters are the same shape and can be used in any available slot.. A compatible switch or passthrough module must be installed in the corresponding I/O bays in the chassis, as indicated in the
following table. Installing two switches means that all ports of the adapter are enabled, which improves
performance and network availability.
Table 19. Adapter to I/O bay correspondence
I/O adapter siot in the server
Port on the adapter
Corresponding I/O module bay in the chassis
SIot 1
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)
Module bay 1
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port 2
Module bay 4
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)
Module bay 3
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)
Module bay 4
SIot 2
The following figure shows the location of the switch bays in the FIex System Enterprise Chassis.
Len ovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
23
OC33b
Figure 8. Location of the switch bays in the Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
The following figure shows how two-port adapters are con nected to switches that are installed in the
chassis.
Node
bay 1 Al
A2 E
Node
Al
bay2
Switch
bay
Switch
bay3
A2
Node
bays
13114 [—
A2 E
EI
fI
E
Switch
bay2
Switch
bay4
Figure 9. Logical layout of the interconnects between I/O adapters and I/O modules
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
24
Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
The x240 M5 supports the attachment of the FIex System PCIe Expansion Node. By using the Fiex System
PCIe Expansion Node, more PCI Express cards can be attached, such as High IOPS SSD adatpers, fabric
mezzanine cards, and next-generation graphics processing units (GPU) to supported Fiex System
compute nodes. This capability is ideal for many applications that require high performance I/O, special
telecommunications network interfaces, or hardware acceleration that uses a PC¡ Express card. The PCIe
Expansion Node supports up to four PCIe 2.0 adapters and two more Fiex System expansion adapters.
The PCIe Expansion Node is attached to a Fiex System compute node, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10. PCIe Expansion Node attached to the x240 M5
The ordering information for the PCIe Expansion Node is shown in the following table.
Table 20. Ordering part number and feature code
Part number
Feature code
Description
Maximum supported
81 Y8983
Al BV
Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
1
The PCIe Expansion Node has the following features:
• Support for up to four standard PCIe 2.0 adapters:
o Two PCIe 2.0 xl 6 slots that support fuIl-length, full-height adapters
o Two PCIe 2.0 xB slots that support half-Iength, Iow-profile adapters
• Support for PCIe 3.0 adapters by operating them in PCIe 2.0 mode
• Support for one full-Iength, full-height double-wide adapter (that uses the space of the two fuliIength, fuIl-height adapter slots)
• Support for PCIe cards with higher power requirements; a single adapter card (up to 225W) or to
two adapters (up to 150W each)
• Two FIex System I/O expansion connectors to further expand the I/O capability of the attached
compute node
Note: The use of the PCIe Expansion Node requires that the x240 M5 Compute Node have both
processors installed.
For more inforrnation, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide: http://lenovopress.oT1/tips0906
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
25
(irc3o7
Network adapters
The foUowing table lists the supported network adapters and upgrades. Adapters can be installed in either
slot. However, compatible switches must be installed in the corresponding bays of the chassis. AH
adapters can also be instaUed in the PCIe Expansion Node. The 'Maximum supported' column in the table
indicates the number of adapter that can be installed in the server and in the PCIe Expansion Node (PEN).
Table 21. Network adapters
Part
number
Feature Description
code
Number Maximum
of ports supported
(x240 M5 /
PEN)
40 Gb Ethernet
90Y3482
A3HK1Fiex System EN6132 2-port 40Gb Ethernet Adapter
2
[2_/ None
10 Gb Ethernet
88Y5920
A4K3
Fiex System CN4022 2-port 10Gb Converged Adapter
2
2/2
00AG540
ATBT
Fiex System CN4052S 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
2
2/2
OOJY800
A5RP
FIex System CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
2
2/2
00JY804
A5RV
Flex System CN4052 Virtual Fabric Adapter SW Upgrade
(F0D)
(License to enable FCoE and ¡SCSI Qn 00AG540 or OOJY800)
License
2/2
00AG590
ATBS
FIex System CN4054S 4-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
4
2/2
00AG594
ATBU
FIex System CN4054S 4-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter SW
Upgrade
(License to enable FCoE and ¡SCSI Qn 00AG590)
License
2/2
00Y3306*
A4K2*
Fiex System CN4054R 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
4
2/2
90Y3558
Al RO
FIex System CN4054 Virtual Fabric Adapter (SW Upgrade)
(License to enable FCoE and ¡SCSI on 00Y3306)
License
2/2
94Y5160
A4R6
FIex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
8
2/2
94Y5164
A4R9
Fiex System CN4058S Virtual Fabric Adapter SW Upgrade
(F0D)
(License to enable FCoE and ¡SCSI Qn 94Y5160)
License
2/2
90Y3466
Al QY
Fiex System EN41 32 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter
2
2/2
00AG530
A5RN
FIex System EN41 72 2-port 10Gb Ethernet Adapter
2
2/2
FIex System EN2024 4-port 1 Gb Ethernet Adapter
14
12/2
1 Gb Ethernet
49Y7900
1 Al OY
InfiniBand
System IB6132 2-port FDR InfiniBand Adapter
12/2
2
f
* Withdrawn from marketing
** For x4x and x6x models (where an Ethernet adapter is standard in slot 1), only one extra adapter can be
installed in the compute node.
90Y3454
A1QZ
For more information about adapter-to-switch compatibility, see the Fiex System lnteroperability Guide,
which is available at this web page:
http://Ienovopress.com/fsig
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
26
Storage host bus adapters
The foliowing table lists storage HBAs that are supported by the x240 M5 server, both internally in the
compute nade and in the PCIe Expansion Node.
Table 22. Storage adapters
Part number
Feature
code
Description
Number
of ports
Maximum
supported
(x240 M5* / PEN)
A45R
FIex System FC5052 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
2
1/1
1/1
Fibre Channel
95Y2386
95Y2391
A45S
FIex System FC5054 4-port 16Gb FC Adapter
4
69Y1942
Al BQ
FIex System FC51 72 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
2
1/1
69Y1 938
Al BM
Fiex System FC31 72 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
2
1/1
95Y2375
A2N5
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
2
1/1
For more information about adapter-to-switch compatibility, see the FIex System lnteroperability Guide,
which is available at this web page:
http://lenovopress.com/fsig
PCIe Flash Storage adapters
The compute nade supports the PCIe Flash Storage Adapters that are usted in the foliowing table.
Notes: These adapters are ¡nstalled in an attached PCIe Expansion Nade.
Table 23. sso adapters
Description
Maximum
supported
OOYA800
Feature
code
AT7N*
¡03 1 .25TB Enterprise Mainstream Flash Adapter
4
00YA803
AT7P*
io3 1 .6TB Enterprise Mainstream Flash Adapter
4
00YA806
AT7Q*
io3 3.2TB Enterprise Mainstream Flash Adapter
4
00YA809
AT7R*
¡o3 6.4TB Enterprise Mainstream Flash Adapter
2
00YA812
AT7L
P3700 1.6TB NVMe Enterprise Performance Flash Adapter
4
00YA815
AT7M
P3700 2.0TB NVMe Enterprise Performance Flash Adapter
4
00AE995
ARYP
1000GB Enterprise io3 Flash Adapter for System x
4
00AE998
ARYQ
1300GB Enterprise ¡o3 Flash Adapter for System x
4
OOJY001
ARYR
2600GB Enterprise 1o3 Flash Adapter for System x
4
Part number
* These adapters cannot be ordered from the factory installed in the PCIe Expansion Node. Instead, arder
the adapters separately using the option part numbers.
For more information about these adapters, see the Lenovo Press Product Guides in the PCIe SSD
Adapter categary:
nttps:1'/lenovopress.comi servers/optonsissdadapteí
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
27
3 ¿J
GPU adapters
The compute node supports the GPU adapters that are listed in the foflowing table.
Note: These adapters are instaled in an attached PCIe Expansion Node.
Table 24. GPU adapters
Part number
Feature code
Description
Maximum
supported
94Y5960
Al R4
NVIDIA Tesla M2090 (fuII-height adapter)
1
47C2120
A4F1
NVIDIA GRID Kl for Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
1ff
47C2121
A4F2
NVIDIA GRID K2 for Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
1ff
47C2137
A5HD
NVIDIA Tesla K40 for Fiex System PCIe Expansion Node
1ff
147C2122
A4F4
Intel Xeon Phi 5110P for FIex System PCIe Expansion Node
1ff
1
1:
** If the NVIDIA Tesla M2090 is installed in the Expansion Node, then an adapter cannot be installed in the
other fufl-height sot. If installed, only this adapter is supported in the expansion node. No other PCIe
adapters may be selected.
t The Kl, K2, K20, K40 and 511 OP adapters are double-wide cards and occupy the two fui¡-height PCIe
sots. If installed, the adjacent stot is unavailable, however adapters can be installed in the two Iow-profile
sots.
:1: NVIDIA GRID Kx and Testa Kxx GPUs supported only when the x240 M5 has 1 TB or less memory
installed.
Power supplies
Server power is derived from the power supplies that are installed in the chassis. There are no server
options regarding power supplies.
Integrated virtualization
The x240 M5 supports the VMware vSphere (ESA) hypervisor on one or two SD cards with the optional SD
Media Adapter for System x. This adapter is installed in a dedicated siot beneath I/O Adapter slot 1, as
shown in the foliowing figure.
Figure 11. SD Media Adapter for System x
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
28
When only one SD card is installed in the adapter, you can create up to 16 volumes, each of which is
presented to UEFI as a bootable device. When two SO Media cards are inserted, volumes can be mirrored
(RAID-1) across both cards, up to a total of eight mirrored volumes. The use of mirrored volumes improves
system availability because the server remains operational, even if one SD card fails. The RAID
functionatity is handled internally by the SD Media Adapter.
The foliowing table shows the available options. The table also indicates whether the option includes the
SD Media RAID Adapter and how many SD cards are included.
Table 25. Virtualization options
Part
number
Feature
Descnption
code
Includes
Adapter
00ML706
A5TJ
SD Media Adapter for Systems x
(Option 00ML706 includes 2 blank 32GB SD cards)
Ves
Includes
Media
Yes (2)*
OOML700
None**
AS2V
Blank 32GB SD Media for System x
No
Yes (1)
ASCG
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.1 U2 (1 SD
Media)
Ves
Ves (1)
None**
AS4B
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.1 U2 (2 SD
Media, RAIDed)
Ves
Yes (2)
None"
ASCH
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.5 U2 (1 SD
Media)
Ves
Ves (1)
None**
AS4C
RAID Adapter for SO Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.5 U2 (2 SD
Media, RAIDed)
Ves
Ves (2)
None**
ATZJ
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.5 U3B (1 SD
Medía)
Ves
Yes (1)
None**
ATZK
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 5.5 U3B (2 SD
Media,RAIDed)
Ves
Ves (2)
None**
ATSA
RAID Adapter for SO Media w/ VMware ESXi 6.0 Ui A (1 SD
Media)
Yes
Ves (1)
None**
ATZM
RAID Adapter for SO Media w/ VMware ESXi 6.0 U2 (1 SD
Media)
Ves
Ves (1)
None*
ATZL
RAID Adapter for SD Media w/ VMware ESXi 6.0 U2 (2 SD
Media, RAIDed)
Ves
Ves (2)
None"
ATS9
RAID Adapter for SD Media wNMware ESXi 6.0 U1A (2 SO
Media, RAIDed)
Ves
Yes (2)
* Option 00ML706 includes two 32GB SD cards; however, for CTO orders, feature code A5TJ does not
include SD media and the 32GB cards and VMware vSphere preload must be selected separately.
** CTO only.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
29
_..U909
Light path diagnostics
For quick problem determination when it is physically at the server, the x240 M5 off ers the foliowing threestep guided path:
1. The Fault LED on the front panel.
2. The light path diagnostics panel, as shown in the foliowing figure.
3. LEDs next to key components on the system board.
The x240 M5 light path diagnostics panel is inside the server between the two processors, as shown in the
foliowing figure.
Figure 12. Location of x240 M5 light path diagnostics panel
To illuminate the light path diagnostics LEDs, power off the compute node, sude it out of the chassis, and
press the power button. The power button doubies as the light path diagnostics reminder button when the
server is removed from the chassis.
The meanings of the LEDs in the light path diagnostics panel are usted in the foliowing table.
Table 26. Light path diagnostic panel LEDs
LED
Meaning
LP
The light path diagnostics panel is operational.
SYS
BRD
A system board error is detected.
NMI
A non-maskable interrupt (NMI) occurred.
SEE
EXP
A fault is detected in the adjacent expansion unit (if installed).
MIS
A mismatch occurred between the processors, DIMMs, or HDDs within the configuration as reported by
POST.
TEMP
An over-temperature condition occurred that was critical enough to shut down the server.
MEM
A memory fault occurred. The corresponding DIMM error LEDs on the system board are also lit.
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
30
Remote management
The server contains an Integrated Management Module II (IMM2), which interfaces with the advanced
management module in the chassis. The combination of these modules provides advanced serviceprocessor control, monitoring, and an alerting function. If an environmental condition exceeds a threshold
or if a system component fails, LEDs an the system board are lit to help you diagnose the problem, the
error is recorded in the event Iog, and you are alerted to the problem. A virtual presence capability comes
standard for remote server management.
Remote server management is provided through the following industry-standard interfaces:
• Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Version 20
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Version 3
• Common Information Model (CIM)
o
Web browser
The server also supports virtual media and remote control features, which provide the following functions:
• Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1 600x1 200 at 75 Hz with up to 23 bits per
pixel, regardless of the system state.
• Remotely accessing the server by using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client.
• Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive Qn a remote client, and mapping
¡SO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for use by the server.
• Uploading a diskette image to the IMM2 memory and mapping it to the server as a virtual drive.
• Capturing blue-screen errors.
Supported operating systems
The server supports the following operating systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Server x64 Edition
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 11 for AMD64/EM64T
SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 11 with Xen for AMD64/EM64T
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12
VMware vSphere 5.1 (ESA)
VMware vSphere 5.5 (ESA)
VMware vSphere 6.0 (ESXi)
For more information about the specific versions and service leveis that are supported, see the Operating
System lnteroperability Guide: https:/Ilenovopress.com/osig
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
31
Physical specifications
The server features the following dimensions and weight (approximate):
•
•
•
•
Height: 51 mm (2.0 in)
Depth: 493 mm (19.4 in)
Width: 215 mm (8.5 in)
Maximum weight: 7.1 kg (15.6 lb)
The server features the following shipping dimensions and weight (approximate):
•
•
•
•
Height: 197 mm (7.8 in)
Depth: 603 mm (23.7 in)
Width: 430 mm (16.9 in)
Weight: 8 kg (17.6 Ib)
Supported environment
The Fiex System x240 M5 compute node complies with ASHRAE Class A3 specifications.
The following Power on operating environment is supported:
•
•
•
•
•
Temperature: 5 -40 °C (41 - 104 °F)
Humidfty, non-condensing: -12 oc dew point (10.4 °F) and 8-85% relative humidity
Maximum dew point: 24 °c (75 °F)
Maximum altitude: 3048 m (10,000 ft)
Maximum rate of temperature change: 5 °C/hr (41 °F/hr)
The following Power aif operating environment is supported:
• Temperature: 5 - 45 oc (41 - 113 °F)
• Relative humidity: 8 - 85%
• Maximum dew point: 27 OC (80.6 °F)
The following Storage (non-operating) operating environment is supported:
•
•
•
•
Temperature: 1 - 60 oc (33.8 - 140 019
Altitude: 3050 m (10,006 ft)
Relative humidity: 5 - 80%
Maximum dew point: 29 oc (84.2°F)
The following Shipment (non-operating) environment is supported:
•
•
•
•
Temperature: -40 - 60 00 (-40 - 140 019
Altitude: 10,700 m (35,105 ft)
Relative humidity: 5 - 100%
Maximum dew point: 29 oc (84.2 °1)
Warranty options
The system has a three-year warranty with 24x7 standard cal¡ center support and 9x5 Next Business Day
onsite coverage. Also availabie are Lenovo Services warranty maintenance upgrades and post-warranty
maintenance agreements, with a weII-defined scope of services, including service hours, response time,
term of service, and service agreement terms and conditions.
Lenovo warranty service upgrade afferings are country-specific. Not alI warranty service upgrades are
available in every country. For more information about Lenovo warranty service upgrade offerings that are
availabie in your country, visit the Lenovo Quick Pick website:
http://ienovoquickpick.corn
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
32
The following table explains warranty service definitions in more detail.
Table 27. Warranty service definitions
Term
Description
On-site
service
A service technician will arrive at the client's location for equipment service.
24x7x2
hour
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within two hours after remote
problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service around the clock, every day, including
Lenovo holidays.
24x7x4
hour
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within four hours after remote
problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service around the clock, every day, including
Lenovo holidays.
9x5x4 hour A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within four business hours after
remote problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service 8:00 am - 5:00 pm in the
client's local time zone, Monday-Friday, excluding Lenovo holidays. For example, if a customer
reports an incident at 3:00 pm on Friday, the technician will arrive by 10:00 am the following Monday.
9x5 next
business
day
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location on the business day after remote
problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service 8:00 am - 5:00 pm in the client's local
time zone, Monday - Friday, excluding Lenovo holidays. Calls received after 4:00 pm local time
require an extra business day for service dispatch. Next business day service is not guaranteed.
Committed Problems receive priority handling so that repairs are completed within the committed time of 6, 8, or
24 hours. Lenovo provides service 24 hours/day, every day, including Lenovo holidays.
Repair
The following Lenovo warranty service upgrades are available:
• Warranty and maintenance service upgrades:
o Three, four, or five years of 9x5 or 24x7 service coverage
o Onsite response from next business day to 2 or 4 hours
o Committed repair service
o Warranty extension of up to 5 years
o Post warranty extensions
• Committed Repair Service
Committed Repair Services enhances the leve¡ of Warranty Service Upgrade or Post
Warranty/Maintenance Service offering associated with the selected systems. Off erings vary and
are available in select countries.
o Priority handling to meet defined time frames to restore the failing machine to good working
condition
o Committed repair service levels are measured within the following coverage hours:
• 24x7x6: Service performed 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, within 6 hours
u 24x7x8: Service performed 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, within 8 hours
• 24x7x24: Service performed 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, within 24 hours
Hard Disk Drive Retention
Lenovo's Hard Disk Drive Retention (HDDR) service is a multi-drive hard drive retention offering that
ensures your data is always under your control, regardless of the number of hard drives that are
installed in your Lenovo server. In the unhikely event of a hard drive failure, you retain possession of
your hard drive while Lenovo replaces the failed drive part. Your data stays safely on your premises,
in your hands. The Hard Drive Retention service can be purchased in convenient bundies with our
warranty upgrades and extensions.
Lenovo Flex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
33
UrC3iI
• MicrocodeSupport
Keeping microcode current helps prevent hardware failures and security exposure. There are two
leveis of service: analysis of the installed base and analysis and update where required. Offerings
vary by country and can be bundied with other warranty upgrades and extensions.
• Remote Technical Support Services (RTS)
RTS provides comprehensive technical cali center support for covered servers, storage, operating
systems, and applications. Providing a single source for support of hardware and software issues,
RTS can reduce problem resolution time, decreasing the cost to address technical problems and
increasing uptime. Offerings are available for Windows, Linux, IBM Systems Director, VMware,
Microsoft business applications, and Lenovo System x storage devices, and IBM OEM storage
devices.
Regulatory compliance
The server conforms to the foliowing standards:
o
ASHRAE Class A3
• FCC - Verified to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Class A
• Canada ICES-004, issue 3 Class A
• ULJIEC 60950-1
• CSA 022.2 No. 60950-1
• Japan VCCI, Class A
• lEO 60950-1 (OB Certificate and CB Test Report)
• Taiwan BSMI ONS1 3438, Class A; ONS14336
• Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 22, Class A
• Korea KN22, Class A, KN24
• lEO 60950-1 (OB Certificate and OB Test Report)
• CE Mark (EN55022 Class A, EN60950-1, EN55024, EN61 000-3-2,
• EN61000-3-3)
• TUV-GS (EN60950-1/IEO 60950-1, EK1 -ITB2000)
Lenovo Fiex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
34
Lenovo Financia¡ Services
Lenovo Financia¡ Services reinforces Lenovo's commitment to deliver pioneering products and services
that are recognized for their quality, excellence, and trustworthiness. Lenovo Financial Services offers
financing solutions and services that complement your technology solution anywhere in the world.
We are dedicated to delivering a positive finance experience for customers like you who want to maximize
your purchase power by obtaining the technology you need today, protect against technology
obsolescence, and preserve your capital for other uses.
We work with businesses, non-profit organizations, governments and educational institutions to finance
their entire technology solution. We focus on making it easy to do business with us. Our highly
experienced team of finance professionals operates in a work culture that emphasizes the importance of
providing outstanding customer service. Our systems, processes and flexible policies support our goal of
providing customers with a positive experience.
We finance your entire solution. Unlike others, we allow you to bundle everything you need from hardware
and software to service contracts, installation costs, training fees, and sales tax. If you decide weeks or
months later to add to your solution, we can consolidate everything into a single invoice.
Our Premier Client services provide large accounts with special handling services to ensure these complex
transactions are serviced properly. As a premier client, you have a dedicated finance specialist who
manages your account through its life, from first invoice through asset return or purchase. This specialist
develops an in-depth understanding of your invoice and payment requirements. For you, this dedication
provides a high-quality, easy, and positive financing experience.
For your reg ion specific off ers please ask your Lenovo sales representative or your technology provider
about the use of Lenovo Financia¡ Services. For more information, see the foflowing Lenovo website:
http://www.lenovofs.com
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
35
U•C3j2
Related publications and Iinks
For more informaton, see the foHowirig resources:
• Lenovo Press Product Guídes for Fiex System servers and options
http://Ienovopress.com/flexsysterr
• US Announcement Letter
http:/Jibm.com/common/ssi/cg-bn/ssialias?infotyPe=dd&SUbtYPeCa&&htmlfid897/ENUS1 14-140
• Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Node product page
http://shop.lenovo.com/us/en/systems/servers/blades/flex-system/compute-flodes/x240-m5/
• Fiex System Information Center
http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/informationhindex.jsp
• Fiex System x240 M5 Compute Node Installation and Service Guide
http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/information/topic/cornJenovo.acc.9532.doc/
printable_doc.html
• ServerProven for Fiex System
http://www.lenovo.com/us/en/serverproven/flexsystem.shtml
• ServerProven hardware compatibility page for the x240 M5
nttp://www.Ienovo.com/us/en/serverproven/flexí9532.shtm
• ServerProven compatibility page for operating system support
http-/Iwww.lenovo.com/us/en,/serverproven/nos/flexmatrix.shtmi
• Fiex System Interoperability Guide
http://Ienovopress.com/fsig
• Configuration and Option Guide
http://www.ibm.com/systems/xbc/cog/
• xREF - System x Reference
http://Ienovopress.com/xref
• System x Support Portal
http:Jiibm.com/support/entryiportaU
• IBM System Storage® Interoperation Center
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic
Related product families
Product families related to this document are the foliowing:
• Blade Servers
Lenovo Ff ex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
36
Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in al¡ countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product,
program, or servíce may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used ¡nstead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and
verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent
applications covering subject matter described in this document. The fumishing of this document does not give you
any ¡¡cense to these patents. You can send ¡¡cense inquines, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS lS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are peniodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) descnibed in this publication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other ¡¡fe support applications
where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express
or implied license or indemnity under the inteltectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. Al¡ information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result
obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply
in any way it betieves appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein
was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Sorne measurements may have been rnade on devetoprnent-Ievel systems and there is no
guarantee that these measurernents will be the same on generalty available systems. Furthermore, sorne
measunements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual resutts may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific envinonment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2016. Al¡rights reserved.
This document, TIPS1 199, was created or updated on September 13, 2016.
Send us your comments in one of the fohlowing ways:
• Use the online Contact us review form found at:
http://lenovopress.com/TIPS1 199
• Send your comments in an e-mail to:
comments@lenovopress.com
This document is available onhine at http://lenovopress.comfflPS1199.
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
37
OC313
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, and For Those Who Do are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the
United States, other countries, or both. A current list of Lenovo trademarks is available on the Web at
http://wwwJenovo.corniIegaicopytrade.h1mi.
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
Lenovo ServicesTM
Lenovo XCIarityTM
TopSeIlerTM
ServerProven®
System x®
Fiex SystemTM
ServeRAIDTM
ToolsCenterTM
TruDDR4TM
vNICTM
The foliowing terms are trademarks of other companies:
Intel® and Intel Xeon® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in
the United States and other countries.
Linux® is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft® and Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Lenovo FIex System x240 M5 (E5-2600 v3)
38
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric
Adapters
Product Guide
The Fiex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter and CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric
Adapter are part of the VFA5 family of System x and Fiex System adapters. These adapter supports up to
four virtual NIC (vNIC) devices per port (for a total of 32 for the CN4058S and 8 for the CN4052), where
each physical 10 GbE port can be divided into four virtual ports with flexible bandwidth allocation. These
adapters also feature RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) capability, and support ¡SCSI, and FCoE
protocois with the addition of a Features on Demand (FoD) ¡¡cense upgrade.
With hardware protocol offloads for TCP/IP and FCoE, the CN4058S and CN4052 provides maximum
bandwidth with minimum use of CPU resources and enables more VMs per server, which provides greater
cost saving to optimize return on investment. With up to eight ports, the CN4058S in particular makes full
use of the capabilities of all supported Ethernet switches in the FIex System portfolio.
Figure 1 shows the CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter.
Figure 1. Flex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
Did you know?
This CN4058S is based en industry-standard PCIe 3.0 architecture and offers the flexibility to operate as a
Virtual NIC Fabric Adapter or as a 8-port 10 Gb or 1 Gb Ethernet device. Because this adapter supports up
to 32 virtual NlCs on a single adapter, you see virtualization-related benefits, such as cost, power and
cooling, and data center footprint by deploying less hardware. Servers, such as the new x240 M5
Compute Node, support up to two of these adapters for a total of 64 virtual NICs per system.
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
OV t.1314
Part number ¡nformation
Table 1. Ordering part numbers and feature codes
Option
Feature Code
Description
94Y5160 A4R6
Fiex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
94Y5164 A4R9
Flex System CN4058S Virtual Fabric Adapter SW Upgrade (F0D)
OOJY800
A5RP
FIex System CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
00JY804
A5RV
FIex System CN4052 Virtual Fabric Adapter SW Upgrade (F0D)
Features
The CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter and CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter, which
are part of the VFA5 family of System x and Fiex System adapters, reduce cost by enabling a converged
infrastructure and improves performance with powerful offload engines. The adapters have the foliowing
features and benefits:
• Multi-protocol support for 10 GbE
The adapters offers two (CN4052) or eight (CN4058S) 10 GbE connections and are cost- and
performance-optimized for integrated and converged infrastructures. They offer a "triple play" of
converged data, storage, and low latency RDMA networking on a common Ethernet fabric. The
adapters provides customers with a flexible storage protocol option for running heterogeneous
workloads on their increasingly converged infrastructures.
• Virtual NIC emulation
The Emulex VFA5 family supports three NIC virtualization modes, right out of the box: Virtual Fabric
mode (vNIC1), switch independent mode (vNIC2), and Universal Fabric Port (UFP). With NIC
virtualization, each of the two physical ports on the adapter can be logically conf igured to emulate
up to four virtual NIC (vNIC) functions with user-definable bandwidth settings. Additionally, each
physical port can simultaneously support a storage protocol (FC0E or SCSI).
• Fuil hardware storage offloads
These adapters support an optional FCoE hardware offload engine, which is enabled via Lenovo
Features on Demand (F0D). This offload engine accelerates storage protocol processing and
delivers up to 1.5 million I/O operations per second (IOPS), which enables the server's processing
resources to focus on applications and improves the server's performance.
• Power savings
When compared with previous generation Emulex VFA3 adapters, the Emulex VFA5 adapters can
save up to 50 watts per server, reducing energy and cooling OPEX through improved storage
offloads.
• Lenovo Features on Demand (FoD)
The adapters use F0D software activation technology. F0D enables the adapters to be initially
deployed as a low-cost Ethernet NICs, and then later upgraded in the field to support FCoE or
SCSI hardware offload.
• Emulex Virtual Network Acceleration (VNeX) technology support
Emulex VNeX supports Microsoft supported network virtualization by using generic routing
encapsulation (NVGRE) and VMware-supported virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN). These technologies
create more logical LANs for traffic isolation that are needed by cloud architectures. Because these
protocols increase the processing burden on the server's processor, the adapters have an offload
engine that is designed specifically for processing these tags. The resulting benefit is that cloud
providers can use the benefits of VxLAN/NVGRE while not being penalized with a reduction in the
server's performance.
• Advanced RDMA capabilities
OC315
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
2
ROMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) delivers application and storage acceleration through faster
I/O operations. It is best suited for environments, such as Microsoft SMB Direct in a Windows
Server 2012 R2 environment. It can also support Linux NFS protocols.
With RoCE, the VFA5 adapter helps accelerate workloads in the following ways:
• Capability to deliver a 4x boost in small packet network performance vs. previous generation
adapters, which is critica¡ for transaction-heavy workloads
• Desktop-like experiences for VDI with up to 1.5 million FCoE or SCSI IOPS
• Ability to scale Microsoft SOL Server, Exchange, and SharePoint using SMB Oirect
optimized with RoCE
• More VDI desktops/server due to up to 18% higher CPU effectiveness (the percentage of
server CPU utilization for every 1 Mbps I/O throughput)
• Superior application performance for VMware hybrid cloud workloads due to up to 129%
higher I/O throughput compared to adapters without offload
Deploy faster and manage Iess when Virtual Fabric adapters (VFAs) and Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) are combined that are developed by Emulex
VFAs and HBAs that are developed by Emulex use the same installation and configuration process,
which streamlines the effort to get your server running and saves you valuable time. They also use
the same Fibre Channel drivers, which reduces time to qualify and manage storage connectivity.
With Emulex's OneCommand Manager, you can manage VFAs and HBAs that are developed by
Emulex through the data center from a single console.
Specifications
The FIex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter features the following specifications:
• Eight-port 10 Gb Ethernet adapter
• Dual-ASIC controller using the Emulex XE1 04 design
• Two PCIe Express 3.0 x8 host interfaces (8 GT/s)
• MSI-X support
• Fabric Manager support
• Power consumption: 25 W maximum
The CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter has these specifications:
• Two-port 10 Gb Ethernet adapter
• Single-ASIC controller using the Emulex XE104 design
• One PCIe Express 3.0 x8 host interface (8 GT/s)
• MSI-X support
• Fabric Manager support
• Power consumption: 25 W maximum
Ethernet features
The following Ethernet features are included in both adapters:
• lPv4/IPv6 TCP and UDP checksum offload, Large Send Offload (LSO), Large Receive Offload,
Receive Side Scaling (RSS), TCP Segmentation Offload (TSO)
• VLAN insertion and extraction
• Jumbo frames up to 9216 Bytes
• Priority FIow Control (PFC) for Ethernet traffic
• Interrupt coalescing
OC3i
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
• Load balancing and failover support, including adapter fault tolerance (AFT), switch fault tolerance
(SFT), adaptive load balancing (ALB), link aggregation, and IEEE 802.1AX
• 4 PCIe Physical Functions (PFs) per port
• 31 PCIe Virtual Functions (VFs) for NIC per port configurable
• Advance Error Reporting (AER)
• Supports DO, D3 (hot & cold) power management modes
• Completion Timeout (CTO)
• Function Level Reset (FLR)
• Network boot support:
• PXE Boot
• iSCSI Boot (with FoD upgrade)
• FCoE Boot (with FoD upgrade)
• Virtual Fabric support:
• Virtual Fabric mode (vNIC1)
• Switch Independent mode (vNIC2)
• Universal Fabric Port (UFP) support
• Emulex VNeX Technology full hardware off oad support:
• Increases VM Density and decreases CPU power draw
• Microsoft Network Virtualization using Generic Routing Encapsulation (NVGRE)
• VMware Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN)
• VM mobility acceleration, which off loads header encapsulation from processor to network
controller
• Remote Direct Memory Access over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) support:
• Accelerates application and storage I/O operations
• Supports Windows Server SMB Direct
• Is required to deliver Iow Iatency performance
• Single Root I/O Virtualization (SRIOV) support:
• Maximum of 128 Virtual Functions
• Minimizes VM I/O overhead and improves adapter performance
FCoE features (with FoD upgrade)
The foliowing FCoE features (with FoD upgrade) are included:
• Hardware off oads of Ethernet TCP/IP
• ANSI Ti 1 FC-BB-5 Support
• Programmable World Wide Name (WWN)
• Support for HP and FCoE Ether Types
• Support for up to 255 NPIV Interfaces per port
• FCoE Initiator
• Common driver for Emulex Universal CNA and Fibre Channel HBAs
• Fabric Provided MAC Addressing (FPMA) support
• 1024 concurrent port logins (RPls) per port
• 1024 active exchanges (XRls) per port
SCSI features (with FoD upgrade)
The following SCSI features (with FoD upgrade) are included:
• FulI SCSI Protocol Offload
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
4
• Header, Data Digest (CRC), and PDU
• Direct data placement of SCSI data
• 2048 Offloaded SCSI connections
• ¡SCSI initiator and concurrent initiator or target modes
• Multipath I/O
• OS-independent INT13 based iSCSlboot and SCSI crash dump support
• RFC 4171 Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS)
Standards
The adapter supports the following IEEE standards:
•
PU Express base spec 2.0, PU Bus Power Management Interface, rey. 1.2, Advanced Error
Reporting (AER)
• 802.3-2008 lüGbase Ethernet port
• 802.1QvLAN
• 802.3x FIow Control with pause Frames
• 802.1 Qbg Edge Virtual Bridging
• 802.1Qaz Enhanced transmission Selection (ETS) Data Center Bridging Capability (DCBX)
• 802.1Qbb Priority FIow Control
• 802.3ad link Aggregation/LACP
• 802.lab Link Layer Discovery Protocol
• 802.3ae (SR Optics)
• 802.1AX (Link Aggregation)
• 802.3p (Priority of Service)
• IPV4(RFQ 791)
• IPV6 (RFC 2460)
Modes of operation
The CN4058S and CN4052 support the following vNIC modes of operation and pNIC mode:
• Virtual Fabric Mode (also known as vNlCl mode). This mode works only with any of the following
switches that are installed in the chassis:
• FIex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
• FIex System Fabric EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
• FIex System Fabric EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch
In this mode, the adapter communicates using DCBX with the switch module to obtain vNIC
parameters. AIso, a special tag within each data packet is added and later removed by the NIC and
switch for each vNIC group to maintain separation of the virtual channels.
In vNIC mode, each physical port is divided into four virtual ports, which provides a total of 32
(CN4058S) or 8 (CN4052) virtual NlCs per adapter. The default bandwidth for each vNIC is 2.5
Gbps. Bandwidth for each vNIC can be configured at the switch 100 Mbps - 10 Gbps, up to a total
of 10 Gbps per physical port. The vNICs can also be configured to have O bandwidth if you must
allocate the available bandwidth to fewer than eight vNICs. In Virtual Fabric Mode, you can change
the bandwidth allocations through the switch user interfaces without requiring a reboot of the
server.
fYT31
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
5
When storage protocols are enabled on the adapter (enabled with the appropriate FoD upgrade as
usted in Table 1), 28 ports are Ethernet, and eight ports are iSCSI or FCoE.
Switch Independent Mode (also known as vNIC2 mode), where the adapter works with the foliowing
switches:
• Cisco Nexus B22 Fabric Extender for FIex System
• Fiex System EN4023 10Gb Scalable Switch
• Fiex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
• Fiex System Fabric EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
• FIex System Fabric EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch
• Fiex System Fabric S14091 System lnterconnect Module
• Fiex System Fabric S14093 System lnterconnect Module
• Fiex System EN4091 10Gb Ethernet Pass-thru and a top-of-rack (TOR) switch
Switch Independent Mode offers the same capabilities as Virtual Fabric Mode in terms of the
number of vNlCs and the bandwidth that each can be conf igured to include. However, Switch
Independent Mode extends the existing customer VLANs to the virtual NIC interfaces. The IEEE
802.10 VLAN tag is essential to the separation of the vNIC groups by the NIC adapter or driver and
the switch. The VLAN tags are added to the packet by the applications or drivers at each end
station rather than by the switch.
Universal Fabric Port (UFP) provides a feature-rich solution compared to the original vNlC Virtual
Fabric mode. As with Virtual Fabric mode vNlC, UFP allows carving up a single 10 Gb port into four
virtual NICs (called vPorts in UFP). UFP also has the foliowing modes that are associated with it:
• Tunnel mode: Provides Q-in-Q mode, where the vPort is customer VIAN-independent (very
similar to vNlC Virtual Fabric Dedicated Uplink Mode).
• Trunk mode: Provides a traditional 802.10 trunk mode (multi-VIAN trunk link) to the virtual
NIC (vPort) interface; that is. permits host side tagging.
• Access mode: Provides a traditional access mode (single untagged VLAN) to the virtual NIC
(vPort) interface, which is similar to a physical port in access mode.
• FCoE mode: Provides FCoE functionality to the vPort.
• Auto-VIAN mode: Auto VLAN creation for Qbg and VMready environments.
Only one vPort (vPort 2) per physical port can be bound to FCoE. If FCoE is not wanted, vPort 2 can
be conf igured for one of the other modes. UFP works with the following switches:
• FIex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
• Flex System Fabric EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
• FIex System Fabric S14093 System lnterconnect Module
• In pNIC mode, the adapter can operate as a standard 10 Gbps or 1 Gbps 4-port Ethernet expansion
card. When in pNIC mode, the adapter functions with all supported I/O modules.
In pNIC mode, the adapter with the FoD upgrade applied operates in traditional Converged Network
Adapter (CNA) mode with eight ports (CN4058S) or two ports (CN4052) of Ethernet and eight ports
(CN4058S) or two ports (CN4052) of iSCSI or FCoE available to the operating system.
0 s231.9
.1
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
6
Embedded 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
Sorne rnodels of the X6 compute nodes include one Embedded 4-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric controller (VFA),
which is also known as LAN on Motherboard or LOM. This controller is built into the systern board. The
controller is Emulex XE1 04-based like the CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter and has the sarne
featu res.
Using the Fabric Connector, two 10Gb ports routed to I/O module bay 1 and two 10 Gb ports are routed to
I/O module bay 2. A compatible I/O module must be installed in those I/O module bays.
The Embedded 10Gb VFA also supports SCSI and FCoE using the Lenovo Features on Demand (F0D)
license upgrade listed in the following table. Only one upgrade is needed per compute node.
Table 2. Feature on Dernand upgrade for FCoE and SCSI support
Part
number
Feature code
Description
00FM258
A5TM
FIex System X6 Embedded 10Gb Virtual Fabric Upgrade
OC32O
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
7
Supported servers
The foliowing table lists the FIex System compute nodes that support the adapters.
Table 3. Supported servers
_
pI
g o
xoz
o CO
)( o
.•
y
- -e
WW
C
o
O
Part
Description
number
CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
94Y5160
CN4058S Virtual Fabric Adapter Software
Upgrade (FoD)
94Y5164
FIex System CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric
Adapter
00JY800
Fiex System CN4052 Virtual Fabric Adapter SW
Upgrade(FoD)
00JY804
0
o1oe000eoo
C1
x
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
* The CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter has two ASICs and is not supported in slots 3 and 4
For more information about the expansion cards that are supported by each blade server type, visit:
http://Fbm.com/servers!eserver/serverproven/compat/us/
I/O adapter cards are installed in the slot in supported servers, such as the x240 M5, as highlighted in the
foliowing figure.
Figure 2. Location of the I/O adapter slots in the Flex System x240 M5 Compute Node
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
r ''
8
Supported I/O modules
These adapters can be installed in any I/O adapter siot of a supported Flex System compute node. One or
two compatible 1 Gb or 10 Gb I/O modules must be installed in the corresponding I/O bays in the chassis.
The foliowing table lists the switches that are supported. When the adapter is connected to the 1 Gb
switch, the adapter operates at 1 Gb speeds.
To maximize the number of adapter ports that are usable, you might also need to order switch upgrades to
enable more ports as usted in the table. Alternatively, for CN4093, EN4093R, and S14093 switches, you
can use Flexible Port Mapping, which is a new feature of Networking OS 7.8 with which you can minimize
the number of upgrades that are needed. For more information, see the Product Guides for the switches,
which are available at this website:
http://Ienovopress.com/flexsystem/iomodules
Note: Adapter ports 7 and 8 are reserved for future use. The chassis supports al¡ eight ports, but there are
no switches that are available that connect to these ports.
Table 4. I/O modules and upgrades for use with the CN4058S and CN4052 adapter
Description
Part number
Port count
(per pair
of switches)*
Lenovo Flex System Fabric EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
+ EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
00FM514
49Y4798
4
Lenovo Flex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
+ CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
00FM51 0
49Y4798
4
Lenovo Flex System S14091 10Gb System lnterconnect Module
00FE327
2
Lenovo Flex System Fabric S14093 System Interconnect Module
+ S14093 System lnterconnect Module (Upgrade 1)
OOFM51 8
95Y3318
4
CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch:
+ CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
+ CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch (Upgrade 2)
00D5823
00D5845
00D5847
6
EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch:
+ EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
+ EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 2)
6
EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch:
+ EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
+ EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 2)
95Y3309
49Y4798
88Y6037
49Y4270**
49Y4798
88Y6037
Flex System EN4091 10Gb Ethernet Pass-thru
88Y6043
2
S14093 System lnterconnect Module:
+ S14093 System lnterconnect Module (Upgrade 1)
+ S14093 System lnterconnect Module (Upgrade 2)
95Y3313
95Y3318
95Y3320
6
EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
+ EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
49Y4294
90Y3562
4
Cisco Nexus B22 Fabric Extender for Flex System
94Y5350
2
EN4023 10Gb Scalable Switch
(Base switch has 24 port ¡¡censes; Upgrades 1 & 2 may be needed)
94Y5212
6
6
* This column indicates the number of adapter ports that are active if indicated upgrades are installed.
** Withdrawn from marketing.
The following table shows the connections between adapters that are installed in the compute nodes to
the switch bays in the chassis.
Flex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
9
Note: The CN4058S is not supported in slots 3 and 4 of the x880 X6, x480 X6 and x280 X6.
Table 5. Adapter to I/O bay corres pondence
I/O adapter slot
Port on the adapter*
Corresponding I/O module bay
in the chassis
in the server
SIot 1
SIot 2
Bay 1
Bay 2
Bay 3
Bay 4
Port 1
Yes
No
No
No
Port2
No
Yes
No
No
Port3
Yes
No
No
No
Port4
No
Yes
No
No
Port 5
Yes
No
No
No
Port6
No
Yes
No
No
Port 7`
Yes
No
No
No
Port 8`
No
Yes
No
No
Port 1
No
No
Yes
No
Port2
No
No
No
Yes
Port3
No
No
Yes
No
Port4
No
No
No
Yes
Port 5
No
No
Yes
No
Port6
No
No
No
Yes
Port 7*
No
No
Yes**
No
Port 8*
No
No
No
Yes**
* The use of adapter ports 3, 4. 5. and 6 require upgrades to the switches as described in Table 4. The
EN4091 Pass-thru only supports ports 1 and 2 (and only when two Pass-thru modules are installed).
Adapter ports 7 and 8 are reserved for future use. The chassis supports ah eight ports, but there are no
switches that are available that connect to these ports.
The fohlowing figure shows the internal layout of the CN4058S showing how the adapter ports are routed
to the I/O module ports. Red hines indicate connections from ASIC 1 on the adapter and blue lines are the
connections from ASIC 2. The dotted blue lines are resenved for future use when switches are available
that suppont al] 8 ports of the adapter.
r1-1
Q323
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
10
CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
I/O Module 1
ASIC 1 (4 ports)
1
-a---
4 pi1-
- • --i,
TP3
3
___pAi
INTB1
tNTC1
- P5
7-------- 4 7
5
E
ÚA
1
:p2
-______
: INTA1
INTB1.
P4
INTC1
P6
[j------------P8 ---------INTD1
-j
ASIC 2 (4 ports)
1
I/O Module 2
Connections from ASIC 1
Connections from ASIC 2
- - -. Reserved for future use
Figure 3. Internal layout of the CN4058S adapter ports
The foliowing figure shows the interna¡ layout of the CN4052 showing how the adapter ports are routed to
the I/O module ports.
CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
I/O Module 1
-
ASIC (2 ports)
{T
-f
INTA1
P2}
P4
rjT
INTA1 j
INTBII
iINTC1]
P8
INTDIJ
I/O Module 2
Figure 4. Interna¡ layout of the CN4052 adapter ports
The connections between the CN4058S 8-port adapters that are installed in the compute nodes and the
switch bays in the chassis are shown in the foliowing figure. See Table 3 for specific server compatibility.
See Table 4 for specific switch compatibility.
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
11
Figure 5. Logical layout of the interconnects between I/O adapters and I/O modules
Operating system support
The CN4058S and CN4052 support the following operating systems:
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Server x64 Edition
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 for AMD64/EM64T
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 with Xen for AMD64/EM64T
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 with XEN
• VMware vSphere 5.1 (ESXi)
• VMware vSphere 5.5 (ESA)
• VMware vSphere 6.0 (ESXi)
Support for operating systems is based on the combination of the expansion card and the blade server on
which it is installed. See the ServerProven website for the latest information about the specific versions
and service packs supported. Select the blade server, and then select the expansion card to see the
supported operating systems:
http://wwwJenovo.com/us/en/serverproven/nos/flexmatrix.shtml
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
12
Warranty
There is a 1 -year, customer-replaceable unit (CRU) limited warranty. When installed in a server, these
adapters assume your system's base warranty and any Lenovo warranty service upgrade purchased for
the system.
Physical specifications
The adapter featu res the following dimensions and weight:
• Width: 100 mm (3.9 in.)
• Depth: 80 mm (3.1 in.)
• Weight: 13 g (0.3 lb)
The adapter features the following shipping dimensions and weight (approximate):
• Height: 58 mm (2.3 in.)
• Width: 229 mm (9.0 in.)
• Depth: 208 mm (8.2 in.)
• Weight: 0.4 kg (0.89 lb)
Regulatory compliance
The adapter conforms to the following regulatory standards:
• United States FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, ANSI 063.4 (2003), Class A
• United States UL 60950-1, Second Edition
• lEO/EN 60950-1, Second Edition
• FCC - Verified to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Class A
• Canada ICES-003, issue 4, Class A
• ULJIEC6O95O-1
• OSA 022.2 No. 60950-1-03
• Japan VCCI, Class A
• Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006, Class A
• lEO 60950-1 (OB Certificate and OB Test Report)
• Taiwan BSMI ONS1 3438, Class A
• Korea KN22, Class A; KN24
• RussiaJGOST ME01, IEC-60950-1, GOST R 51318.22-99, GOST R 51318.24-99, GOST R
51317.12-2006, GOST R 513-17.33-99
• lEO 60950-1 (OB Oertificate and OB Test Report)
• CE Mark (EN55022 Class A, EN60950-1, EN55024, EN61 000-3-2, EN61 000-3-3)
• CISPR 22, Class A
Popular configurations
The adapters can be used in various configurations.
Ethernet conf iguration
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
13
The following figure shows CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter installed in both slots of the x240
M5 Compute Node (a model without the Embedded 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter), which in turn is installed
in the chassis. The chassis also has four Flex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switches.
Depending on the number of compute nodes that are installed and the number of external ports you want
to enable, you might also need switch upgrades 1 and 2. Even with both of these upgrades, the CN4093
supports only six of the eight ports on each adapter.
Figure 6. Example configuration
The following table lists the parts that are used in the configuration.
Table 6. Components that are used when the adapter is connected to the 10 GbE switches
Part number/
machine type
Description
Quantity
Vares
Supported compute node
1 to 14
94Y5160
CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
1 or 2 per server
8721-Al x
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
1
00D5823
Fiex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
4
00D5845
Fiex System Fabric CN4093 Converged Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
Optional with flexible
port mapping
00D5847
FIex System Fabric CN4093 Converged Scalable Switch (Upgrade 2)
Optional with flexible
port mapping
FCoE configuration using a Brocade SAN
The CN4058S adapter can be used with the EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch as Data Center Bridging
(DCB) switches that can transport FCoE frames by using FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) snooping. The
encapsulated FCoE packets are sent to the Brocade VDX 6730 Fibre Channel Forwarder (FCF), which is
functioning as an aggregation switch and an FCoE gateway, as shown in the following figure.
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapters
14
vox
. Dual redundant
• CEE I FCoE hnks
.-.. Dual redundant
FC links
cio
•LJIU
IBM Rex System
CN4058 ada pter
EN4093R 10 Gb Fabric Switch
)L.JI E.Je
DS3000!EJS5000
DS8000
V7000!SVC
xlv
Figure 7. FCoE solution that uses the EN4093R as an FCoE transit switch with the Brocade VDX 6730 as
an FU
The solution components that are used in the scenario as shown in the figure are listed in the following
table.
Table 7. FCoE solution that uses the EN4093R as an FCoE transit switch with the Brocade VDX 6730 as an
FOF
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
15
Diagram
reference
Description
Part
number
Quantity
1 per server
Fiex System Fabric EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
94Y5160
95Y3309
49Y4798
Fiex System Fabric EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch (Upgrade 2)
88Y6037
Fiex System FCoE solution
FIex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
FIex System Fabric EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
2 per chassis
Optional with
FPM
Optional with
FPM
Brocade VDX 6730 Converged Switch
Ø
B-type or Brocade SAN fabric
Ø
O
IBM FC disk controlílers
IBM DS3000 / DS5000
IBM DS8000
IBM Storwize V7000 / SAN Volume Controller
IBM XIV
For a fuli listing of supported FCoE and SCSI configurations, see the System Storage Interoperation
Center (SSIC), which is available at this website:
http://ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic
Related publications
For more information, see the foliowing resources:
• U.S. Announcement Letter
http://ibm.com/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?infotype=dd&subtype=ca&&htmlfid=897/ENUS1 14-184
• Fiex System Fabric EN4093 and EN409319 10Gb Scalable Switch Product Guide
http://Ienovopress.com/tipsO864
• Fiex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch Product Guide
http://lenovopress.com/tipsO868
• Fiex System EN4091 10Gb Ethernet Pass-thru Product Guide
http://lenovopress.com/tipsO865
• Fiex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch Product Guide
http://lenovopress.com/tipsO861
• Fiex System Information Center (User's Guides for servers and options)
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/information
• Fiex System Interoperability Guide
http://lenovopress.com/fsig
• Fiex System Products and Technology for x86 Systems
http://Ienovopress.com/sg248255
• Product Guides for FIex System servers and options
http://lenovopress.com/flexsystern
• ServerProven for FIex System
http://wwwienovo.com/us/en/serverproven/flexsystem.shtml
QC32
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 1 0Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
16
Related product families
Product families related to this document are the foliowing:
o
Blade Network Adapters
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
17
Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in ah countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference lo a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended lo state or imply that only that Lenovo product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionalhy equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Lenovo intehlectual property nght may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility lo evaluate and
verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent
apphications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any ¡¡cense lo these patents. You can send ¡¡cense inquines, in writing, lo:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS 15" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this staternent may not apply lo you.
This information could include technicah inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodicahly made lo the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the pubhication. Lenovo may rnake
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this pubhication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other hife support applications
where malfunction may result in ¡njury or death lo persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shalh operate as an express
or imphied hicense or indemnity under the intellectual property nghts of Lenovo or third parties. AN information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an ihlustration. The result
obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply
in any way it behieves appropriate without incurring any obhigation lo you.
Any references in this publication lo non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materiahs at those Web sites are not part of the materials
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein
was determined in a controlled envinonment. Therefore, the result obtained in other openating environments may
vary significanthy. Sorne measurements may have been made on develo prnent-leve¡ systems and there is no
guarantee that these measurements wihl be the sarne on generaily available systerns. Furthermore, sorne
measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the apphicable data for their specific environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2016. Afl rights reserved.
This document, TIPS1 164, was created or updated on September 21, 2015.
Send us your comments in one of the following ways:
o
Use the onhine Contact us review form found at:
http://lenovopress.com/TIPS1 164
Send your comments in an e-mail lo:
comments@lenovopress.com
This document is available onhine at http://lenovopress.com/TIPS1 164.
OC331
FIex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
18
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, and For Those Who Do are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the
United States, other countries, or both. A current list of Lenovo trademarks is available on the Web at
http://www.lenovo.com/legal/copytrade.html.
The foliowing terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
ServerProven®
System x®
VMready®
Fiex SystemTM
vNICTM
The foliowing terms are trademarks of other companies:
Linux® is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft® and Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Fiex System CN4058S and CN4052 10Gb Virtual FabricAdapters
19
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
Product Guide
The network architecture on the Fiex System platform has been specifically designed to address network
challenges, giving you a scalable way to integrate, optimize, and automate your data center. The FIex
SystemTM FC3052 2-port 8Gb Fibre Channel Adapter enables high-speed access for Fiex System compute
nodes to an externa¡ storage area network (SAN). This adapter is based on the proven Emulex Fibre
Channel stack, and works with any of the 8 Gb or 16 Gb FIex System Fibre Channel switch and pass-thru
modules.
Figure 1 shows the Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter.
Figure 1. FIex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
OT:C333
FIex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
Did you know?
The performance bottleneck with Fibre Channel storage typically exists in the switching. By moving to 8 Gb
adapters and switches, you can localize the bottleneck to the storage controller, where it can be managed
by expanding the disks attached to storage. When compared to the previous generation 4 Gb adapters, the
new generation 8 Gb adapters double the throughput speeds for Fibre Channel traffic. As a result, you can
manage increased amounts of data and possibly benefit from a reduced hardware expense.
The adapter connects to the midplane directly, without having to use cables or small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) modules. By eliminating these components for up to 14 servers, the resulting savings alone can cover
the investment in the chassis.
OT334
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
2
Part number ¡nformation
Table 1 shows the part number to order this card.
Thk 1 Prt niimhr nc ftiirt- mr1p fnr nrrinn
Description
Part number
Feature code
Feature code
(x240 7863-10X oniy)*
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
95Y2375
A2195
EC25
* This feature code is for x240 when ordered through MS (e-config) as model 7863-1 OX only. Alt other
supported systems and modeis use the other feature code.
The part number inciudes the foliowing items:
• One Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8 Gb FC Adapter
• A documentation CD containing the adapter user's guide
o The !mportant Notices document
Features
The Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter has the foliowing featu res and specifications:
o Based on the Emulex 'Saturn' 8Gb Fibre Channel I/O Controller (IOC) chip
• Muitifunction POte 2.0 device with two independent FC ports
• Auto-negotiation between 2-Gbps, 4-Gbps, or 8-Gbps FC link attachments
• Compiles with the PCIe base and CEM 2.0 specifications
• Enabiement of high-speed and dual-port connection to a Fibre Channel SAN
• Comprehensive virtualization capabilities with support for N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) and Virtual
Fabric
• Simplified instailation and configuration using common HBA drivers
• Common driver model that eases management and enables upgrades independent of HBA firmware
• Fibre Channel specifications:
• Bandwidth: Burst transfer rate of up to 1600 MBps full-duplex per port
• Support for point-to-point fabric connection: F-Port Fabric Login
• Support for Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) and FCAL-2 FL-Port Login
• Support for Fibre Channel services class 2 and 3
• Single-chip design with two independent 8 Gbps serial Fibre Channel ports, each of which provides:
• Reduced instruction set computer (RISC) processor
• Integrated serializer/deserializer
• Receive direct memory access (DMA) sequencer
• Frame buffer
• Onboard DMA: DMA controller for each port: Transmit and receive
• Frame buffer first in, first out (FIFO): Integrated transmit and receive frame buffer for each data
channel
• Support for Fabric Manager
• Support for UEFI
• Uses same FC/FCoE drivers as Fiex System CN4054 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
OC335
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
3
Supported servers
The foliowing table Iists the Fiex System compute nades that support the FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter.
Table 2. Supported servers
e,
e
xx
C04
ID
Ne
IR
UI
ID
la
co
Part
escription
FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC
O
C4
numuer
95Y2375
Y
lo
co
p
p
p
co
-
N
co
_
O
C4
C4
N
Y
c
0
c
O
1
O
C4
C'l
Y
Y
ti)
G
p
O
O
O
O
O
W
*
O
O
co
N
Y
Y
Y
co
Y
Y
Adapter
See the ServerProven website for the Iatest information about the expansion cards that are supported by
each blade server type:
http://ibm.com/servers/eserver!serverproven/compat/us/
I/O adapter cards are instaHed in the siot in supported servers, such as the x240, as highlighted in the
foliowing figure.
Figure 2. Location of the I/O adapter slots in the FIex System x240 Compute Nade
Supported I/O modules
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
4
The FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter supports the I/O modules usted in the following table. One or two
compatible switches must be installed in the corresponding I/O bays in the chassis. lnstalling two switches
means that both ports of the adapter are enabled. When the adapter is paired with a 16 Gb switch, those
interna¡ switch ports will operate at 8 Gbps.
Table 3. I/O modules supported with the FC3052 2-Port 8Gb FC Adapter
Description
Part number
Support the FC3052 adapter
Fiex System FC31 71 8Gb SAN Switch
69Y1 930
Ves
Fiex System FC3171 8Gb SAN Pass-thru
69Y1 934
Ves
Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch
88Y6374
Ves
Fiex System FC5022 24-port 16Gb ESB SAN Scalable
Switch
90Y9356
Ves
The following table shows the connections between adapters installed in the compute nodes and the
switch bays in the chassis.
Table 4. Adapter to I/O bay correspondence
Port on the adapter
I/O adapter siot in the server
Slot 1
SIot 2
Corresponding I/O module bay in the chassis
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port 2
Module bay 4
The connections between the adapters installed in the compute nodes and the switch bays in the chassis
are shown diagrammatically in the following figure.
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
5
E;3cfl une belween an I/O adapter and a switch is four IinI
Figure 3. Logical layout of the interconnects between I/O adapters and I/O modules
FIex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
Supported operating systems
The FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter supports the foliowing operating systems:
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Datacenter x64 Edition
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Standard x64 Edition
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Web x64 Edition
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Server with Xen x64 Edition
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Server x64 Edition
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Server x64 Edition
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
• SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 10 for AMD64/EM64T
• SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 10 with Xen for AMD64/EM64T
• SUSE LINUX Enterprise Server 11 for AMD64!EM64T
• VMware ESA 4.1
• VMware vSphere 5.0 (ESA)
• VMware vSphere 5.1 (ESA)
• VMware vSphere 5.5 (ESXi)
See the ServerProven website for the Iatest information about the specific versions and service packs that
are supported:
http://ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/
Warranty
The adapter has a 1 -year limited warranty. When instaUed on an FIex System Compute Node, the adapter
assumes the system's base warranty and any Lenovo warranty service upgrade.
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
7
Regulatory compliance
The adapter conforms to the foliowing standards:
• United States FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, ANSI C63.4 (2003), Class A
• United States UL 60950-1, Second Edition
• IEC/EN 60950-1, Second Edition
• FCC - Verified to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Class A
• Canada ICES-003, issue 4, Class A
• ULJIEC 60950-1
• CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
• Japan VCCI, Class A
• Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006, Class A
• 1 E 60950-1 (CB Certificate and CB Test Report)
• Taiwan BSMI CNS13438, ClassA
• Korea KN22, Class A; KN24
• RussiaJGOST ME01, IEC-60950-1, GOST R 51318.22-99, GOST R 51318.24-99, GOST A 513-17.122006, GOST R 51317.33-99
• lEO 60950-1 (CB Certificate and GB Test Report)
• CE Mark (EN55022 Class A, EN60950-1, EN55024, EN61 000-3-2, EN61 000-3-3)
• CISPR 22, Class A
Physical specifications
The dimensions and weight of the adapter are as foliows:
• Width: 100 mm (3.9 in)
• Depth: 80 mm (3.1 in)
• Weight: 139(0.3 lb)
Shipping dimensions and weight (approximate):
• Height: 58 mm (2.3 in)
• Width: 229 mm (9.0 in)
• Depth: 208 mm (8.2 in)
• Weight: 0.4 kg (0.89 lb)
1
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
8
Popular conf igurations
The FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter can be used in various configurations. The following figure shows the
I/O installed in an I/O adapter slot 2 of the x240, which in turn is installed in the chassis. The chassis is
connected to a V7000. The RAID functionality is provided by the external storage system.
*
Intemal
connections
through the chassis
midplane
L,nanne
connections
Figure 4. Example configuration
The foliowing table Iists the parts that are used in the configuration.
ThIs
mnnt i icr1 whn rnnnpr.tinn th F02 2-rrt Fflh FC' AcLqntr tn Pvtprnn1 clisk strrwi
Part number/machine type
Description
Quantity
8737
FIex System x240 Compute Node or other
supported server
1 to 14
95Y2375
FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
1 per server
8721-Aix
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
1
69Y1930
FIex System FC31 71 8Gb SAN Switch
1 or 2
44X1964
8Gb SFP+ SW Optical Transceiver
1 per FC cable
39M5698
1 m LC-LC Fiber Channel Cable
1 for each V7000
con nection
2076-124
IBM V7000
1
This configuration also requires additional V7000 features, such as drives and software ¡¡censes. These are
not usted in the table.
O .c
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
9
Related publications
For more information, see the following resources:
Product Guides for Fiex System servers, switches and options
http://Ienovopress.com/flexsystem
• Fiex System Information Center (User's Guides for servers and options)
http://pubhb.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/information
• Fiex System Interoperability Guide
http://Ienovopress.com/fsig
• Fiex System Products and Technology by Lenovo, SG24-8255
http://enovopress.com/sg248255
• IBM Configurator for e-business (e-config)
http://ibm.com/services/econfig/
• System x and Cluster Solutions configurator (x-config)
http://ibm.com/products/hardware/configurator/americas/bhui/asit/
• System x Configuration and Options Guide
http://ibm.com/systems/xbc/cog/
• ServerProven for Fiex System
http://ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat!us/flexsystems.html
Related product families
Product families related to this document are the following:
Blade Storage Adapters
0EC342
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
10
Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in al¡ countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify
the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications
covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any ¡¡cense
to these patents. You can send ¡¡cense inquines, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS lS'1 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make
mprovements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other ¡¡fe support applications
where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express
or implied license or ¡ndemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. Afl information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an ihlustration. The result
obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply
in any way it behieves appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materíals
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was
determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary
significanthy. Sorne measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee
that these measurements wihl be the same on generally avaihable systems. Furthermore, sorne measurements may
have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should venify the
applicable data for their specific environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2016. Al]rights reserved.
This document, TIPSO869, was created or updated on June 25, 2015.
Send us your comments in one of the fohiowing ways:
• Use the onhine Contact us review form found at:
http://Ienovopress.comiTIPSO869
Send your comments in an e-mail to:
comments@lenovopress.com
This document is availabhe onhine at http://Ienovopress.comiTIPSO869.
Ü343
FIex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
11
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, and For Those Who Do are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the
United States, other countries, or both. A current list of Lenovo trademarks is available on the Web at
http://www.ienovo.com/legal/copytrade.htmi.
The foliowing terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
ServerProven®
System x®
Fiex SystemTM
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
Linux® is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft® and Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Or 3;4
Fiex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
12
I
ll
EE
TU
¡¡VIVA i en
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
Lenovo Press Product Guide
Fiex System is the next generation of blade technology with more performance and bandwidth and far
more capability to consolidate and virtualize than previous systems. Fiex System is anchored by the Fiex
System Enterprise Chassis which enables high-speed performance with integrated servers and
networking. Furthermore, its flexible design can meet the needs of varying workloads with independently
scalable IT resource pools for higher utilization and lower cost per workload.
The FIex System Enterprise Chassis is shown in Figure 1
Figure 1. The FIex System Enterprise Chassis
Did you know?
Fiex System is one of the key underlying technologies at the heart of Lenovo converged systems
offerings, PureFlex and VSPEX. PureFlex System combines advanced FIex System hardware integrated
into a solution that is simple to acquire and deploy. PureFlex is also available in a version optimized for
Virtual Desktop Infrastructure. The VSPEX private cloud with Lenovo FIex System off ers an easy on-ramp
to cloud computing, with a rigorous validated EMC VSPEX built on Lenovo infrastructure, to ensure fast
10w risk deployments.
C
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
Key featu res
The Flex System Enterprise Chassis is a simple, integrated infrastructure platform that supports a mix of
compute, storage, and networking resources to meet the demands of your appUcations. The solution is
easily scalable with the addition of another chassis with the required nades. With Lenovo XClarity
Administrator, multiple chassis can be monitored from a single screen. This flexible 14 nade, 1 O chassis
is designed for a simple deployment now and to scale to meet your needs in the future.
Fiexibility and efficiency
The 14 bays in the chassis allow the installation of compute or management nades, with networking
modules in the rear. A single chassis or a group of chassis can be fully customized to the specific needs
of the computing environment. IT can meet the needs of the business using a single system across
multiple aperating enviro nments.
The system monitors and manages power usage on all majar chassis components so you have total
control ayer power cansumption. Available power supply options are AC, -48V DC and HVDC. AC power
aptions can be conf igurable in either a single or three-phase power domain. The chassis supports N+N or
N+1 redundant power supplies and an entirely passive mid-plane to meet your reliability needs. The
power supplies are 80 PLUS Platinum-certified indicating high energy efficiency. The chassis design also
aptimizes cooling with cooling zones within the chassis. The system manages the fan modules based on
nade configuratian within the chassis. So, the system can increase the speed of certain fan modules ta
coal potential hat spots, and use lower speeds for ather fan modules where apprapriate.
Easily scalable with simple administration
Because the Flex System Enterprise Chassis is an al¡-in-one solution, it is designed for growth fram a
single chassis to many. Adding compute, storage, or networking capability is as simple as adding
additianal nades or modules. The simple, highly integrated management system allows you ta use the
Chassis Management Modules integrated into each chassis ta administer a single chassis, and the new
Lenova XClarity Administrator offers agent-free hardware management for compute nades and
networking.
Designed for multiple generations of technology
The Flex System Enterprise Chassis is designed to be the faundation of your IT infrastructure now and
into the future. Compute performance requirements are always on the rise and networking demands
continue to grow with rising bandwidth needs and a shrinking talerance for latency. The chassis is
designed ta scale to meet the needs of your future workloads, offering the flexibility to support current and
future innovations in compute, storage, and networking technology.
Flex System Enterprise Chassis
2
Locations of key components and connectors
Figure 2 shows the front of the Enterprise Chassis.
Figure 2. Front of the FIex System Enterprise Chassis
Figure 3 shows the rear of the Enterprise Chassis.
•
Six hot-swap
power supplies
'4YÁTwo hot-swap
40 mm tan
modules
rJ
1M1i
::1JPI
Eighthotswap
80 mm fan
modules
>Twohotswap
Chassis
Management
Modules
di
Four
hot-swap
switch bays
Information
panel
Switch bays: 1
Figure 3. Rear of the FIex System Enterprise Chassis
OC346
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
3
Standard specifications
The foliowing table Iists the standard specifications.
Table 1. Standard specifications (Part 1)
' Components
Speciflcatlon
Machinetype
8721
Firmware
Chassis with first generation Chassis Management Module (68Y7030): IBM-signed firmware
Chassis with Chassis Management Module 2 (00FJ669): Lenovo-signed firmware
Form factor
10U rack-mounted unit.
Maximum
number of
compute nodes
14 half-wide (single bay), seven full-wide (two bays), three double-height full-wide (four bays) or
one quadruple-height full-wide (8 bays). Mixing is supported.
Chassis per
42U rack
Four.
Nodes per 42U
rack
56 half -wide, or 28 full-wide.
Management
Chassis Management Modules 2 (CMM2) modules provide chassis management. One or two
CMM2s standard, depending on the model and the use of two provides redundancy. Earlier
modeis of the Enterprise Chassis use the first generation CMM. The CMM2 interfaces with the
integrated management module (IMM2) integrated in each compute node in the chassis.
Optional Lenovo XClarity Administrator for hardware resource management with integrators to
VMware vCenter and Microsoft System Center, including virtualization, networking, and storage
management. Chassis with first generation CMM can be upgraded to CMM2 however CMM and
CMM2 cannot be mixed.
I/O architecture
Up to eight lanes of I/O to an I/O adapter card, with each lane capable of up to 16 Gbps
bandwidth. Up to 16 lanes of I/O to a half-wide node with two adapters. A wide variety of
networking solutions, including Ethernet, Fibre Ohannel, Fibre Ohannel over Ethernet (FC0E),
and lnfiniBand.
Power supplies
Up to six power supplies that can provide N+N or N+1 redundant power. AO power supplies are
80 PLUS Platinum certified and provide over 94% efficiency at 50% load and 20% load. Each
power supply contains two independently powered 40 mm cooling fan modules. Power supply
options are 2500W AC, 2100W AO, 2500W HVDO and 2500W -48V DO power supplies. All
insta Iled power supplies must be identical.
Fan modules
Ten fan modules (eight 80 mm fan modules and two 40 mm fan modules); Four 80 mm and two
40 mm fan modules standard.
Dimensions
Height: 440 mm (17.3 in)
Width: 447 mm (17.6 in)
Depth: 800 mm (31.5 in) (measuredfrom front bezel to rear of chassis), 840 mm (33.1 in)
(measured from node latch handle to the power supply handle)
Weight
Minimum configuration: 96.62 kg (213 lb)
Maximum configuration: 220.45 kg (486 lb)
Sound leve¡
7.5 beis (declared)
Temperature
Operating air temperature 5°O to 40°O
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
Table 1. Standard specifications (Part 2)
Components
Specification
Electrical power
AC input power: 200 - 240 y ac (nominal), 50 or 60 Hz
HVDC DC Input power: 240 - 380 y de (nominal)
-48 y DC Input power: -48V te -60 y de (nominal)
Minimum configuration: 0.51 kVA (twa power supplies)
Maximum configuration: 13 kVA (six power supplies)
Power
consum ption
12,900 watts maximum
The foliowing table lists what each standard model, Express model and TopSeller model includes. In
addition, each model ships with:
•
•
One C19 ta C20 twa-meter power cable for each power supply
One Rack Mount Kit
Modeis
The foliowing table lists the specifications of the standard Enterprise Chassis models.
Table 2. Models
Modo¡
Firmware
codebase
Nodo
bays
CMM*
(2 mex)
I/O bays
(used 1 mex)
I/O modules
inciuded
Power
supplies
(6 mex)
40mm
ferie
(2 mex)
8Omm
fan
(8 mex)
Console
breakout
cable
Standard models
8721-Aix
IBM
14
ixCMMi
0/4
None
2x 2500W
2
4
1
8721-LRx
IBM
14
1xCMM1
0/4
None
2x 2100W
2
4
1
8721-OCx
IBM
14
1xCMM1
0/4
None
2x 2500W
-48V DC
2
4
1
8721-ALx
Lenovo
14
1x CMM2
0/4
None
2x 2500W
2
4
1
8721-DLx
Lenovo
14
1x CMM2
0/4
None
2x 2500W
-48V DC
2
4
1
1 1xCMM1 1014
None
2x 2500W
2
4
Express models - Europe
8721-K1G 1 IBM
1 14
li-
Tc>pSefJer models - North America
8721-ElY
IBM
14
2xCMM1
2/4
2xS1403t
6x 2500W
2
8
872 1-E2Y
IBM
14
2x CMM1
2/4
2x CN4093t
6x 2500W
2
8
1
872 1-E3Y
Lenovo
14
2x CMM2
2/4
2x S14093#
6x 2500W
2
8
1
8721-E4Y 1 Lenovo
1 14
1 6x 2500W
2
8
1
12x CMM2 1214
2xCN4093#
CMM1 = first generation Chassis Management Module (68Y7030), CMM2 = Chassis Management Module 2
(00FJ669)
** One 80mm fan module part number or feature code contains two fan modules (System x feature code AOUA or
part number 43W9078)
t I/O modules are those with IBM-signed firmware (FIex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch,
00D5823 and FIex System Fabric S14093 System Interconnect Module, 95Y3313)
# I/O modules are those with Lenovo-signed firmware (FIex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable
Switch, OOFM510 and FIex System Fabric S14093 System Interconnect Module, 00FM518)
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
5
Supported compute nades
The following table Iists the compute nodes that are supported in the Flex System Enterprise Chassis.
The table also Iists the maximum number installable.
Table 3. Supported compute nodes and maximum quantities
Supported in chassis
Firmware
coda base
8721 with CMM1
f8721 with CMM2
type
(IBM signed)
(Lenovo signad)
1
Flex System x220
7906
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
14
Flex System x222
7916
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
14
Flex System x240
7162
Lenovo signed
No
Supported
14
Flex System x240
8737
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
14
Flex System x24OM5
9532
Lenovo signed
Supported
Supported
14
Flex System x440
7917
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x440
7167
Lenovo signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x280 X6
7196
Lenovo signed
No
Supported
7
Flex System x480 X6
7196
Lenovo signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x880 X6
7196
Lenovo signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x280 X6
7903
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x480 X6
7903
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System x880 X6
7903
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
7
Flex System Manager
8731-Aix
IBM signed
Supported
Supported
1
Machine
Description
Maximum
per chassis*
Lenovo x86 servers
IBM Power Systems servers
Flex System p24L
1457
IBM signed
Supported
No
14
Flex System p260
7895-22X
IBM signed
Supported
No
14
Flex System p270
7954-24X
IBM signed
Supported
No
14
Flex System p460
7895-42X
IBM signed
Supported
No
7
* The maximum number of compute nodes supported depends on a number of factors. See below.
** A single Flex System Manager appliance can manage up to 16 chassis
The actual number of compute nodes systems that can be powered on in a chassis depends on these
factors:
•
•
•
•
The TDP power rating for the processors that are installed in the compute nades (x86 servers)
The number of power supplies installed in the chassis
The capacity of the power supplies installed in the chassis (2100 W or 2500 W)
The power redundancy policy used ¡n the chassis (N+1 or N+N)
Flex System Enterprise Chassis
6
For the x480 X6 or x880 X6, if two compute nodes are scaled together, then a maximum of 3 scaed
complexes can be installed. For the x880 X6, if four compute nodes are scaled together, then a maximum
of 1 scaled x880 X6 complexes can be installed. Other bays can be fiHed with other compute nades.
The table in the Power Supphes section provides guidelines about what number of compute nades can be
powered on in the Enterprise Chassis, based on the type and number of power supplies instafled.
See IBM® ServerProven® for the Iatest information about the supported servers:
http:J/ibm.comiserversleserver/serverproven/compatlusi
Supported 110 modules
The Fiex System Enterprise Chassis has four high-speed switch bays that are capable of supporting a
variety of I/O architectures.
The switches are installed in switch bays in the rear of the FIex System Enterprise Chassis as shown in
the foHowing figure. Switches are normally installed in pairs (bays 1 & 2, and bays 3 & 4), because I/O
adapter cards installed in the compute nades route to twa switch bays for performance and redundancy.
Figure 4. Location of the switch bays in the FIex System Enterprise Chassis
ÜrC348
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
7
The foliowing table lists the switches that are available for the chassis.
Table 4. I/O modules and upgrades
Supported in chassis
Part number
FIrmware
code base
8721 with CMM
(IBM signad)
8721 with CMM2
(Lenovo signad)
EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
00FM514
Lenovo*
No
Supported
CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
00FM510
Lenovo*
No
Supported
S14091 10Gb System Interconnect Module
00FE327
Lenovo*
No
Supported
S14093 System lnterconnect Module
00FM518
Lenovo*
No
Supported
EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
49Y4294
IBM*
Supported
Supported
EN4091 10Gb Ethernet Pass-thru
88Y6043
IBM*
Supported
Supported
EN4093 10Gb Scalable Switch
49Y4270
IBM*
Supported
Supported
EN4093R 10Gb Scalable Switch
95Y3309
lBM
Supported
Supported
CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
0005823
IBM'
Supported
Supported
S14093 System lnterconnect Module
95Y3313
IBM'
Supported
Supported
Cisco Nexus B22 Fabnc Extender
94Y5350
Vendor
Supported
Supported
EN4023 10Gb Scalable Switch
94Y5212
Vendor
Supported
Supported
EN6131 40Gb Ethernet Switch
90Y9346
Vendor
Supported
Supported
FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch
88Y6374
Vendor
Supported
Supported
FC5022 24-port 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch
00Y3324
Vendor
Supported
Supported
FC5022 24-port 16Gb ESB SAN Scalable Switch
90Y9356
Vendor
Supported
Supported
FC3171 8Gb SAN Switch
69Y1930
Vendor
Supported
Supported
FC3171 8Gb SAN Pass-thru
69Y1934
Vendor
Supported
Supported
90Y3450
Vendor
Supported
Supported
Description
Ethernet modules
Fibra Channel switches
lnflnlBand switches
B6131 lnfiniBand Switch (QDRJFDR)
* For these switches, IBM signed switch firmware is up to Version 7.x and Lenovo signed switch firmware is Version
8.x onwards
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
110 architecture
Each haif-wide compute node (such as the Fiex System x240 Compute Node) has two adapter slots, and
each full-wide compute nade (such as the Ftex System x440 Compute Nade) has four adapter slots. The
adapter slots in each compute node route through the chassis midplane to the switch bays. The
architecture supports up to eight parts per adapter although currently ony two-port and four-port adapters
are available.
The foliowing figure shows how two-port adapters are connected ta switches installed in the chassis.
Figure 5. Logica$ layout of the intercannects between two-port I/O adapters and I/O modules
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
9
A four-port adapter doubies the connections between each adapter and switch pair (for example, a
four-port adapter in Al in each compute node routes twa connections to switch 1 and two connections to
switch 2).
The following figure shows how four-port adapters are connected to switches that are installed in the
chassis.
Figure 6. Logical layout of the inter-connections between four-port I/O adapters and I/O modules
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
lo
The following table shows the connections between adapter slots in the compute nodes to the switch bays
in the chassis.
Table 5. Ada pter to I/O bay correspondence
I/O adapter siot
in the server
SIot 1
Slot 2
Slot3
(full-wide compute nodes only)
SIot 4
(full-wide compute nodes only)
Port on the adapter
Corresponding I/O module bay
in the chassis
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 1
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port 2
Module bay 4
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 3
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 4
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 1
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port2
Module bay 4
Port 3 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 3
Port 4 (for 4-port cards)*
Module bay 4
To make use of al¡ four ports of a four-port adapter, the switch must have 28 internal ports enabled, and two
switches must be installed in the bays as indicated.
O.33ü
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
Chassis Management Module
The Chassis Management Module (CMM) provides single-chassis management in the Enterprise
Chassis. The OMM is used to communicate with the integrated management module (IMM) controller in
each compute node to provide system monitoring, event recording and alerts, and to manage the chassis,
its devices, and the compute nodes.
The chassis has one OMM installed standard but supports two CMMs for redundancy. lf one OMM fails,
the second OMM can detect ¡ts inactivity and activate itself to take control of the system without any
disruption. The OMM is central to the management of the chassis and ¡s required in the Enterprise
Chassis.
There are two versions of the Chassis Management Module available:
•
Chassis Management Module 2 (00FJ669) -- contains a Trusted Platform Module (1PM) v2.0 chip
and has a Lenovo-signed firmware codebase. This module is recommended for new installation.
•
First generation Chassis Management Module (68Y7030) -- contains a Trusted Platform Module
(TPM) vl.1 chip and has an IBM-signed firmware codebase
Standard and TopSeller modeis of the chassis contain either a OMM (68Y7030) or a OMM2 (00FJ669) as
usted in Table 2. The selection of OMM determines which compute nodes and I/O modules are supported
in the chassis. See Tables 3 and 4 respectively for details. You can replace a OMM with a CMM2,
however mixing is not supported -- you cannot have a chassis with one OMM (68Y7030) and one OMM2
(00FJ669).
The following table shows the ordering information.
Table 6. Chassis Management Module
Part
number
Feature codes*
Description
Standard /
Maximum
68Y7030
AOTM / AOUE
Flex System Chassis Management Module
112
00FJ669
A
1 Fiex System Chassis Management Module 2
1/2
* The first feature code corresponds to the base OMM installed in the chassis. The second feature code corresponds
to the optional second OMM which provides redundancy.
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
12
The following figure shows the Chassis Management Module. See Figure 3 for the location of the CMM in
the chassis.
Reset
Etliernel connection
(RJ45)tothe
management network
Serial port (miniJJSB) for
local Oh magement
USB for memory key (for
flrmre updates. etc)
--
Power LED
Activity LEO
Fault LEO
Figure 7. Chassis Management Module
The CMM provides these functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power control
Fan management
Chassis and compute node initialization
Switch management
Diagnostics: chassis, I/O options, and compute nodes
Resource discovery and inventory management
Resource alerts and monitoring management
Chassis and compute node power management
Security policy management
Role-based access control
Support for up to 84 local CMM user accounts
Support for up to 32 simultaneous sessions
The CMM has the following connectors
•
USB connection. This connection can be used for insertion of a USB media key for tasks, such as
firmware updates.
•
10/100/1000 Mbps RJ45 Ethernet connection to connect to a management network. The CMM can be
managed via this Ethernet port.
•
Serial port (mini-USB) for local command-line interface (CLI) management. Use serial cable 90Y9338
for con nectivity.
The CMM has the following light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that provide the following information:
•
•
•
•
Power-on LED
Activity LED
Error LED
Ethernet port link and port activity LED5
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
U - L ..) ..)
13
The OMM also incorporates a reset button, which, when pressed, resets the OMM back to its default
condition. It has two functions, depending on how long the button is pressed:
•
•
When pressed for less than 5 seconds, the OMM restarts.
When pressed for more than 5 seconds (for example, 10 or 15 seconds), the OMM configuration is
reset to the manufacturing defaults, and then the OMM restarts.
The OMM supports a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) that provides a way to perform OMM
functions within a supported web browser. You can also perform management functions through the OMM
command-line interface (OLI). Both the web-based GUI and the OLI are accessible via the single RJ45
Ethernet connector on the OMM or from any other system that is connected to the same (management)
network.
The OMM has the following default static lPv4 address. By default, the OMM is configured to respond to
Dynamic Host Oonfiguration Protocol (DHOP) first before using its static lPv4 address:
•
•
•
•
lPaddress: 192.168.70.100
Subnet: 255.255.255.0
User ID: USERID (alI capital letters)
Password: PASSWORD (all capital letters, with a zero instead of the letter O)
The OMM does not have a fixed static lPv6 IP address, by default. Initial access to the OMM in an lPv6
environment can be performed by either using the lPv4 IP address or the lPv6 link-local address. The
IPv6 link-local address is automatically generated based on the Media Access Control (MAO) address of
the OMM.
The OMM is the key component enabling the integrated management network. lnternally, the OMM has a
multiple port L2 1 Gigabit Ethernet switch with dedicated links to all 14 node bays, all four switch bays,
and the second OMM, if installed. These connections are all point-to-point, ensuring dedicated bandwidth.
The 1 GbE links are full-duplex, fixed speed (not auto-negotiate) links. The 1 GbE management network is
only accessible by each nodes management controller (IMMv2 or FSP), each switch modules
management interfaces. the OMM, and the Fiex System Manager (FSM) management appliance. This
design permits the separation of the management network from the data network.
The OMM has a high-security policy that is enabled by default, which means that the following policies
are enabled by default:
•
Strong password policies with automatic validation and verification checks
•
Required update of the default passwords after the initial setup
•
Only secure communication protocols, such as SSH and SSL. Unencrypted protocols, such as HTTP,
Telnet, and SNMPv1, are disabled.
•
Oertificates to establish secure, trusted connections for applications that run on the management
processors
Fiex System Enterprise Ohassis
14
Lenovo XClarity Administrator
Lenovo XClarity Administrator is centraiized resource management solution aimed at reducing
complexity, speeding response and enhancing availability of both Lenovo server systems and solutions
Lenovo XClarity Administrator provides agent-free hardware management for System x rack servers and
Fiex System compute nodes and components, including the Chassis Management Module and Ftex
System I/O modules. The foliowing figure shows the Lenovo XClarity Administrator interface, where both
Fiex System components and rack servers are being managed and can be seen on the dashboard.
-
Hrdua Status
Ah Servers
Fleo Swltch,es
Fleo Storage
£
Fleo Chassis
RacKs
24
2
l
35
1
200
39
2
1,
0
•
22 1
• Pteoesng 050005
Conhvuration Patterns
U Ss,voP,o3es
Opinting System Images
1 Asabbe OS Imagas
37 Servers ethour/sctee Prstes
Seroer Paltem Oeplos 4n Progreso
Lumae
O.5a, J005
S.S Dereces Comp5iar1
O Deolceo Non-compOaet
34 C~Iiince POI,C5 SalSaS
L Image Dep1oys as Progress
Admm*hrator Achvur
Jobo
Furmwase Updates
il Utdates so Froress
a,
Active Sasslons
USOCID
IP AdOseos
RYANPR
12.34
USERO
5673
XHMCROXI 12,3.5
-
Figure 8. Lenovo XClarity Administrator dashboard
For information about Lenovo XClarity Administrator, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide
http://lenovopress.com/tipsl200
f
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
15
Fiex System Manager
Fiex System Manager (FSM) is a systems management solution that offers flexible integrated systems
management across compute, storage, and networking resources in the Fiex System infrastructure. It is
designed to help you get the most out of your IT installation while automating repetitive tasks. It can
significantly reduce the number of manual navigational steps for typical management tasks.
From simplified system setup procedures with wizards and built-in expertise to consolidated monitoring
for alt of your physical and virtual resources, FSM provides core management functionality along with
automation so that you can focus your efforts on business innovation.
The FIex System Manager compute node provides configuration and management support locally or
remotely, for up to 16 chassis, their devices, and the compute nodes. The foliowing figure shows the FIex
System Manager.
Figure 9. FIex System Manager
For information about Flex System Manager, see the Lenovo Press Product Guide:
http://Ienovopress.com/tipsO862
Power supplies
A maximum of six power supplies can be installed in the Enterprise Chassis. Either 2500W or 2100W
power supplies are available. Two 2500W power supplies are standard in model 8721 -Al x. Two 2100W
power supplies are standard in model LRx. Additional power supplies are orderable per the following
table. Al¡installed power supplies must be the same.
Table 7. Ordering part number and feature code
Description
Pail number
Feature codo
FIex System Enterprise Chassis 2500W Power Module
43W9049
AOUC
FIex System Enterprise Chassis 2100W Power Module
47C7633
A3JH
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis HVDC 2500W Power Module
00AM765
EPA9
FIex System Enterprise Chassis -48V DO 2500W Power Module
00FJ635
A5VC
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
16
Each AC power supply part number ships with one 2.0m (6.5 ft) 1 6A11 00-250V, 019 to lEO 320-C20 rack
power cable, feature 6292. Other supported AC une cords including three-way split une cords, are usted in
the following table.
Table 8. Supported AC une cords
Description
Part number
Feature code
4.3m, 16A/208V, C19 to NEMA L6-20P (US) Line Cord
40K9772
6275
2.5m, 16A/100-240V, 019 to IEC 320-C20 Rack Power Cable
39Y7916
6252
2m, 16A/100-250V, 019 to IEC 320-C20 Rack Power Cable
None
6292
4.3m, USICAN, NEMA L15-30P - (3Pi-Gnd) to 3X IEC 320 C19
00D7192
A2Y3
4.3m, EMEAJAP, IEC 309 32A (3P+N+Gnd) to 3X IEC 320 C19
00D7193
A2Y4
4.3m, AJNZ, (PDLIClipsal) 32A (3P+N+Gnd) to 3X IEC 320 019
00D7194
A2Y5
The 2500W HVDC power supply operates at either 240V DO or 380V DC (192V - 400V input range). The
power supply has a Rong-Feng RF-203P connector. The power supply includes a 2.5m DC power cord
(SBB part numberOOY9lOO).
The -48V DO power supply operates at -48V to -60V dc (nominal) and has a Molex 1060 Power
Connector. The power supply ships with one 2.Om DO power cord (FRU part number 69Y 1652)
The following figure shows the power supply and highlights the light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
Removal latch
(orange color
indicates hot-swap)
LEDs (left lo right)
• AC power
• DC power
• Fault
Puil handie
Each power supply
ships with a C19-C20
une cord
Figure 10. Power supply option
The AC power supplies are 80 PLUS Platinum-certified. The 2500W modules are 2500 Watts output rated
at 200VAC to 208VAC (nominal), and 2750W at 220VAC to 240VAC (nominal). The power supply has an
oversubscription rating of up to 3538 Watts output at 200VAC. The power supply operating range is
200-240 VAC. The power supplies also contain two dual independently powered 40mm cooling fan
modules that are powered not from the power supply itself, but from the chassis midplane. The fan
modules are variable speed and controlled by the chassis fan logic.
The 2100W power supplies are 2100 Watts output power rated at 200-240VAC. Similar to the 2500W
unit, this power supply also supponts oversubscription, the 2100W unit can run up to 2895W for short
duration. The 2100W supplies have two independently powered dual 40mm cooling fans, that pick up
power from the midplane included within the power supply assembly.
Flex System Enterprise Chassis
17
80 PLUS is a performance specification for power supplies used within servers and computers. To meet
the 80 PLUS standard, the power supply must have an effidency of 80% or greater, at 20%, 50%, and
100% of rated load with PF of .09 or greater. The standard has severa¡ grades, such as Bronze, Silver,
Gold, and Platinum. More information on 80 PLUS is available at nttp:ííwww.80PLUS.org
The 2500 W HVDC power supply operates at 240 V DO or 380 y DC. The 2500 W -48 V DO power supply
operates over a typical telecommunications range of -60 y to -48 V DC.
The chassis allows configurations of power supplies to give N+N or N+1 redundancy. A chassis can
operate on onty three power-supply units (PSUs) with no redundancy, but N+1 or N+N is advised. Three
power supplies (or six with N+N redundancy) allow for a balanced three-phase configuration.
Al¡ power supply modules are combined into a single power domain within the chassis, which distributes
power to each of the compute nodes, I/O modules, and ancillary components through the Enterprise
Chassis midplane. The midplane is a highly reliabie design with no active components. Each power
supply is designed to provide fault isolation and is hot swappable.
In the case of the 2500W supplies, power monitoring of both the DO and AC signals allows the Chassis
Management Module to accurately monitor the power supplies. Power monitoring with the 2100W power
supplies is currently not supported.
The foliowing figure shows the compute node bay numbering (Ieft) and power supply bay numbering
(right).
Rear View
Front View
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
5
6
3_ -
42
6
3
5
2
2
Node Bays
Pawer Supply Bays
Figure 11. Power supply hay numbering
The following table shows the number of compute nodes that are supported in the chassis based on the
power supplies used (2100W or 2500W), the number of power supplies instalted, and the power
redundancy policy enabted (N+1 or N+N).
In this table, the colors of the celis have the fotiowing meaning:
•
•
Green celi: Supported with no restrictions as to the number of compute nodes that can be instalted
Yellow ceil: Supported but with restrictions on the number of compute nodes that can be instalted.
Note: These tables assume the chassis is filled with idential compute nodes. For more complex
configurations, use the Power Oonfigurator:
http://ibm.com/systemsibladecenterí'resources/powerconfig.htmi
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
18
Table 9. Specific number of compute nodes supperted based on installed power supplies (Part 1)
CPU
TDP
2100W power supplies
N+1, N5
6 total
N+1, N=4
5 total
N+1, N3
4 total
2500W power supplies
N+N, N3
6 total
N+1, N=5
6 total
N+1, N=4
Sto
N+1, N=3
4 total
N+N, N=3
6 total
14
14
14
Fiex System x220
50W
14
- 14
14
14
-
60W
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
_
sow
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
95W
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
Fiex System x222
50W
14
14
13
14
14
14
14
14
60W
14
14
12
12
14
14
14
14
70W
14
14
11
12
14
14
14
14
80W
14
14
10
11
14
14
113
14
95W
14
13
9
10
14
14
- 12
13
14
11
11
14
11
FIex System x240
-
_[14
14
14
11
E14
114
14
14
14
11
11
14
14
14
14
14
11
11
14
14
14
14
115W 14
14
11
11
14
14
14
14
130W 14
14
- 11
11
.14
14
13
14
135W 14
14
11
11
14
14
13
14
14
14
114
14
- 14
14
14
14
- 14
60W
14
70W
14
80W
14
14
95W
14
FIex System x240 M5
52W
14
14
11
11
55W
14
14
11
11
65W
14
14
11
11
75W 1 14
14
11
11
14
14
14
14
85W
14
14
11
11
114
14
14
14
90W
14
14
11
11
14
14
14
14
105W 14
14
11
11
14
14
113
14
120W 14
14
11
11
14
14
13
14
135W 14
13
11
11
14
14
12
13
145W 14
13
11
11
14
14
12
13
Fiex System Ente rprise Chassis
.
19
155W(7
17
5
I
Fiex System V7000 Storage Node
All
1 14
13
13
13
3
112
19
10
[14
14
¡12
¡13
112
¡
110
¡14
¡14
1 12
113
¡12
19
19
14
j14
112
¡12
16
14
15
[7
6
¡6
N/A13
Fiex System p24L
j3
3
Fiex System p260
Al¡
¡14
Fiex System p270
All
114
Fiex System p460
Afl
17
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
I
20
Fan modules
The Enterprise Chassis supports up to a total of ten hot-swap fan modules: two 40 mm (1.57 in) fan
modules and eight 80 mm (3.14 in)fan modules.
The two 40 mm fan modules distribute airflow to the I/O modules and chassis management modules.
Both of these fan modules ship with the chassis. The 80 mm fan modules distribute airflow to the compute
nodes through the chassis from front to rear. Each 80 mm fan module actually contains two 80 mm fan
modules, back to back at each end of the module, which are counter-rotating. The following figure shows
the 80 mm fan module.
Removal latch
(orange color
indicates hot-swap)
Pul¡ handie
LEDs (left to right):
• Power on
• Fautt
Figure 12. 80 mm fan module
Four 80 mm fan modules are installed standard in chassis model 8721-Aix and OTO orders. The
maximum number of 80 mm fan modules that can be installed is eight. Ordering information is shown in
the following table. When the modules are ordered as a part number, they are supplied as a pair. The
feature codes is comprised of one fan.
Table 10. Fan module ordering information
Description
Part number
Feature code
FIex System Enterprise Chassis 80mm Fan Module
43W9078
(2 fan modules)
AOUA
(1 fan module)
The 80 mm fan modules are populated, depending on the nodes installed. To support the base
configuration and up to four nodes, chassis model 8721-Al x ships with four 80 mm fan modules and two
40 mm fan modules preinstalled. There are two cooling zones for the nodes: a Ieft zone and a right zone.
Fan modules must be installed in pairs as shown in the following figure. lf there are insufficient fan
modules for the number of nodes installed, the compute nodes might be throttled to balance heat
generation and cooling capacity.
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
21
Front View
Rear ,Viev.
13
11
11
12
9
10
Node Bays
io
9
4
Cooling zone Cooling zone
Figure 13. Fan module locations and cooling zones
The 40 mm fan modules are always required. Additional 80 mm fan modules are required as usted in the
following table.
Table 11. 80 mm fan module requirements
Descnption
80 mm fan module requirements
Up to four half-wide compute nodes (node bays 1 - 4)
4 fan modules (tan bays 1, 2, and 6, 7)
Up to eight half-wide compute nodes (node bays 1 - 8)
6 tan modules (tan bays 1, 2, 3 and 6, 7. 8)
Al¡ 14 compute node bays (node bays 1 - 14)
8 tan modules (tan bays 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6, 7, 8, 9)
Physical specifications
Dimensions:
•
•
•
•
Height: 440 mm (17.3 inches)
Width: 447 mm (17.6 in)
Depth, measured from front bezel to rear of chassis: 800 mm (31.5 in)
Depth, measured from node latch handle to the power supply handle: 840 mm (33.1 in)
Weight:
•
•
Minimum configuration: 96.62 kg (213 lb)
Maximum configuration: 220.45 kg (486 lb)
Shipping dimensions (approximate):
•
•
•
Height: 81 cm (32 in)
Length: 102 cm (40 in)
Width: 71 cm (24 in)
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
22
Supported environment
The Fiex System Enterprise Chassis compiles with ASHRAE Class A3 specifications.
The foliowing environment is the supported operating environment.
Temperatu re:
•
•
0-914m(0-3,000ft):5-40°C(41 -104°F)
914 m -3048 m (3,000 - 10,000 ft): The maximum ambienttemperature drops 1 00 for every
additional 178 m (584 ft) increase in aititude until the maximum temperature is 28 °C at 3,048 m
(10,000 ft)
Reiative humidity: 8% - 85%
Maximum altitude: 3,048 m (10,000 ft)
Etectrical power:
•
•
•
200 - 240 y ac (nominal), 50 or 60 Hz
Mínimum configuration: 0.51 kVA (twa power supplies)
Maximum configuration: 13 kVA (six power suppties)
Power consumption: 12,900 watts maximum
Thermai output, fui¡ configuration - 12,900 watts (43,900 Btu/hr)
Acousticai noise emissions for Fiex Chassis:
•
•
7.5 beis operating
7.5betsidting
The noise emission leve¡ stated is the deciared (upper timit) sound power leve¡, in beis, for a random
sampie of machines. Alt measurements are made in accordance with ¡SO 7779 and reported in
conformance with ISO 9296.
or t
-13
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
23
- 11
Warranty options
The FIex System Enterprise Chassis has a three-year on-site warranty with 9x5 next-business-day terms.
Lenovo offers the service upgrades through Lenovo Services warranty maintenance upgrades and
post-warranty maintenance agreements with a well-defined scope of services, including service hours,
response time, term of service, and service agreement terms and conditions.
Lenovo warranty service upgrade offerings are country-specific; that is, each country might have its own
service types, service levels, response times, and terms and conditions. Not ah covered types of warranty
service upgrades might be availabie in a particular country or area. For more information about Lenovo
warranty service upgrade offerings that are availabie in your country, visit the Lenovo Services website:
https://www-304.ibm .com/sales/gss/download/spstlservicepac!extProd uctSeiectorWWW do
The foliowing tabie explains warranty service definitions in more detail.
Table 12. Warranty service definitions
Term
Description
On-site
repair
A service technician wUl come to the server's location for equipment repair.
24x7x2 hour
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within four hours after remate
problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service around the clock, every day,
including Lenovo holidays.
24x7x4 hour
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within eight hours after remate
problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service around the clock, every day,
including Lenovo holidays.
9x5x4 hour
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location within four business hours after
remate problem determination is completed. Lenovo provides service 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. in the
client's local time zane, Monday - Friday, excluding Lenovo holidays.
9x5 next
business day
A service technician is scheduled to arrive at the client's location an the business day after Lenovo
receives your cali, failawing remate problem determination. Lenovo provides service 8:00 am. 5:00 p.m. in the client's local time zone, Monday - Friday, excluding Lenovo holidays. Calis
received after 4:00pm local time require an extra business day for service díspatch. Next business
day service is not guaranteed.
The foilowing types of Lenovo warranty service upgrades are available:
•
Warranty and maintenance service upgrades:
•
•
•
•
Three, four, or five years of 9x5 or 24x7 service coverage
Onsite repair from next business day to 8 or 4 hours
One or twa years of warranty extension
Priority technical support
Lenovo's Priority Support Offering enhances our award-winning cal¡ center support to provide top
priority queue assignment to speciaiized Lenovo technicians. Priority support accelerates cal¡ center
troubleshooting to get your problems resolved quickly, and inciudes other value added support for
Lenovo provided software tools. Priority support can be purchased stand-alone to match the base
warranty of your system or in convenient bundles with our same-day response services.
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
24
•
Keep Your Drive Multi-Drive
Lenovo's Keep Your Drive Multi-Drive service is a multi-drive hard drive retention offering that
ensures your data is always under your control, regardless of the number of hard drives that are
installed in your Lenovo server. In the unlikely event of a hard drive failure, you retain possession of
your hard drive while Lenovo replaces the failed drive part. Your data stays safely on your premises,
n your hands. Keep Your Drive Multi-Drive can be purchased stand-alone to match the base warranty
of your system or in convenient bundles with our same-day response services.
Regulatory compliance
The server conforms to the following standards:
•
ASHRAE Class A3
•
FCC - Verified to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Class A
•
Canada ICES-004, issue 3 Class A
•
ULIIEC 60950-1
•
CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
•
NOM-019
•
Argentina IEC 60950-1
•
Japari VCCI, Class A
•
IEC 60950-1 (CB Certificate and CB Test Report)
•
China CCC (GB4943); (G139254. Class A); (G1317625.1)
•
Taiwan BSMI CNS13438, Class A; CNS 14336
•
Australia/New Zealand ASINZS CISPR 22, Class A
•
Korea KN22, Class A, KN24
•
Russia/GOST ME01, IEC 60950-1, GOST R 51318.22, GOST R 51318.249, GOST R 51317.12,
GOST R 51317.3.3
•
CE Mark (EN55022 Class A, EN60950-1, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
•
CISPR 22, Class A
•
TUV-GS (EN60950-1/IEC 60950-1, EK1-ITB2000)
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
25
Externa¡ disk storage systems
The foliowing System x options are avaslable for attaching externa¡ storage systems to Enterpnse
Chassis:
Table 13. Externa¡ disk storage systems
Part number
Description
2071 CU2
IBM Storwize V3500 LFF Dual Control Enclosure
2071 CU3
IBM Storwize V3500 SFF Dual Control Enclosure
6099L2C
IBM Storwize V3700 3.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099S2C
IBM Storwize V3700 2.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099T2C
IBM Storwize V3700 2.5-inch DC Storage Controller Unit
61941-2C
IBM Storwize V5000 LFF Control Enclosure
6194LEU
IBM Storwize V5000 LFF Expansion Enclosure
6194S2C
IBM Storwize V5000 SFF Control Enclosure
6194SEU
IBM Storwize V5000 SFF Expansion Enclosure
6195SC5
IBM Storwize V7000 2.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6195LEF
IBM Storwize V7000 3.5-inch Storage Expansion Unit
6195SEF
IBM Storwize V7000 2.5-inch Storage Expansion Unit
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
26
Top-of-rack Ethernet switches
For enterprise-class installations with multiple Fiex System Enterprise Chassis configurations, a
top-of-rack Ethernet switch from Lenovo provides the necessary leve¡ of networking between racks of
systems and the rest of your production network. The foliowing table Iists the available top-of-rack
switches
Table 14. Top-of-rack switches
Part riumber
Description
1 Gb top-of-rack switches
7159BAX
Lenovo RackSwitch G7028 (Rear to Front)
7159CAX
Lenovo RackSwitch G7052 (Rear to Front)
715952F
Lenovo RackSwitch G8052 (Front to Rear)
7159G52
Lenovo RackSwitch G8052 (Rear to Front)
10 Gb top-of-rack switches
7159BF7
Lenovo RackSwitch G8124E (Front to Rear)
7159BR6
Lenovo RackSwitch G8124E (Rear to Front)
715964F
Lenovo RackSwitch G8264 (Front to Rear)
7159G64
Lenovo RackSwitch G8264 (Rear to Front)
7159DFX
Lenovo RackSwitch G82640S (Front to Rear)
7159DRX
Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS (Rear to Front)
7159CFV
Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 (Front to Rear)
7159CRW
Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 (Rear to Front)
7159GR5
Lenovo RackSwitch G8296 (Front to Rear)
7159GR6
Lenovo RackSwitch G8296 (Rear to Front)
40 Gb top-of-rack switches
7159BFX
Lenovo RackSwitch G8332 (Front to Rear)
71 59BRX
Lenovo RackSwitch G8332 (Rear to Front)
O358
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
27
Power distribution units
Power planning for an FIex System Enterprise Chassis ¡s essential.
The Enterprise Chassis has a maximum of six power supplies insta Iled. So, careful consideration must be
given to providing the best power-optimized source. Both N+N and N+1 configurations are supported for
maximum flexibility in power redundancy. Each AC power supply in the chassis has a 16A C20 three-pin
socket and can be fed by a 019 power cable, from a suitable supply.
The chassis has the ability to accommodate a maximum of six power supplies, so it is possible to balance
a three-phase power input into a single chassis or a group of chassis. The chassis power system is
designed for efficiency using data center power consisting of three-phase, 60A Delta 200 VAC (North
America) or three-phase 32A wye 380-415 VAC (international). The chassis can also be fed from
single-phase 200 - 240VAC supplies, if required.
For further details, see the Fiex System Enterprise Chassis PowerRequirements Guide, available from:
http://ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/resources/powerconfig.htmi
Table 15. Power distribution units
Part number
—FEZcription
Switched and monitored AC PDUs
46M4002
1U 9019/3 C13 Active Energy Manager DPI® PDU
46M4003
1U 9 C19/3 013 Active Energy Manager 60A 3 Phase PDU
46M4167
1U 9 C19/3 013 Switched and Monitored 30A 3 Phase PDU
46M4134
OU 12 C19/12 013 Switched and Monitored 50A3 Phase PDU
46M4140
0U 12019/12013 50A 3 Phase PDU
Enterprise AC PDUs
71762MX
Ultra Density Enterprise PDU 019 PDU+ (WW)
71762NX
Ultra Density Enterprise PDU 019 PDU (WW)
71763MU
Ultra Density Enterprise PDU 019 3 phase 60A PDU+ (NA)
71763NU
Ultra Density Enterprise PDU C19 3 phase 60A PDU (NA)
39Y8923
DPI 60A Three Phase 019 Enterprise PDU with 1E0309 3P+G (208 V) fixed une cord
39Y8948
DPI Single Phase 019 Enterprise PDU without line cord
Front-end AC PDUs
39Y8934
DPI 32amp/250V Front-end PDU with IEC 309 2P+Grid connector
39Y8938
30amp/125V Front-end PDU with NEMA L5-30P connector
39Y8939
30amp/250V Front-end PDU with NEMA L6-30P connector
39Y8940
60amp/250V Front-end PDU with IEC 309 60A 2P+N+Gnd connector
OC PDUs
44T0966
1U HigherVoltage DC PDU (240V/380V)
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
28
Uninterruptible power supply units
The Fiex System Enterprise Chassis supports attachments to the uninterruptible power supply units Usted
in the foliowing table.
Table 16. Uninterruptible power supply units
Part number
Descnption
55946KX
RT6kVA 3U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55948KX
RT8kVA 6U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55949KX
RT1 1 kVA 6U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55948PX
RT8kVA 6U 3:1 Phase Rack or Tower UPS (380-41 5VAC)
55949PX
RT1 1kVA 6U 3:1 Phase Rack or Tower UPS (380-415VAC)
21303RX
Uninterruptible Power Supply 7500XHV
21304RX
Uninterruptible Power Supply 10000XHV
53956AX
6000VA LCD 4U Rack Uninterruptible Power Supply (200 V/208 V)
53956KX
6000VA LCD 4U Rack Uninterruptible Power Supply (230 V)
53959KX
11 000VA LCD 5U Rack Uninterruptible Power Supply (230V)
For more information, see the related Lenovo Press Product Guides in the Power infrastructure category:
http://Ienovopress.com/systemx/power
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
29
Rack cabinets
The Fiex System Enterprise Chassis ¡s supported in the rack cabinets as usted in the foliowing table. The
suggested rack for Fiex System is the 421-1 1100 mm Enterprise V2 Deep Dynamic Rack, 93634PX.
Table 17. Rack cabinets
Part
number
Feature
code
Rack cabinet
Supported
93634FX
Al RC
42U 1100 mm Enterprise V2 Deep Dynamic Rack
Recommended
93634EX
Al RD
42U 1100 mm Dynamic Enterprise V2 Expansion Rack
Recommended
93634CX
A3GR
PureFlex System 42U Rack
Recommended
93634DX
A3GS
PureRex System 42U Expansion Rack
Recommended
93634AX
A31 F
PureFlex System 42U Rack
Recommended
93634BX
A31
PureFlex System 42U Expansion Rack
Recommended
201886X
2731
11 U Office Enablement Kit
Yes*
93072PX
6690
S2 25U Static Standard Rack
Yes
93072RX
1042
S225UDynamic Standard Rack
Yes
93074RX
1043
S2 42U Standard Rack
Yes
99564RX
5629
S242UDynamic Standard Rack
Yes
99564XX
5631
S2 42U Dynamic Standard Expansion Rack
Yes
93084PX
5621
42U Enterprise Rack
Yes
93084EX
5622
42U Enterprise Expansion Rack
Yes
93604PX
7649
42U 1200 mm Deep Dynamic Rack
Yes
93604EX
7650
421-11200 mm Deep Dynamic Expansion Rack
Yes
93614PX
7651
42U 1200 mm Deep Static Rack
Yes
936 14EX
7652
42U 1200 mm Deep Static Expansion Rack
Yes
93624PX
7653
47U 1200 mm Deep Static Rack
Yes
93624EX
7654
47U 1200 mm Deep Static Expansion Rack
Yes
141 O2RX
1047
eServer Cluster 25U Rack
Yes
14104RX
1048
Linux Cluster 42U Rack
Yes
9306-900
None
Netfinity® Rack
No
9306-910
None
Netfinity Rack
No
9306-42P
None
Netfinity Enterprise Rack
No
9306-42X
None
Netfinity Enterprise Rack Expansion Cabinet
No
9306-200
None
Netfinity NetBAY 22
No
* This Office Enablement kit is specifically designed for the BladeCenter S Chassis. The Fiex System Enterprise
Chassis can be installed in this kit with 1 U of space remaining, however the noise generated by the chassis may not
be acceptable for off ice use.
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
30
Rack options
The server supports the rack console switches and monitor kits usted in the foliowing table.
Table 18. Rack options
Part number
Feature codo
Description
Monitor kits and keyboard trays
1 7238BX
1723HC1 fc A3EK
1 U 18.5' Standard Console
17238EX
1723HC1 fcA3EL
1U 18.5" Enhanced Media Console
172317X
1723HC1 fc 0051
1 17in Fiat Panel Console Kit
172319X
1723HC1 fc 0052
1U 19in Fiat Panel Console Kit
3858D3X
3858HC1 fc A4X1
Avocent Universal Management Gateway 6000
1754D2X
1754HC2 fc 6695
Global 4x2x32 Console Manager (GCM32)
1754D1X
1754HC1 fc 6694
Global 2x2x16 Console Manager (GCM16)
1 754A2X
1754HC4 fc 0726
Local 2x16 Console Manager (LCM16)
1754A1X
1754HC3 fc 0725
Local 1x8 Console Manager (LCM8)
00AK142
A4X4
UM KVM Module VGA+SD Dual RJ45
43V6147
3757
Single Cable USB Conversion Option (UCO)
39M2895
3756
USB Conversion Option (4 Pack UCO)
39M2897
3754
Long KVM Conversion Option (4 Pack Long KCO)
46M5383
5341
Virtual Media Conversion Option Gen2 (VCO2)
46M5382
5340
Serial Conversion Option (SCO)
Console switches
Console cables
For more information, see the related Lenovo Press Product Guides in the Power infrastructure category:
http://lenovopress.com/systemx/rack
J
FIex System Enterprise Chassis
r13 r' [j
31
Related publications and Iinks
For more information, see the foliowing resources:
•
Fiex System product page
http://ibm.com/systems/flex
•
•
US Product Announcement for the Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
http://ibm.com/common/ssi/cgi-binlssialias?infotypedd&subtype=ca&&htmlfid=897/ENUS 112-053
Flex System Information Center
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/informationhindex.jsp
•
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis Installation and Service Guide
http://publib.bouder.ibm.com/infocenter/fiexsys/information/topic/com ibm .acc.8721 .doc/printabledoc.html
•
ServerProven hardware compatibility page for Fiex System
http:/lwwwibm.com/systems/info/x86serverslserverproven/compat/us/
•
FIex System lnteroperability Guide
http://lenovopress.com/fsig
•
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis Power Requirements Guide
http://ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/resources/powerconfig. html
•
Lenovo FIex System Products and Technology. SG24-8255
http://lenovopress.com/sg248255
•
Lenovo Press Product Guides for Fiex System servers and options
http:Illenovopress.comlflexsystem
•
System x and Cluster Solutions configurator (x-config)
http://ibm.com/products/hardware/configurator/americas/bhui/asit/
•
System x Configuration and Options Guide
http:I/ibm.com/systems/xbcicog/
•
ServerProven for Fiex System
http:I/ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/flexsystems. html
•
IBM System Storage® Interoperation Center
http://www.ibm.com/systemsIsupport/storage/ssic
Fiex System Enterprise Chassis
32
Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or featu res discussed in this document in afl countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently avaihable in your area. Any
reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and
verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent
apphications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any hicense to these patents. You can send license inquines, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCI-IANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not ahhow disclairner of
express or imphied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could inchude technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodicahhy made to the
information herein; these changes wihh be incorporated in new editions of the pubhication. Lenovo may make
irnprovernents and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this pubhication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other hife support apphications
where malfunction may resuht ¡n injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express
or imphied ¡¡cense or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third panties. AV information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an ihhustration. The resuht
obtained in other operating environments may va ny. Lenovo may use or distnibute any of the information you supply
in any way it behieves appropriate without incurring any obhigation to you.
Any references in this pubhication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materiahs
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was
determined in a control led envinonment. Therefore, the nesult obtained in other operating environments may vary
significantly. Sorne measurements may have been made on development-leve¡ systems and thene is no guanantee
that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Funthermore, sorne measurements may
have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vany. Users of this document shouhd verify the
apphicable data for their specific environment.
© copyright Lenovo 2012-2015. AH rights reserved.
Fhex System Enterprise Chassis
33
This document was created or updated on AprU 28, 2015.
Send us your comments in one of the following ways:
Use the online Contact us review form found at:
•
ibm.com/redbooks
Send your comments in an e-mail to:
•
redbooks@us.ibm.com
This document is available online at http://Ienovopress.com/tipsO8G3.
Trademarks
Lenovo, For Those Who Do and the Lenovo logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in
the United States, other countries, or both. These and other Lenovo trademarked terms are marked on
their first occurrence in this infomiation with the appropriate symbol (® or TM) indicating US registered or
common law trademarks owned by Lenovo at the time this information was published. Such trademarks
may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of Lenovo trademarks
is available on the Web at http://www.lenovo.com/legal/copytrade.html.
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
BladeCenter®
Fiex SystemTM
Lenovo®
Netfinity®
RackSwitchTM
Lenovo(logo)G)
ServerProven®
System x®
TopSellerTM
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside logo, and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Flex System Enterprise Chassis
34
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable
Switches
Product Guide
The Lenovo FIex SystemTM FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch offerings are Gen 5 Fibre Channel (FC)
embedded modules for Lenovo Fiex System. With up to 48 ports that operate at 16 and 8 Gbps FC speeds,
each module provides up to 28 interna¡ ports to compute nodes through the Fiex System midplane and up
to 20 externa¡ SFP+ ports.
The FC5022 SAN switch modules deliver unmatched scalability and flexibility for Fiex System users wanting
to connect directly into 8 or 16 Gbps FC storage or to an upstream storage area network (SAN). The FC5022
can be configured in the Access Gateway mode using NPIV for simple upstream connectivity or in the FulI
Fabric more for more advance switching as a part of the larger Fibre Channel fabric.
The switch off ers end-to-end 16 Gb with backwards compatibility to 8 Gb and 4 Gb to the SAN
connectivity. Monitoring and management are simplified using end-to-end Brocade tools, such as Web
Tools and the Brocade Network Advisor (BNA).
The following figure shows the switch module.
Figure 1. Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch
Did you know?
Only the FC5022 provides up to 48 FC ports in an embedded form factor which provides FIex System a
unique differentiation in the market, including the following:
• Increased I/O density: Support for 64 Gbps per compute node with only a pair of FC5022 switches
can help clients reduce costs on hardware, utility costs and management or operational costs with
fewer devices.
• Greater reliability: When used with 4-port FC mezzanine adapters, the 28 interna¡ ports enable
increased solution availability with greater path redundancy from the ASICs to the modules for no
single point of failure.
• MuIti-chassis scalability: The 20 externa¡ SFP+ ports allow for scaling up to 18 chassis without the
use of external FC switches, such as FC top-of-rack (T0R) switches, thereby greatly reducing the
overall cost of the FIex System solution.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
Ordering information
The part numbers to order the switch and optional upgrades are shown ¡n the following table.
Table 1. Part numbers and feature codes for ordering
Part number
Feature
code
88Y6374
Al EH
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 24-port 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch (includes two 16Gb 00Y3324
SFPs)
A3DP
rDescription
Switch modules
Lenovo FIex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch
Lenovo FIex System FC5022 24-port 16Gb ESB SAN Scalable Switch
190Y9356
IA2RQ
Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch-Upgrade 1 (12-ports)
88Y6382
A1EP
Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switch-Upgrade 2 (24-ports)
88Y6386
Al EQ
FIex System FC5022 16Gb ISL!Trunking Upgrade
00Y3322
A3HP
Features on Demand upgrades
The part numbers for the switches include the following items:
• One FIex System FC5022 16 Gb SAN Scalable Switch (1 2-port, or 24-port, or 24-port with ESB)
• Two 16 Gb SFP+ optical transceivers (included with 24-port 16 Gb SAN Scalable Switch, part
number 00Y3324)
• lmportant Notices Flyer
• Warranty Flyer
• Documentation CD-ROM
The part numbers for the Features on Demand upgrades include the following items:
• Features on Demand Activation Flyer
• Upgrade authorization letter
The switch does not include a serial management cable, however, Fiex System Management Serial Access
Cable, part number 90Y9338, is supported and contains two cables, a mini-USB-to-RJ45 serial cable and a
mini-USB-to-DB9 serial cable, either of which can be used to connect to the switch locally for conf iguration
tasks and firmware updates.
The FC5022 12-port and 24-port ESB SAN switches come without SFP+ media, which must be ordered
separately to provide outside connectivity. The FC5022 24-port SAN switch (part number 00Y3324) comes
standard with two Brocade 16 Gb SFP+ transceivers. Additional SFP+ can be ordered, if required. The
following table lists the supported SFP+ options.
Table 2. Supported SFP+ transceivers
Description
Part number
Feature
code
Max qty
supported
Brocade 16 Gb SW SFP+ Optical Transceiver
88Y6393
A22R
20
Brocade 16GB 10KM LW SFP+ Transceiver
00MY768
ASK2
Brocade 16GB 25KM ELW SFP+ Transceiver
00MY770
ASK3
20
20*
16 Gb FC SFP+ transceivers
8 Gb FC SFP+ transceivers
Brocade 8Gb SW SFP+ Optical Transceiver
Lenovo FIex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
88Y6416
15084
120
Description
Part number
Feature
code
Max qty
supported
Brocade 8GB 10KM LW SFP+ Transceiver
00MY764
ASKO
20
Brocade 8GB 25KM ELW SFP+ Transceiver
00MY766
1 ASK1
20*
00MN498
ASR5
20
l LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN502
ASR6
20
Lenovo 3m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN505
ASR7
20
Lenovo 5m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN508
ASR8
20
Optical cables for 8 Gb and 16 Gb FC SW SFP+ transceivers
Lenovo 0.5m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
Lenovo
Lenovo lOm LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
OOMN511
ASR9
20
Lenovo 15m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN514
ASRA
20
Lenovo 25m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN517
ASRB
20
Lenovo 30m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN520
ASRC
20
* When using ELW SFPs ayer distances over 10 km, the Extended Fabric feature is required on a SAN switch to drive the
maximum bandwidth over the extended links. The Extended Fabric feature is included in the FC5022 ESB switch module (part
number 90Y9356). The ELW SFPs are not available for selection for the non-ESB FC5022 switch modules (part numbers
88Y6374 and 00Y3324).
The foliowing table provides a feature comparison by model for Fiex System FC5022 switches.
Table 3. Feature comparison by model
24-port 16 Gb ESB
SAN switch
24-port 16 Gb SAN 16 Gb SAN
switch
switch
Number of licensed ports
24
24
12
Number of SFP+ included
0
2 x 16 Gb SFP+
O
Fui¡ fabric
Included
Included
Included
Access Gateway
Included
Included
Included
Feature
Advanced zoning
Included
Included
Included
Enhanced Group Management
Included
Included
Included
Adaptive Networking
Included
Included
Included
ISL Trunking
Included
Optional
Optional
Fabric Vision*
Included
Not available
Not available
Advanced Performance Monitoring
Included
Not available
Not available
Fabric Watch
Included
Not available
Not available
Extended Fabrics
Included
Not available
Not available
Server Application Optimization
Included
Not available
Not available
* With Fabric OS 7.2 and aboye, the Brocade Fabric 'lisian functionality is included with the 24-port 16 GB ESB SAN switch,
but may not be displayed as an individual license key. The functionality may instead be displayed along with the Fabric Watch
and Advanced Performance Monitoring license descriptions with the added verbiage Fabric 'lisian Capable.
Ø33
Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
The foliowing table provides compatibility information for the switch modules and Features on Demand
upgrades for them.
Table 4. Features on Demand upgrade compatibility
Features on Demand upgrade
Part
number
24-port 16 Gb
ESB SAN switch
24-port 16 Gb
SAN switch
16 Gb SAN
switch
Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN
Scalable Switch-Upgrade 1 (12-ports)
88Y6382
No
No
Ves
Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN
Scalable Switch-Upgrade 2 (24-ports)
88Y6386
Yes
Ves
Ves
Fiex System FC5022 16Gb lSLfírunking 00Y3322
Upgrade
No*
Yes
Ves
* Ths feature is already included in the bundle.
With Brocade's Dynamic Ports on Demand (DPOD) feature, ports are licensed in one of two methods: as
they come online oras selected by the administrator. With the 16 Gb SAN switch, the first 12 ports
reporting (on a first-come, first-served basis) on boot-up are assigned ¡¡censes. These 12 ports can be any
combination of externa¡ or internal Fibre Channel (FC) ports. After all port ¡¡censes have been assigned, you
can manually move those hicenses from one port to another. Because this is dynamic, no defined ports are
reserved except ports O and 29. The 24-port 16 Gb SAN switches have the same behavior; the only
difference is the number of ports, which is 24.
The following table shows the total number of port licenses on the switch after applying compatible port
upgrades.
Note: A maximum of one upgrade of each type (one Upgrade 1 and ore Upgrade 2) is supported per one
switch module. Upgrade 1 and Upgrade 2 can be apphied independently of each other.
Table 5. Ports on Demand upgrades
Ports on Demand upgrade
Total number of port licenses
24-port 16 Gb ESB
SAN switch
24-port 16 Gb SAN 12-port 16 Gb
switch
SAN switch
hncluded with base
24
24
12
Upgrade 1 88Y6382 only (adds 12 port hicenses)
Not supported
48*
Not supported
48*
24
Not supported
Not supported
Upgrade 2, 88Y6386 only (adds 24 port licenses)
Both Upgrade 1, 88Y6382 and Upgrade 2,
88Y6386 (add 36 port ¡¡censes)
36
48*
1
* With the dual-port FC adapters installed in compute nodes, up to 34 ports (14 internal, 20 externa¡) can be utilized. The
remaining 14 intemal ports require use of the 4-port FC adapters in the server's FE.
Benefits
The switches offer the fohtowing key benefits:
• Exceptional price/performance for growing SAN workloads
The FC5022 16 Gbps switch dehivers exceptional price/performance for growing SAN workloads
through a combination of market-Ieading 1600 MB/sec throughput per port and an affordable highdensity, 12-port to 48-port form factor.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
4
Enhanced server performance while using 16 Gb Gen 5 FC technology
Using 16 Gb FC adapters on the server and the FC5022 modules can help achieve the following
server enhancements, even if 8 Gb FC storage is used:
• Up to 30-50% better virtual machine density and higher number of concurrent users due to
increased storage bandwidth
• Up to 20-40% fewer servers required to support the workload specified
• Twice lower number and higher speed of inter-switch línks required in scalable SANs
• Higher reliability and availability of services due to fewer number of components used to build
the solution
• Twice faster access to the business critica¡ data
• Lower acquisition costs due to fewer number of systems and components
• Shorten ROl time frame and decrease overali TCO with the efficient utilization of server
resources and lower power, cooling, and management costs
See Lenovo Press paper "Positioning Fiex System 16 Gb Fibre Channel Fabric for Storage-lntensive
Enterprise Workloads" for detaUs:
liltp-.iiienovopress.com/i-edp492l
• Superior scalability for interna¡ and externa¡ ports that reduces costs and increases availability
The FC5022 16 Gb switch is the only switch that provides up to 28 ¡nternal server facing FC ports,
which allows the Fiex System chassis to scale to 28 compute nodes in a single chassis (when using
double density half-width compute nodes) that lowers the overali per-server cost of the solution.
These 28 internal ports also enable greater path redundancy for ITEs using the 4-port FC mezzanine
adapters. Additionally, the FC5022 offers an industry leading 20 externa¡ SFP+ ports that altows for
multi-chassis scalability up to 18 chassis without the use of externa¡ FC switches, thereby greatly
reducing the overaU cost of the Fiex Solution.
• Accelerating fabric deployment and serviceability with Brocade ClearLink and Fabric Vision
Brocade ClearLink is a feature supported by the FC5022 16 Gb Switch that enables administrators to
quickly identify and isolate 16 Gbps optíc, port, and cable problems, reducing fabric deptoyment and
diagnostic times. Brocade Fabric Vision Technology offers innovative diagnostic, monitoring, and
management capabilities to help administrators avoid problems, maximize application performance,
and reduce operational costs.
• A building block for virtualized, private cloud storage
The FC5022 16 Gb Switch supports multi-tenancy in cloud environments through VM-aware end-toend visibility and monitoring, Quality of Service (QoS), and fabric-based advanced zoning features.
The FC5022 enables secure long distance extensions to virtual private or hybrid clouds with dark
fiber support, as well as in-flight encryption and data compression.
• Seamless integration with the existing Brocade fabric in Fui¡ Fabric mode
The FC5022 switch in Fuil Fabric mode provides native support for the advanced fabric features of
the Brocade SAN fabric.
• Simplified interconnect to existing SAN environments with Brocade Access gateway (NPIV)
operational mode
Al¡modeis of the FC5022 16 Gb Switch can be deployed as an Access Gateway, which simphifies
fabric topologies and heterogeneous fabric connectivity. Access Gateway mode utihizes N_Port ID
Virtualization (NPIV) switch standards to present physical and virtual servers directly to the core of
SAN fabrics. This makes it transparent to the SAN fabric, greathy reducing management of the
network edge. The FC5022 Scalable Switch in Access Gateway mode can connect servers to NPIVenabled SAN fabrics, including Brocade or Cisco SAN fabrics.
• Maximizing investments
To help optimize technology investments, Lenovo offers a single point of serviceabihity backed by
industry-renowned education, support, and training. In addition, the Lenovo 16/8 Gbps SAN Scalable
Switch is in the ServerProven® program, ensuring compatibility among a variety of Lenovo and
partner products.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
5
Features and specifications
The FC5022 16 Gb Switches have the foflowing features and specifications:
• Interna! ports
o 28 interna! full-duplex 16/8 Gb FC ports
o Interna! ports operate as FLports (fabric ports) in native mode or in access gateway mode
o Two interna! full-duplex 1 GbE ports connected to the chassis management module
o Support for the 2-port and 4-port FC adapter cards
• Externa¡ ports
o 20 externa! ports for 16 Gb or 8 Gb SFP+ transceivers supporting 4 Gb, 8 Gb, and 16 Gb port
speeds (supported SFP+ modules are listed in Table 2). Ports are auto-sensing and activated
with the Dynamic Ports on Demand feature.
o External ports can operate as F_ports (fabric ports) or E_ports (expansion ports) in native
mode or as N_ports NPIV (node ports) in Access Gateway mode
o One externa¡ 1 GbE port (1 00013ASE-1) with RJ-45 connector for switch configuration and
management (lPv4 and IPv6 support)
o One RS-232 serial port (mini-USB connector) that provides an additional means to configure
the switch module
• Access Gateway mode (N_Port ID Virtualization - NPIV) support
• Mirror Port (M-Port) allows you to mirror traffic to an externa! port between a specific host and target
• Power-an self-test diagnostics and status reporting
• lnter-Switch Link (ISL) Trunking (licensable or included with the 24-port ESB model), which allows up
to eight ports (at 16, 8, or 4 Gbps speeds) to combine to form a single, logical ISL with a speed of up
to 128 Gbps (256 Gbps fui¡ duplex) for optimal bandwidth utilization, automatic path failover, and
load balancing
• Fabric OS (FOS) version 7.0.x or higher, which delivers distributed intelligence throughout the
network and enables a wide range of value-added applications, such as Advanced Web Tools and
Advanced Fabric Services (on certain models)
• Supports up to 768 Gbps end-to-end full-duplex aggregated bandwidth
• 420 million frames switch per second, 0.7 microseconds Iatency
• 8192 buffers for up to 3750 km extended distance at 4 Gbps FC (Extended Fabrics ¡¡cense required)
• In-flight 64 Gbps FC compression and decompression support on up to two externa! ports (no
license required)
• In-flight 32 Gbps encryption and decryption en up to two externa! ports (no license required)
• 48 Virtual Channels (VCs) per port
• Fabric scalability of up to 239 switches in Ful! Fabric mode
• Port mirroring to monitor ingress or egress traffic from any port within the switch
• Two 120 con nections able te interface to redundant management modules
• Hot pluggable switches in the chassis and SFP+ optical transceivers in the switches
• Single fuse circuit
• Four temperature sensors
• One internal real-time clock
• Managed with Web Tools
• Supports up to 128 domains in Native mode and !nteroperability mode
• Fui¡ fabric switch mode may be changed to or from Access Gateway mode
• Nondisruptive code load in Native mode and Access Gateway (NPIV) mode
• 255 NPIV NJDort Jogins per physical port
Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Sealable Switches
la
• D_port support Qn externa¡ ports (1 6Gbps SFP+ only)
• Class 2 and Class 3 trames Class of Service
• Registered State Change Notification (RSCN)
• FTP support for firmware upgrades
• SNMP/MIB monitoring functionality contained within the Ethernet Control MIB-11 (RFC1213-MIB)
• UUID put into MIB structure
• End-to-end optics and link validation
• Ability to send switch events and syslogs to the Chassis Management Module (CMM)
• Traps identify cold start, warm start, link up/Iink down, and authentication failure events
• Support for lPv4 and lPv6 Qn the management ports
• Advanced SAN Fabric Services
o Bottleneck Detection
o Dynamic Fabric Provisioning (DFP)
o Dynamic Path Selection (DPS)
o Enhanced BB credit recovery
o FDMI
o Frame Redirection
o Frame-based Trunking
o FSPF
o IPoFC
o Management Server
o NPIV
o NTPv3
o Port Fencing
o Reliable Commit Service (ROS)
o Simple Name Server (SNS)
• Software management
o HTTPS
o SNMP vl/v3 (FE MIB, FC Management MIB)
o SSH
o Auditing
o Syslog
o APM
o Network Advisor (base edition standard, ProPlus or Enterprise optional license)
o Command Line Interface (CLI)
o SMI-S compliant
o Administrative Domains
• Security management
o AES-GCM-256 encryption Qn ISLs
o DH-CHAP (between switches and end devices)
o FCAP switch authentication
o FIPS 140-2 L2-compliant
o HTTPS
o IPsec
o IP filtering
o LDAP with IPv6
o POrt Binding
o RADIUS
o User-defined Role-Based Access Control (RBAC)
o Secure Copy (SCP)
o Secure RPC
o SFTP
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
Or:c3;5
7
o
o
o
o
o
SSHv2
SSL
Switch Binding
Trusted Switch
Diagnostics
o Dj'ort off line diagnostics (16 Gbps optics only)
• Electrical/optical loopback
• Link traffic/latency/distance
o POST and embedded online/offline diagnostics
• Environmental monitoring
• FCping
• Pathinfo (FC traceroute)
• Frame viewer
• Non-disruptive daemon restart
• Port mirroring
• Optics health monitoring
• Power monitoring
• RAS trace logging
• Rolling Reboot Detection (RRD)
9
Fiex System FC5022 switches come standard with the foUowing software features:
• Fui¡ Fabric mode: Enables high performance 16 Gb or 8 Gb fabric switching
• Access Gateway mode: Leverages NPIV to connect to any fabric without adding switch domains to
reduce management complexity
• Dynamic Path Selection: Enables exchange-based load balancing across multiple lnter-Switch Links
for superior performance
• Advanced Zoning: Segments a SAN into virtual private SANs to increase security and availability
• Enhanced Group Management: Enables centralized and simplífied management of SAN fabrics
through Brocade Network Advisor
• Server Application Optimization: Aliows VM QoS, authentication, and monitoring from SAN through
adapter to VM and associated virtualized application
The 24-port ESB model (part number 90Y9356) is a fully enabled switch with a complete set of licensed
features that maximizes performance, ensures availability, and simplifies management for the most
demanding applications and expanding virtualízation environments. The factory-installed licenses include:
• ISL Trunking: Consolidates ISLs into fault-tolerant and load-balanced trunks with bandwidth of up to
128 Gbps for greater performance and simplified management
• Adaptive Networking: Ensures high-priority connections that obtain the bandwidth necessary for
optimum performance
• Advanced Performance Monitoring: Provides end-to-end visibility into fabric performance to
maximize performance tuning and the utilization of fabric resources
• Fabric Watch: Monitors and creates alerts based on the health of switch and fabric elements
• Extended Fabrics: Extends Fibre Channel SANs beyond traditional distance limitations for replication
and backup at fui¡ bandwidth
Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
8
Fibre Channel standards
The switch supports the following FC standards:
• FC-AL-2 INCITS 332: 1999
• FC-GS-5 ANSI INCITS 427 (includes the following):
• FC-GS-4 ANSI INCITS 387: 2004
• FC-IFR INCITS 1745-D, revision 1.03 (under development)
• FC-SW-4 INCITS 418:2006 (includes the following):
• FC-SW-3 INCITS 384: 2004
• FC-VI INCITS 357:2002
• FC-TAPE INCITS TR-24: 1999
• FC-DA INCITS TR-36; 2004 (includes the following):
• FC-FLA INCITS TR-20: 1998
• FC-PLDA INCIT S TR-1 9: 1998
• FC-MI-2 ANSVINCITS TR-39-2005
• FC-PI INCITS 352:2002
• FC-PI-2 INCITS 404: 2005
• FC-PI-4 INCITS 1647-D, revision 7.1 (under developmerit)
• FC-PI-5 INCITS 479: 2011
• FC-FS-2 ANSI/INCITS 424:2006 (includes the following):
• FC-FS INCITS 373: 2003
• FC-LS INCITS 433:2007
• FC-BB-3 INCITS 414: 2006 (includes the following):
• FC-BB-2 INCITS 372: 2003
• FC-SB-3 INCITS 374: 2003 (replaces FC-SB ANSI X3.271:1996; FC-SB-2 INCITS 374: 2001)
• RFC 2625 IP and ARP Over FC
• RFC 2837 Fabric Element MIB
• MIB-FA INCITS TR-32: 2003
• FCP-2 INCITS 350: 2003 (replaces FCP ANSI M.269:1996)
• SNIA Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) Version 1.2 (includes the following):
• SNIA Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) Version 1.03 ¡SO standard
IS24775-2006. Replaces (ANSI INCITS 388: 2004)
• SNIA Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) Version 1.1.0
• SNIA Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) Version 1.2.0
fl•
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
9
Chassis and adapter cards
The switches are installed in switch bays in the rear of the Fiex System chassis, as shown in the foliowing
figure. Switches are normally installed in pairs since ports on the I/O adapter cards installed in the compute
nodes are routed to two switch bays for redundancy and performance.
Figure 2. Location of the switch bays in the Fiex System chassis
The fotiowing table shows compatibitity information for the FC5022 and Fiex System chassis.
Table 6. FIex System chassis compatibility
Description
Part
number
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable
Switch
88Y6374
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 24-port 16Gb SAN
Scalable Switch
00Y3324
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 24-port 16Gb ESB SAN
Scalable Switch
90Y9356
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enterprise
Chassis
with CMM
Enterprise
Chassis
with CMM2
Carrier-grade
Chassis with
CMM2
The Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches can be installed in bays 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Fiex
System chassis. A supported adapter card must be installed in a corresponding siot of the compute node
(slot 1 when switches are installed in bays 1 and 2 or slot 2 when switches are in bays 3 and 4).
With compute nodes that have an integrated dual-port 10 GbE network interface controller (NIC) these
switches can only be installed in bays 3 and 4 because integrated NIC ports are routed to bays 1 and 2 with
a specialized periscope connector and the FC adapter card cannot be installed in the slot 1. When needed,
however, the periscope connector can be replaced with an FC adapten card, in which case the integrated
NilO will be disabled and FC switches can be used in bays 1 and 2.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
10
The following table shows the connections between dual-port and 4-port FC adapters installed in the
compute nodes other than x222 to the switch bays in the chassis with FIex System FC5022 16 Gb SAN
Scalable Switches.
Table 7. Adapter to I/O bay correspondence
I/O adapter siot in the server
Port on the adapter
Corresponding I/O module bay in the chassis
SIot 1
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 3
Module bay 1
Port 4
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port2
Module bay 4
Port 3
Module bay 3
Port 4
Module bay 4
Port 1
Module bay 1
Port 2
Module bay 2
Port 3
Module bay 1
Port4
Module bay 2
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port 2
Module bay 4
Port 3
Module bay 3
Port 4
Module bay 4
SIot 2
SIot 3
(full-wide compute nodes only)
Slot 4
(full-wide compute nodes only)
The following table shows the connections between 4-port adapters installed in the x222 compute nodes to
the switch bays in the chassis with FIex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches.
Table 8. x222 adapter to I/O bay correspondence
Server
FC5024D 4-port
16Gb FC Adapter
Corresponding I/O module
bay in the chassis
Upper server
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port2
Module bay 4
Port 1
Module bay 3
Port 2
Module bay 4
Lower server
With the x222, each node bay consumes four pons on the switch, therefore, additional port licenses might
be needed depending on your configuration (see Table 1 for FaO port upgrades).
L
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
11
The foliowing table lists the storage I/O adapters supported by the FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches.
With 8 Gb FC adapters, internal portS Qn a switch operate at 8 Gb speeds.
Table 9. Storage adapters
Part number
Feature
code
FIex System FC5022 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
88Y6370
Al BP
FIex System FC5024D 4-port 16Gb FC Adapter
95Y2379
A3HU
Fiex System FC5052 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
95Y2386
EC23
FIex System FC5054 4-port 16Gb FC Adapter
95Y2391
EC2E
Fiex System FC5172 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
69Y1 942
AlBO
Flex System FC3172 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
69Y1938
A1BM
Flex System FC3052 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter
95Y2375
A2N5
Description
16 Gb Fibre Channel
8 Gb Fibre Channel
r
Connectors and LEDs
The following figure shows the front panel of the Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable
Switches.
20x exterrial SFF+ pcirts
Mini-'JSB
rrianagernent port
1 ObE RJ-45
management port
/
Switch
LEDs
Figure 3. Front panel of the Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
The front panel contains the foliowing components:
• LEDs that display the status of the switch module and the fabric:
o The OK LED indicates that the switch module has passed the power-on self-test (POST) with
no critical faults and is operational.
o The blue ldentify LED can be used to identify the switch physically, by ¡lluminating via the
management software.
o The Error LEO (switch module error) indicates that the switch module has failed the POST or
detected an operational fault.
• One mini-USB RS-232 console port that provides an additional means to configure the switch
module. This mini-USB-style connector enables connection of a special serial cable (cable is optional
and it is not included with the switch; see the part number information section for details).
• One 1 Gb Ethernet RJ-45 port for switch configuration and management
• 20 external SFP+ port connectors to attach SFP+ modules for 16 Gb, 8 Gb or 4 Gb connections to
externa¡ FC devices
• An FC link error LEO and an FC TxJRx LEO for each externa¡ port on the switch
Lenovo FIex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
12
Cabling requirements
The following table lists the cables required for the switch.
Table 10. FC5022 cabling requirements
Transceiver
Cable
¡ Connector
16 Gb Fibre Channel
16 Gb FC SW SFP+ Module Up to 30 m with fiber optic cables supplied by Lenovo (see Table
2); 850 nm 0M3 multimode fiber up to 100 m or 0M4 multimode
fiber up to 125 m
LO
16 Gb FC LW SFP+ Module
1310 nm single-mode fiber cable (9 p) up to 10 km
LO
16 Gb FC ELW SFP+
Module
1310 nm single-mode fiber cable (9 u) up to 25 km
LC
8 Gb FC SW SFP+ Module
Up to 30 m with fiber optic cables supplied by Lenovo (see Table
2); 850 nm 0M3 multimode fiber up to 150 m
LC
8 Gb FC LW SFP+ Module
1310 nm single-mode fiber cable (9 p) up to 10 km
LO
8 Gb FC ELW SFP+ Module
1310 nm single-mode fiber cable (9 i4 up to 25 km
LO
8 Gb Fibre Channel
Management ports
Externa¡ 1 GbE management UTP Category 5, 5E, and 6 up to 100 meters
por
External RS-232
management port
RJ-45
DB-9-to-mini-USB or RJ-45-to-mini-US13 console cable (comes with Mini-USB
optional Management Serial Access Cable, 90Y9338)
Warranty
The F05022 switches carry a 1-year, customer-replaceable unit (ORU) limited warranty. When installed in a
chassis, these switches assume your systems base warranty and any Lenovo warranty service upgrade.
Physicat specifications
The approximate dimensions and weight of the switch are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Height: 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Width: 401 mm (15.8 in.)
Depth: 317 mm (12.5 in.)
Weight: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb)
The shipping dimensions and weight (approximate) of the switch are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Height: 114 mm (4.5 in.)
Width: 508 mm (20.0 in.)
Depth: 432 mm (17.0 in.)
Weight: 3.6 kg (8.1 lb)
Lenovo FIex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
Operating environment
The FC5022 swithces are supported in the foHowing environment:
• Temperature
• Operating: 0°C to 35°C (32°F to 95°F)
• Non-operating: 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F)
• Altitude
• Up to 3,000 m (1 0,000 ft) aboye sea leve¡
• Humidity
• Operating: 20% to 80%, noncondensing at 29°C
• Non-operating: 8% to 80%, noncondensing at 38°C
Regulatory compliance
The switch conforms to the foUowing standards:
• US: UL, CB, TUV reports and certificates per EN60950-1 2001 / 1EC60950-1 2001
• Canada: CSA 022.2 No. 950 or 60950
• Germany: TUVNDE IEC 950/EN 60950 (TUV component report & 1EC60950 OB Report and
Certificate)
• FCC - Title 47 CFR Part 15, Class A
• Canada - ICES-003
• Australia/New Zealand * C-Tick - AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006
• CE Mark - EN55022:2006+A1 :2007 and EN55024: 1 998+A1 :2001 +A2:2003
• VCCI Class A - Japan VCCI 2009
• Korea's EMC with KCC marking (previously MIC marking)
• MIO Notice No. 1996-78 (Korea)
• CISPR 22 Class A
• Taiwan BSMI - CNS 13438
• Turkey Communiqué No. 2004/9 and No. 2004/22
• Saudi Arabia - EMC.CVG, 28 October 2002
• China - GB 9524:1998
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
14
Storage connectivity
The FC5022 switches can be used for externa¡ FC SAN storage connectivity.
FC storage systems
The following table lists the externa¡ SAN storage systems that are offered by Lenovo that can be used with
the FC5022 switches in 8 Gb or 16 Gb FC storage connectivity solutions.
Table 11. Externa¡ storage systems
Descnption
Part number
Lenovo Storage S2200
Lenovo Storage S2200 LFF Chassis FCIISCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
641 -14131
Lenovo Storage S2200 LFF Chassis FCIiSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411482
Lenovo Storage 52200 SFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64114133
Lenovo Storage S2200 SFF Chassis FCTiSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64114134
Lenovo Storage S3200
Lenovo Storage S3200 LFF Chassis FCÍiSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411 6B1
Lenovo Storage S3200 LFF Chassis FCÍiSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411 6B2
Lenovo Storage S3200 SFF Chassis FCI1SCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
641 -16133
Lenovo Storage S3200 SFF Chassis FC/1SCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411 6B4
IBM Storwize
IBM Storwize V3500 3.5-inch Dual Control Storage Controller Unit
6096CU2
IBM Storwize V3500 2.5-inch Dual Control Storage Controller Unit
6096CU3
IBM Storwize V3700 3.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099L2C
IBM Storwize V3700 2.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099S2C
IBM Storwize V3700 2.5-inch DC Storage Controller Unit
6099T2C
IBM Storwize V5000 LFF Control Enclosure
6194L2C
IBM Storwize V5000 SFF Control Enclosure
6194S2C
IBM Storwize V7000 2.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6195SC5
For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the following categories:
• Lenovo Storage
https://lenovopress.com/storage/san/lenovo
• IBM Storage
https://lenovopress.com/storage/san/ibm
Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
15
FC tape backup units
The following table Iists the externa¡ Fibre Channel tape backup units that are offered by Lenovo that can be
used with the FC5022 switches in Lenovo FC SAN solutions.
Table 12. Externa¡ backup units
Description
Part number
External tape backup libraries
IBM TS31 00 Tape Library Model L2U
61 732UL
IBM TS3200 Tape Library Model L4U
61 734UL
Fibre Channel backup drives for TS31 00 and TS3200 Tape Libraries
6173 LTO Ultrium 5 Fibre Channel Drive
00NA107
6173 LTO Ultrium 5 HaIf High Fibre Drive SIed
OONA1 13
6173 LTO Ultrium 6 Fibre Channel Drive
OONA1 15
6173 LTO Ultrium 6 HaIf High Fibre Drive SIed
OONA1 19
6173 LTO Ultrium 7 Fibre Channel Drive
00WF765
6173 LTO Ultrium 7 HaIf High Fibre Drive SIed
00WF769
For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the Backup Units category:
http://ienovopress.com/servers/options/backup
FC SAN switches
The foltowing table Iists the FC SAN switches that are offered by Lenovo that can be used with the
FC5022 switches in FC SAN storage connectivity solutions.
Table 13. FC SAN switches
Description
Part number
8Gb FC
Lenovo 8300, 8 ports activated wl 8Gb SWL SFPs, 1 PS, Rail Kit
3873AR3
Lenovo B6505, 12 ports activated w/ 8Gb SWL SFPs, 1 PS, Rail Kit
3873AR4
Lenovo B6510, 24 ports activated w/ 8Gb SWL SFPs, 2 PS, Rail Kit
3873BR2
16Gb FC
Lenovo B6505, 12 ports activated w/ 16Gb SWL SFPs, 1 PS, Rail Kit
3873AR5
Lenovo B6510, 24 ports activated w/ 16Gb SWL SFPs, 2 PS, Rail Kit
3873BR3
For more inforrnation, see the list of Product Guides in the Rack SAN Switches category:
nttp://lenovopress.com/storageiswitches/rack
Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
16
Related pubhcations and Iinks
For more information, see the foliowing Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Switches product
publications:
• Flex System Information Center for the FC5022 switches
http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/flexsys/information/topic/comienovo.acc.fc5022.doc/
Io_modulepharos.html
• Administrator's Guide
http://www.brocade.com/content/htmVen/administration-guide/fos-740-adminguide/
• Command Reference Guide
http://www.brocade.com/contentlhtml/en/command-reference-guide/fos-741 commandref!wwhelp/wwhimpl/js/html/wwhelp.htm
• Message Reference Guide
iup:11www.brocade.corn/contentIhtml/en/message-referenceguides/FOSJ4OMESSAGES/wwhelp/wwhimpl/js/htmVwwhelp.htm#href=Title.1 .2.html
• Access Gateway Administrator's Guide
http://www.brocade.com/content/html/en/administration-guide/fos-740-accessgateway/index.html
Other documents:
• US Announcement Letter for the 16Gb SAN and 24-port ESB SAN switches
htp://ibmcom/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?infotype=dd&subtype=ca&&htmlfid=897fENUS1 12-053
• US Announcement Letter for the 16Gb 24-port SAN switch
12-139
• US Announcement Letter for the Features Qn Demand upgrades
http://ibm .com/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?infotype=dd&subtype=ca&&htmlfid=897IENUS1 12-185
• Flex System Enterprise Chassis Froduct Guide
http://tenovopress.com/tipsO86
• The Benefits of 16 Gb Fibre Channel in Flex System Solutions
ittp:iilenovopress.com/redp4921
• Flex System FC5022 2-port 16Gb FC Adapter
http:/!tenovooresscom/tips089l
• Lenovo Flex System Products and Technology, SG24-8255
http://Ienovopress.com/sg248255
• Flex System lnteroperabiíity Guide
http://enovopress.com/fsig
Related product families
Product families related to this document are the following:
• Embedded SAN Switches
• Blade Storage Modules
f•) rl,) Lenovo Flex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalabte Switches
17
Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in ah countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
Lenovo intetiectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibihity to evaluate and verify
the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent apphications
covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license
to these patents. You can send ¡¡cense inquines, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION 'AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not ahlow disclaimer of
express or imphied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodicahly made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make
irnprovements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other ¡¡fe support apphications
where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express
or irnphied ¡¡cense or indemnity under the intelhectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. Alh information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an ihlustration. The result
obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supphy
in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was
determined in a controhled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary
significantly. Sorne measurements may have been made on development-Ievel systems and there is no guarantee
that these measurements wilI be the same on generalhy available systems. Furtherrnore, sorne measurements may
have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual resuhts may vary. Users of this document should verify the
applicable data for thein specific environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2016. Allí nghts reserved.
This document, TIPSO870, was created or updated on May 24, 2016.
Send us your comments in one of the following ways:
• Use the online Contact us review form found at:
http://Ienovopress.com/TIPSO870
Send your comments in an e-mail to:
coínmentsenovoprss.con
This document is available onhine at http://tenovopress.com/TIPSO870.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
18
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, and For Those Who Do are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the
United States, other countries, or both. A current list of Lenovo trademarks is available on the Web at
http://www.lenovo.com/Iegal/copytrade.htmj.
The foliowing terrns are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
ServerProven®
Fiex SystemTM
The fouowing terms are trademarks of other companies:
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Lenovo Fiex System FC5022 16Gb SAN Scalable Switches
19
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable
Switch
Product Guide
The Lenovo® Fiex SysternTM EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch enables administrators to offer fuli
Layer 2 and 3 switching and routing capability with combined 1 Gb and 10 Gb externa¡ ports in a Fiex
System chassis. Such consolidation simplifies the data center infrastructure and helps reduce the number
of discrete devices, management consoles, and management systems while leveraging the 1 Gb Ethernet
infrastructure. In addition, the next-generation switch module hardware supports lPv6 Layer 3 frame
forwarding protocols. This Scalable Switch delivers cost savings with flexible port mapping and Features
on Demand upgrades, efficient traffic management, increased externa¡ bandwidth, and strong Ethernet
switching price/performance.
The following figure shows the switch module.
Figure 1. Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
Did you know?
The base switch configuration comes standard with 24x 1 GbE port licenses that can be assigned to
internal or externa¡ 1 GbE connections or even externa¡ SFP+ ports with flexible port mapping. For
example, this feature allows customers to trade off one external 1 GbE RJ-45 port for one interna¡ 1 GbE
port (or vice versa) or trade off ten 1 GbE ports for one 10 GbE pon. Customers then have the flexibility of
turning on more ports when you need them using Lenovo's Features on Demand upgrade licensing
capabilities that provide "pay as you grow" scalability without the need to buy additional hardware.
Delivering advanced virtualization awareness and cloud readiness helps simplify management and
automates VM mobility by making the network VM aware with VMready® which works with all the major
hypervisors.
f
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
Keyfeatures
The Fiex System EN2092 1 G Scalable Switch is considered particularly suited for these customers:
• Customers who want to leverage GbE in their infrastructure
• Customers who are ¡mplementing a virtualized environment and require multiple GbE ports
• Customers who require investment protection for 10 Gb extemal ports
• Customers who want to reduce TCO and improve performance while maintaining high levels of
availability and security
• Customers who want to avoid or minimize oversubscription, which can result in congestion and
loss of performance
• Customers who want to implement a converged infrastructure with NAS or ¡SCSI
The switch offers the foliowing key features and ben efits:
Increases network performance
With the growth of virtualization and the evolution of cloud, many of today's applications require low
Iatency and hgh-bandwidth performance. The EN2092 delivers non-bocking architecture with 176
Gbps throughput and fui¡ une rate performance, making it ideal for managing dynamic workloads
across the network. In addition, the switch provides a rich Layer 2 and Layer 3 feature set that is
ideal for many of today's data centers, plus it offers a combined external bandwidth of 60 Gb.
Pay as you grow investment protection and lower total cost of ownership
The EN2092's flexible port mapping allows customers to reallocate ports as needed which helps
reduce acquisition and operational costs. The base switch configuration includes 24x 1 GbE port
licenses that can be assigned to interna¡ 1 GbE connections and 1 GbE or even 10 GbE (by using
ten 1 GbE ¡¡censes per one 10 GbE port) externa¡ ports. Customers then have the fiexibility of
turning on more 1 GbE connections to the compute node and more 1 GbE or 10 GbE external ports
when needed using Lenovos Features on Demand licensing capabilities that provide "pay as you
grow" scalability without the need to buy additional hardware.
• Cloud ready
Delivering advanced virtualization awareness helps simplify management and automates VM
mobility by making the network VM aware with VMready which works with all the major hypervisors.
Support for Switch Partition (SPAR) aliows clients to virtualize the switch with partitions that isolate
communications for multi-tenancy environments.
Simplifies network infrastructure
The EN2092 1 Gb Scalable Switch simplifies deployment and growth by using its innovative scalable
architecture. This architecture helps increase return on investment by reducing the qualification
cycle, while providing investment protection for additional I/O bandwidth requirements in the future.
The extreme fiexibility of the switch comes from the ability to turn on additional ports as required,
both down to the compute node and for upstream connections (including 10 GbE). Also, as
customers consider migrating to a converged LAN and SAN, the EN2092 switch can be leveraged
in either an ¡SCSI or NAS environment.
• Simplified management
A key challenge is the management of a discrete network environment. The EN2092 1 Gb Scalable
Switch supports a command-Iine interface (CLI) for integration into existing scripting and
automation. Network management can be simplified by using port profiles, topology views, and
virtualization management.
Switch Center appiication is used for advanced levels of provisioning, management, and
control, which can significantly reduce deployment and day-to-day maintenance times, while
providing in-depth visibility into the network performance and operations of Lenovo switches. Plus,
when leveraging tools like VMware vCenter Server or vSphere, or Switch Center provides additional
integration for better optimization.
Lenovo Flex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
lo
Components and connectors
The following figure shows the front panel of the FIex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch.
20x externa¡ 1 G ports
4x 10Gb uplink ports
-
1
RJ-45 ports
11
1
SFP+ ports Management Switch
port
LEDs
Figure 2. Front panel of the FIex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
The front panel contains the following components:
• 20x 1 000BASE-T Ethernet externa¡ ports for 10/100/1000 Mbps connections to externa] Ethernet
devices.
• 4x SFP+ external ports to attach SFP/SFP+ transceivers for 1 Gb orlO Gb connections or DAC
cables for 10 Gb Ethernet connections.
• One mini-USB RS-232 console port that provides an additional means to configure the switch
module.
• LEDs that display the status of the switch module and the network.
System specifications
The following table lists the EN2092 system specifications.
Table 1. System specifications
Component
Speciflcation
Form factor
FIex System embedded I/O module
Ports
Internal ports: 28x 1 Gb Ethernet (GbE) ports
Externa¡ ports:
• 20x 1 GbE fixed ports (RJ-45)
• 4x SFP/SFP+ ports
Media types
(externa¡ ports)
10 Gb Ethernet SFP+:
• 10 GbE short-range (SR) SFP+ transceivers
• 10 GbE long-range (LR) SFP+ transceivers
• 10 GbE SFP+ DAC cables
1 Gb Ethernet SFP:
• 1 GbE short-wavelength (SX) SFP transceivers
• 1 GbE long-wavelength (LX) SFP transceivers
• 1 GbE RJ-45 SFP transceivers
Port speeds
Data traffic types
•
•
•
•
Intemal 1 GbE ports: 1 Gbps
External 1 GbE RJ-45 fixed ports: 10/100/1000 Mbps autosensing
10 GbE SFP+ transceivers and DAC cables: 10 Gbps
1 GbE SFP transceivers: 1 Gbps
Unicast, multicast, broadcast.
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
3
Component
Specification
Software features Lenovo Networking OS:
Layer 2 switching, Layer 3 switching, virtual local area networks (VLANs), VLAN tagging,
spanning tree protocol (STP), link aggregation (trunk) groups (LAGs), Hot Links, Layer 2
failover, quality of service (QoS), VMready, Switch Partitioning (SPAR), Flexible Port Mapping,
lPv4/lPv6 management, lPv4/lPv6 routing, lPv4 virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
Performance
Scalability
Non-blocking architecture with wire-speed forwarding of traffic:
• Up to 176 Gbps aggregated throughput
• 100% une rate performance with 1.8 microseconds switching latency
• Up to 9,216-byte jumbo frames
•
•
•
•
•
•
MAC address forwarding database entries: 32,000
VLANs: 1,024
Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST) instances: 128
Multiple STP (MSTP) instances: 32
Link aggregation groups: 52
Ports in a link aggregation group: 32
Hot-swap parts
SFP/SFP+ transceivers, SFP+ DAC cables.
Management
ports
2x GbE internal ports connected to the chassis management module; 1 x RS-232 external port
(Mini-USB).
Management
interfaces
lndustry standard command Une interface (isCLI); SNMP vi and v3. Optional Lenovo Switch
Center. Optional Lenovo XClarity for discovery, inventory, and monitoring.
Security features
Secure Shell (SSH); Secure Copy (SCP); Secure FTP (sFTP); user leve¡ security; LDAP,
RADIUS, and TACACS+ authentication; access control lists (ACLs); port-based network
access control (IEEE 802.1 x).
Warranty
One-year customer-replaceable unit limited warranty. When installed in a supported chassis,
the switch assumes the chassis' base warranty and any warranty service upgrade; warranty
includes Networking OS software upgrades.
Mean Time
Between Failures
381,936 hours with ambient operating temperature of 40° C.
Dimensions
Height: 30 mm (1.2 in.); width: 401 mm (15.8 in.); depth: 317 mm (12.5 in.)
Weight
3.7 kg (8.1 lb).
Modeis
The part numbers to order the switch and optional upgrades are shown in the following table.
Table 2. Part numbers and feature codes for ordering
Description
--TPart number
Feature code
Switch module
Lenovo Flex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
49Y4294
AOTF
FIex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch (Upgrade 1)
90Y3562
A1QW
FIex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch (10Gb Uplinks)
49Y4298
Al EN
Features on Demand upgrades
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
The part number for the switch includes the foliowing items:
•
•
•
•
One Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
lmportant Notices Flyer
Warranty Flyer
Documentation CD-ROM
The switch does not include a serial management cable; the optional Fiex System Management Serial
Access Cable, 90Y9338, is supported and contains two cables, a mini-US13-to-RJ45 serial cable and a
mini-USB-to-DB9 serial cable, either of which can be used to connect to the switch locally for
configuration tasks and firmware updates.
The part numbers for the FoD upgrades, 90Y3562 and 49Y4298, include the foliowing items:
• Feature on Demand Activation Flyer
• Upgrade activation tetter
The base switch and upgrades are as follows:
• 49Y4294 is the part number for the base switch, and it comes with 14 interna¡ 1 GbE ports enabled,
one to each compute node and ten externa¡ 1 GbE ports enabled. AU externa¡ 1 GbE ports have RJ45 connectors.
• 90Y3562 (Upgrade 1) can be applied on the base switch to take fuhl advantage of four-port adapter
cards installed in each compute node. This upgrade enables 14 additional interna¡ ports, for a total
of 28 ports (two ports to each node). The upgrade also enables 10 additional externa! 1 GbE ports
for a total of twenty 1 GbE externa¡ RJ-45 ports. This upgrade requires the base switch.
• 49Y4298 (10Gb Uplinks) can be applied on the base switch when you need more externa¡
bandwidth. The upgrade enables four external 10 GbE ports with SFP+ connectors (SFP+
transceivers or DAC cables are not included). This upgrade requires the base switch.
• Both 90Y3562 (Upgrade 1) and 49Y4298 (10Gb Uplinks) can be applied on the switch at the same
time to allow you to use 28 interna¡ 10 GbE ports leveraging all four ports on an four-port expansion
card, and to utilize all externa¡ ports on the switch.
Flexible port mapping: With Networking OS version 7.8 or later customers have more fiexibility in
assigning ports that they have licensed on the EN2092 which can help ehiminate or postpone the need to
purchase upgrades. Whihe the base rnodel and upgrades stilh activate specific ports, flexible port mapping
provides customers with the capability of reassigning ports as needed by moving interna¡ and externa! 1
GbE ports or trading off ten 1 GbE ports for the use of an externa¡ 10 GbE port (or vice versa). This is very
valuable when customers consider the fiexibihity with the base ¡¡cense and with 10Gb Uplinks upgrade.
With flexible port mapping, customers have ¡¡censes for a specific number of ports:
• 49Y4294 is the part number for the base switch, and it provides 24x 1 GbE port hicenses that can
enable any combination of interna¡ and external 1 GbE ports and externa¡ 10 GbE ports (with the
use of ten 1 GbE port ¡¡censes per one 10 GbE port).
• 90Y3562 (Upgrade 1) upgrades the base switch by activation of 14 interna! 1 GbE ports and ten
externa! 1 GbE ports which is equivalent to adding 24 more 1 GbE port hicenses for a total of 48x 1
GbE port !icenses. Any combination of interna¡ and externa! 1 GbE ports and externa¡ 10 GbE ports
(with the use of ten 1 GbE port licenses per one 10 GbE port) can be enabled with this upgrade.
This upgrade requires the base switch.
• 49Y4298 (10Gb Uplinks) upgrades the base switch by activation of four externa¡ 10 GbE ports for a
total of 24x 1 GbE ports and 4x 10 GbE ports. With the use of one externa! 10 GbE port ¡¡cense for
ten 1 GbE ports, any combination of interna! and externa! 1 GbE ports and externa¡ 10 GbE ports
can be enabled with this upgrade. This upgrade requires the base switch.
• Both 90Y3562 (Upgrade 1) and 49Y4298 (10Gb Uplinks) simply activate al! the ports on the EN2092
which is 28 interna¡ 1 GbE ports, 20 externa¡ 1 GbE ports, and four externa! 10 GbE SFP+ ports.
Lenovo Flex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
5
Note: When both Upgrade 1 and 10Gb Uplinks are acflvated, flexible port mapping is no longer used
because aH the ports on the EN2092 are enabled.
The following table Usts supported port combinations on the switch and required upgrades.
Table 3. Supported port combinations: Default port mapping
Upgrade required
Supported port combinations
Quantity
Base switch, Upgrade 1,
49Y4294
90Y3562
10Gb Uplinks,
49Y4298
• 14x interna¡ 1 GbE ports
• lüx extemal l_GbE ports
1
0
0
• 28x interna¡ 1 GbE ports
• 20x extemal 1 GbE ports
1
1
0
• 14 internal 1 GbE ports
• lOx extemal 1 GbE ports
• 4x external 10 GbE ports
1
0
1
• 28x internal 1 GbE ports
• 20x external 1 GbE ports
• 4x external 10 GbE ports
1
1
1
Table 4. Supported port combinations: Flexible port mapping
Supported port combinatíons
Quantity required
Base switch, Upgrade 1,
49Y4294
90Y3562
10Gb Uplinks,
49Y4298
• 24 1 GbE ports (infernal and external)
or
• 14x 1 GbE ports (interna¡ and extemal)
• 1 external 10 GbE SFP+_port
1
0
0
• 48x 1 GbE ports (interna¡ and external)
or
• 28x 1 GbE ports (interna¡ and extemal)
• 2x external 10 GbE SFP+_ports
1
1
0
• 14 1 GbE ports (interna¡ and external)
• 4x external 10 GbE SFP+ ports
or
• 34x 1 GbE ports (internal and external)
• 2x external 10 GbE SFP+_ports
1
0
1
Transceivers and cables
With the fiexibility of the EN2092 switch, customers can use the foliowing connectivity technologies:
• For 1 GbE links, customers can use RJ-45 UTP cables up to 100 meters. Customers that need
longer distances can use the 1 000BASE-SX transceivers in the SFP/SFP+ ports, which can drive
distances up to 220 meters with 62.5 p multi-mode fiber (OM1) and up to 550 meters with 50 p
multi-mode fiber (0M2), or the 1000BASE-LX transceivers that support distances up to 10
kilometers with single-mode fiber (1310 nm).
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
6
• For 10 GbE links (supported on SFP+ externa¡ ports), customers can use direct-attached copper
(DAC) SFP+ cables for in-rack cabling for distances up to 7 meters. These DAC cables have SFP+
connectors on each end, and they do not need separate transceivers.
For longer distances, the 1 OGBASE-SR transceiver can support distances up to 300 meters ayer
0M3 multimode fiber or up to 400 meters over 0M4 multimode fiber. The 1 OGBASE-LR
transceivers can support distances up to 10 kilometers on single mode fiber.
If the 10Gb Uplinks upgrade (49Y4298) is used or the customer uses flexible port mapping to activate an
externa¡ SFP+ port, then either SFP+ transceivers or DAC cables are required to provide outside
connectivity. The foliowing table lists supported SFP/SFP+ and DAC cable options.
Table 5. SFP/SFP+ transceivers and DAC cables
Description
Part
number
Feature
code
Maximum
quantity
supported
Serial console cables
FIex System Management Serial Access Cable Kit
190Y9338 1 A2RR
1
SFP transceivers - 1 GbE
Lenovo 1000BASE-T (RJ-45) SFP Transceiver (no support for 10/100 Mbps)
00FE333
A5DL
4
Lenovo 1000BASE-SX SFP Transceiver
81 Yl 622
3269
4
Lenovo 1 000BASE-LX SFP Transceiver
90Y9424
Al PN
4
Lenovo 1OGBASE-SR SFP+ Transceiver
46C3447
5053
4
Lenovo 1 OGBASE-LR SFP+ Transceiver
90Y9412
Al PM
4
Lenovo 1 LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN502 ASR6
4
Lenovo 3m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN505 ASR7
4
Lenovo 5m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN508 ASR8
4
Lenovo lOm LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
OOMN511 ASR9
4
SFP+ transceivers - 10 GbE
Optical cables for 1 GbE SX SFR and 10 GbE SR SFP+ transceivers
Lenovo 15m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN514 ASRA
4
Lenovo 25m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN517 ASRB
4
Lenovo 30m LC-LC 0M3 MMF Cable
00MN520 ASRC
4
Lenovo 1 m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
90Y9427
Al PH
4
Lenovo 1.5m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
00AY764
A51 N
4
Lenovo 2m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
00AY765
A51 P
4
Lenovo 3m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
90Y9430
Al PJ
4
Lenovo 5m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
90Y9433
Al PK
4
Lenovo 7m Passive SFP+ DAC Cable
00D6151
A3RH
4
SFP+ direct-attach cables - 10 GbE
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
7
The network cables that can be used with the switch are Usted in the following table.
Table 6. EN2092 network cabling requirements
Transceiver
Standard
1 Cable
Connector
10 Gb Ethernet
LO
10Gb SR SFP+ (46C3447)
10GBASE-SR Up to 30 with fiber opttc cables supplied by Lenovo
(see Table 5); up to 300 m with 0M3 multimode fiber or
up to 400 m with 0M4 multimode fiber
10Gb LR SFP+ (90Y941 2)
1 OGBASE-LR
1310 nm single-mode fiber cable up to 10 km
LO
Direct attach cable
1 OGSFP+Cu
SFP+ DAC cables up to 7 m (see Table 5)
SFP+
RJ-45 ports (fixed)
1000BASE-T
UTP Category 5, 5E, and 6 up to 100 meters
RJ-45
1 G RJ-45 SFP (00FE333)
1 000BASE-T
UTP Category 5, 5E, and 6 up to 100 meters
RJ-45
1 G SX SFP (81Y1 622)
1000BASE-SX Up to 30 m with fiber optic cables supplied by Lenovo
(see Table 5); 850 nm multimode fiber cable 50 p (0M2)
up to 550 m or 62.5 p(OM1) up to 220 m
LO
1 G LX SFP (90Y9424)
1 000BASE-LX 1310 nm single-mode fiber cable up to 10 km
LC
1 Gb Ethernet
Management ports
RS-232 serial console port RS-232
DB-9-to-mini-USB or RJ-45-to-mini-USB console cable RJ-45
(comes with optional Management Serial Access Cable,
90Y9338)
Software features
Note: Features and specifications usted in this section are based on Networking OS 7.8.
The EN2092 Scalable Switch has the following software features:
Scalability and performance
o Media access control (MAC) address learning with automatic updates
o Up to 128 IP interfaces per switch
o Static and LACP (IEEE 802.3ad) link aggregation
o Broadcastlmulticast storm control
o IGMP snooping for limit flooding of IP multicast tratfic
o IGMP filtering to control multicast traffic for hosts participating ¡n multicast groups
o Configurable traffic distribution schemes over trunk links based on source/destination IP or
MAC addresses or both
o Fast port forwarding and fast uplink convergence for rapid STP convergence
Availability and redundancy
o IEEE 802.1 D STP for providing L2 redundancy
o IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) for topology optimization
o IEEE 802.1w Rapid STP (RSTP) (provides rapid STP convergence for critical delay-sensitive
traffic like voice or video)
o Per-VIAN Rapíd STP (PVRST) enhancements
o Layer 2 Trunk Failover to support active/standby configurations of network adapter tearning
on compute nodes
o Hot Links provides basic link redundancy with fast recovery for network topologies that
require Spanning Tree to be turned off
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
• VLAN support
o Up to 1024 VLANs supported per switch, with VLAN numbers ranging from 1 to 4095 (4095
is used for management modules connection only)
o 802.10 VLAN tagging support on alt ports
o Private VLANs
Security
o VLAN-based, MAC-based, and IP-based ACLs
o 802.1x port-based authentication
o Multiple user IDs and passwords
o User access control
o Radius, TACACS+ and LDAP authentication and authorization
o NIST 800-131A Encryption
o Selectable encryption protocol; SHA 256 enabled as default
o lPv6 ACL metering
• Quality of Service (QoS)
o Support for IEEE 802.1 p, IP ToS/DSCP, and ACL-based (MAC/IP source and destination
addresses, V[ANs) traffic classification and processing
o Trafflc shaping and re-marking based on defined policies
o Eight Weighted Round Robín (WRR) priority queues per port for processing qualified traffic
• IP v4 Layer 3 functíons
o Host management
o lPforwarding
o IP filtering with ACLs, up to 128 ACLs supported
o Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) for Layer 3 router redundancy
o Support for up to 128 static routes
o Routing protocol support (RIP vi, RIP v2, OSPF v2, BGP-4), up to 2048 dynamic routes
o Support for DHCP Relay
o Support for IGMP snooping and IGMP relay
o Support for Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) in Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) and Dense
Mode (PIM-DM).
• IP vG [ayer 3 functions
o lPv6 host management (except default switch management IP address)
o IPv6forwarding
o Up to 128 static routes
o Support for OSPF v3 routing protocol
o lPv6 filtering with ACLs, up to 128 ACLs supported
Virtualization
o VMready
• Up to 2,048 virtual entities (VEs)
• Automatic VE discovery
• Up to 32 local or distributed VM groups for VEs
• NMotion® feature for automatic network configuration migration
o Switch partitioning (SPAR)
• SPAR forms separate virtual switching contexts by segmenting the data plane of the
module. Data plane traffic is not shared between SPARs on the same switch.
• SPAR operates as a [ayer 2 broadcast network. Hosts on the same VLAN attached to
a SPAR can communicate with each other and with the upstream switch. Hosts on
the same VLAN but attached to different SPARs communicate through the upstream
switch.
• SPAR is implemented as a dedicated VLAN with a set of interna¡ compute node ports
and a single externa¡ port or link aggregation (LAG). Multiple external ports or LAGs
are not allowed in SPAR. A port can be a member of only one SPAR.
e:
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
9
L
Manageability
o Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP Vi and V3)
o Telnet interface for CLI
o Secure Shell (SSH)
o Serial interface for CLI
o Scriptable CLI
o Firmware image update (TFTP, FTP, and sFTP)
o Network Time Protocol (NTP) for switch clock synchronization
o Lenovo Switch Center support
o Lenovo XClarity support (discovery, inventory, and monitoring)
Monitoring
o Switch LEDs for externa¡ port status and switch module status indication
o Remate Monitoring (RMON) agent to collect statistics and proactively monitor switch
performance
o Port mirroring for analyzing network traffic passing through the switch
o Change tracking and remate logging with the syslog feature
o Support for the sFLOW agent for monitoring traffic in data networks (separate sFLOW
analyzer required elsewhere)
o POST diagnostics
The following features are not supported with lPv6:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default switch management 1P address
SNMP trap host destination IP address
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) and DHCP
RADIUS, TACACS+ and LDAP
QoS metering and re-marking ACLs for out-profile traffic
VMware Virtual Center (vCenter) for VMready
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
sFLOW
Ethernet standards
The switch supports the following Ethernet standards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IEEE 802.1 D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP)
IEEE 802.1w Rapid STP (RSTP)
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service (CaS) prioritization
IEEE 802.1 Q Tagged VLAN (frame tagging on al¡ ports when VLANs are enabled)
IEEE 802.lx port-based authentication
IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control
IEEE 802.3 1OBASE-T Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ab 1000 BASE-T copper twisted pair Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3z 1 000BASE-SX short range fiber optics Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-1-X long range fiber optics Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol
IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex FIow Control
IEEE 802.3ae 1 OGBASE-SR short range fiber optics 10 Gb Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ae 1 OGBASE-LR long range fiber optics 10 Gb Ethernet
1 OGSFP+Cu SFP+ Direct Attach copper
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
10
Warranty
The switch carnes a 1-year, customer-replaceable unit (CRU) limited warranty. When installed in a
supported chassis, these switches assume your system's base warranty and any Lenovo warranty service
upgrade.
Physical specifications
The approximate dimensions and weight of the switch are as foliows:
•
•
•
•
Height: 30 mm (1.2 inches)
Width: 401 mm (15.8 inches)
Depth: 317 mm (12.5 inches)
Weight: 3.7 kg (8.1 lb)
Shipping dimensions and weight (approximate):
•
•
•
•
Height: 114 mm (4.5 in)
Width: 508 mm (20.0 n)
Depth: 432 mm (17.0 in)
Weight: 4.1 kg (9.1 lb)
Agency approvals
The switch conforms to the following regulations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
United States FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, ANSI 063.4 (2003), Class A
lEO/EN 60950-1, Second Edition
Canada ICES-003, issue 4, Class A
Japan VCCI, Class A
AustralialNew Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006, Class A
Taiwan BSMI CNS1 3438, Class A
CE Mark (EN55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61 000-3-2, EN61 000-3-3)
CISPR 22, Class A
China GB 9254-1998
Turkey Communique 2004/9; Communique 2004/22
Saudi Arabia EMC.CVG, 28 October 2002
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
11
Chassis and adapter cards
The EN2092 switches are installed in I/O bays in the rear of the Fiex System chassis, as shown in the
foliowing figure. Switches are typically installed in pairs because ports on I/O adapter cards are routed to
two I/O bays for redundancy and performance. The chassis supports up to four EN2092 switches.
fi/o bay: 1
3
2
4
Figure 3. Location of the I/O bays in the Fiex System chassis
The EN2092 switch can be installed in bays 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Fiex System chassis. A supported adapter
card must be installed in a corresponding slot of the compute node. Each adapter can use up to four tanes
to con nect to the respective I/O module bay. The EN2092 is able to use up to twa of the four tanes.
In compute nodes that have an integrated dual-port 10 GbE network interface controHer (NIC), NIC's ports
are routed to bays 1 and 2 with a specialized periscope connector, and the adapter card is not required.
However, when needed, the periscope connector can be replaced with the adapter card. In such a case
integrated NIC will be disabled.
Prior to Networking OS 7.8, with 4-port or 8-port adapters, an optional Upgrade 1 (90Y3562) was required
for the switch to allow communications on four ports. With Networking OS 7.8 or later, there is no need to
buy additional switch upgrades for 4-port adapters if the total number of port licenses on the switch does
not exceed the number of external (upstream network ports) and internal (compute nade network ports)
connections used.
Notes:
• 10 GbE LOM and adapters supported by the EN2092 operate at 1 GbE speeds.
• On an 8-port adapter, only up to four ports can be used with the EN2092 switches (twa adapter
ports per switch, twa EN2092 switches per adapter), and the remaining four ports cannot be used.
The following table shows compatibility information for the EN2092 and Flex System chassis.
Table 7. FIex System chassis compatibility
Descnption
Part
number
FIex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
49Y4294
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
Enterprise
Chassis
with CMM
Yes
Enterprise
Chassis
with CMM2
Yes
Carrier-grade
Chassis with
CMM2
Yes
12
The midplane connections between the adapters that are installed in the compute nodes to the I/O module
bays in the chassis are usted in the following table. HaIf-wide compute nodes support up to two adapters,
and full-wide compute nodes support up to four adapters.
Table 8. Adapter to I/O bay correspondence
I/O adapter slot
in the compute node
Port on the adapter
SIot 1
Port 1
Corresponding I/O module bay in the chass,s
Bay 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Port 1
Yes
Port2
Yes
Port3
Yes
Port4
Slot3
(full-wide compute nodes only)
Portl
Port4
SIot 4
(full-wide compute nodes only)
Yes
Yes
Port 2
Fort3
Port 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Port 2
Port3
P4
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
Bay 4
Yes
Port4
SIot 2
Bay 3
Yes
Port2
Port 3
Bay 2
Yes
Yes
13
The following table lists the I/O adapters that are supported by the EN2092 1 G Scalable Switch. 10 GbE
adapters operate at 1 GbE speeds when used with this switch.
Table 9. Network adapters
Description
Part number
TFelrture code
10 Gb Ethernet (10 GbE adapters operate at 1 GbE speeds)
Embedded 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter (2port)*
None
None
Flex System CN4022 2-port 10Gb Converged Adapter#
88Y5920
A4K3
Flex System CN4052 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
00JY800
A5RP
Flex System CN4052S 2-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
00AG540
ATBT
Flex System CN4054 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter (4-port)
90Y3554
A1191
Flex System CN4054R 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter (4-por1)
00Y3306
A4K2
Flex System CN4054S 4-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
00AG590
ATBS
Flex System CN4058S 8-port 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter
94Y5160
A4R6
Embedded 1 Gb Ethernet controller (2port)**
None
None
Flex System EN2024 4-port 1 G Ethernet Adapter
49Y7900
A1 0Y
1 Gb Ethernet
* The Embedded 10Gb Virtual Fabric Adapter is built into select compute nodes.
# The CN4022 supports 1 Gbps links with firmware 2.4.1 Dl and driver nx2-2.2.5f-1.710.11 or laterlevels. For additional
information, refer to https:i. ww-947.ibm.comIsupport/entry/myportaVdocdisplay?lndocidmigr-5Q9497c.
** The Embedded 1 Gb Ethernet controller is built into salect compute nodes.
Network connectivity
The following table lists the network switches that are offered by Lenovo that can be used with the
EN2092 in Flex System network connectivity solutions.
Table 10. Network switches
Description
J Part number
1 Gb Ethernet switches
Lenovo RackSwitch G7028 (Rear to Front)
71 59BAX
Lenovo RackSwitch G7052 (Rear to Front)
71 59CAX
Lenovo RackSwitch G8052 (Rear to Front)
7159G52
10 Gb Ethernet switches
Lenovo RackSwitch G8124E (Rear to, Front)
7159BR6
Lenovo RackSwitch G8264 (Rear to Front)
71 59G64
Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 (Rear to Front)
71 59CRW
Lenovo RackSwitch G8296 (Rear to Front)
71 59GR6
10 Gb Converged switches
Lenovo RackSwitch G8264CS (Rear to Front)
71 59DRX
40 Gb Ethernet switches
Lenovo RackSwitch G8332 (Rear to Front)
71 59BRX
For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the Top-of-rack Switches category:
nttp://Ienovopress.com/servers/options/switches
Lenovo Flex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
14
Storage connectivity
The EN2092 switch can be used for external NAS and SCSI SAN storage connectivity.
NAS storage connectivity
The following externa¡ NAS storage systems are off ered by Lenovo that can be used with the EN2092
switch in 1 Gb and 10 Gb Ethernet NAS storage connectivity solutions:
• Lenovo Storage N3310
• Lenovo Storage N461 O
For more information, see the I'st of Product Guides in the Network-Attached Storage category:
http://lenovopress.com/storage/nas
¡SCSI storage connectivity
The foliowing table lists the externa¡ SAN storage systems that are offered by Lenovo that can be used
with the EN2092 switch in 1 Gb and 10 Gb iSCSI storage connectivity solutions.
Table 11. Externa¡ storage systems
Descnption
Part number
Lenovo Storage S2200
Lenovo Storage S2200 LFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64-114131
Lenovo Storage S2200 LFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64114132
Lenovo Storage S2200 SFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64114133
Lenovo Storage S2200 SFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64114134
Lenovo Storage S3200
Lenovo Storage S3200 LFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411 6B1
Lenovo Storage S3200 LFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
6411 6B2
Lenovo Storage S3200 SFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Single Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
641116133
Lenovo Storage S3200 SFF Chassis FC/iSCSI Dual Controller, Rack Kit, 9x5NBD
64116134
IBM Storwize
IBM Storwize V3500 3.5-inch Dual Control Storage Controller Unit
6096CU2
IBM Storwize V3500 2.5-inch Dual Control Storage Controller Unit
6096CU3
IBM Storwize V3700 3.5-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099L2C
IBM Storwize V3700 25-inch Storage Controller Unit
6099S2C
IBM Storwize V3700 2.5-inch DC Storage Controller Unit
6099T2C
IBM Storwize V5000 LFF Control Enclosure
61 94L2C
IBM Storwize V5000 SFF Control Enclosure
61 94S2C
IBM Storwize W000 25-inch Storage Controller Unit
6195SC5
For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the foltowing categories:
• Lenovo Storage
https://Ienovopress.com/storage/san/lenovo
• IBM Storage
https://lenovopress.com/storage/san/ibm
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
15
Related publications and Iinks
For more information, see the foliowing Fiex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scaiable Switch product
pubhcations that are available from the Fiex System Information Center:
http://pic.dhe.ibmcom/infocenter/fIexsys/informflon/topic/com.Ienovc . c.en2092.doc/
Io_module.po$?ux2.htm1
• Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Sca/ab/e Switch Installation Guide
• Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Sca/ab/e Switch App/ication Guide
• Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Sca/ab/e Switch Industiy Standard CLI Command Reference
For additiortal FIex System information, see these resources:
• Fiex System Enterprise Chassis Product Guide:
bttp://!enovopress.com/tipsO865
• Fiex System Products and Technology, SG24-8255:
http:ílenovopress.comisg248255
• Fiex System lnteroperability Guide:
http://lenovopress.com/fsig
• Product Guides for Fiex System compute nodes and optionshttp://Ienovopress.com/flexsysterri
Related product families
Product families relatad to this document are the following:
• 1 Gb Embedded I/O Modules
• Blade Networking Modules
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch
16
Notices
Lenovo may not off er the products, services, or features discussed in this document in ah countries. Consult your
local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that onhy that Lenovo product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibihity to evaluate and
verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent
applications covering subject matter described in this document. The fumishing of this document does not give you
any ¡¡cense to these patents. You can send ¡¡cense inquines, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS lS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OP
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Sorne jurisdictions do not ahlow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the pubhication. Lenovo may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this pubhication at any time
without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other ¡¡fe support apphications
where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not
affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express
or imphied ¡¡cense or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information
contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result
obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distnibute any of the information you supply
in any way it behieves appropriate without incurring any obhigation to you.
Any references ¡n this pubhication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the matenlais
for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein
was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Sorne measurements may have been made on development-Ievel systems and thene is no
guarantee that these measurements wilh be the same en generally available systems. Furthermore, sorne
measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should venify the apphicable data for their specific environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2016. AII rights reserved.
This document, TIPSO861, was created or updated on May 11, 2016.
Send us your comments in one of the following ways:
o
Use the onhine Contact us review form found at:
http://lenovopress.corníflP90861
Send your comments in an e-mail te:
ujil iinensíe ovope.orn
This document is available onhine at http://Ienovopress.com/TIPSO861.
Lenovo FIex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Scalable Switch
17
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, and For Those Who Do are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the
United States, other countnes, or both. A current Iist of Lenovo trademarks is available Qn the Web at
http://www.ienovo.com/legaI/copytrade.htmL
The foliowing terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
Lenovo XCIarityTM
NMotion®
VMready®
Fiex SystemTM
RackSwitchTM
The foliowing terms are trademarks of other companies:
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Lenovo Fiex System EN2092 1 G Ethernet Sca!able Switch
18
inner
consulting
Anexo
Técnico
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
.aUe 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
OPURESTORAGE
Bogotá 15 de Septiembre de 2016
Señores
FEDERACIÓN COLOMBIANA DE MUNICIPIOS
DIRECCIÓN NACIONAL SIMIT
La Ciudad
Asunto: Certificación como canal autorizado para el PROCESO DE SELECCIÓN No. 016 DE 2016 - LICITACIÓN
PÚBLICA, Cuyo Objeto es: Adquisición, instalación, configuración y puesta en funcionamiento de equipos de cómputo
(Servidores, estaciones de trabajo, computadores), almacenamiento, software e infraestructura de tecnología de
información y comunicaciones para fortalecer la plataforma tecnológica de la Federación Colombiana de Municipios Dirección Nacional Simit..
Pure Storage INC, 650 Castro Street, Suite 400 Mount View, CA 94041 certifica que la compañía INNERCONSULT1NG
SAS Identificación: NIT 900196816 - 9 con domicilio es canal autorizado de los productos ofrecidos de Pure Storage
durante el año de 2016.
Atentamente,
Leo Higuera
LATAM SALES TERRITORY MANAGER
CEL +57 317 6564197
EMAIL leopurestorage.com
Y4-23-14
p
iSHARRAW/M
Business and IT Transformation in 3U
TRANSFORM IT
Who knew that movng to al¡-flash storage could help reduce the cost of IT?
FlashArrayl/m makes server and worktoad investments more productive, white
lowering storage spend by up to 50%. Reduce the comptexity of storage dramaticahy
to m'ke IT more agite and efficient, accelerating your journey to the cloud.
TRANSFORM YOUR BUSINESS
------ -.------------------------••-=.=..-•
-. -. .
Make yow orgarzaion faster by accelerating apptications, increasing revenue, driving
higher productvtty out of staff and systems and creating a sustainable advantage
FiashArrayilm's performance can also make your business smarter by unleashing the
power of real-time anatytics, driving customer loyatty, and creating new, innovative
customer experiences that simply weren't possible with disk.
...ALL BY TRANSFORMING YOUR STORAGE WJTH FLASHARRAW/M
ALL-FLASH STORAGE FOR EVERY WORKLOAD
FlashArray//m enables you to transform your rack, data center, or cloud, with an
affordahte alt-flash array capable of consolidating alt your key business applications.
MINI SME
MIGHTV PERFORMANCE
Reduce power, space and
complexity by 90%
Change your application's and user's
expectations of storage performance
• 3U base chassis
• Up to 300,000 32K IOPS
• 15-120+ TBs usable
• Up to 9 GBIs bandwidth
• "1kWofpower
• 6 cables
<ims average latency
MODULAR SCALE
MEANINGFUL SIMPUCITY
Scale hm inside and outside of
the chassis for generations
Apptiance-Iike deptoyment with
worry-free operations
• Expandable to
PB usable
via expansion shelves
• PIug-and-go deployment that
takes minutes, not days
• Upgrade controllers and
drives - without downtime
• Non-disruptive upgrades and
Iot-swap everything
Less parts = more reliability
O233
PURESTORAGE
Hetlo Possibl&
satesapurestorage.com 1 800-379-PU RE 1 @purestorage
MODULAR UPGRADABILITY FOR GENERATIONS
The FlashArray//m expands upon the FlashArray's modular, stateless architecture, designed to enabe
modular expandability and upgradability for generations. The hm leverages a chassis-based design wit'
customizable modules, enabling both capacity and performance to be iidependently imDroved over Um'::
with advances in compute and flash, to always meet your business needs.
hM CHASSIS
FLASH MODULES
Ny-RAM MODULES
The llm Chassis leverages interna¡
PCle networking for controller HA,
as well as both PCIeINVMe and 12Gb
SAS for flash and Ny-RAM module
connectivity. The result is ultra-fast
module connections that enable hotplug and HA of every component.
Dual-drive flash modules pack two
independent SSDs in each slot,
doubling the potential performance
and density. Drive modules are
redundantly connected to both
controllers, and can be replaced
without performance tmpact.
NV-DDR4 non-volatile cache modules
are used to protect writes when power
is lost during I/O processing from
power loss. DDR4 memory is backed
by super capacitors, and the modules
can retain their data for 1 year without
power. 2 or 4 redundant modules are
networked with hot-swap PCIe/NVMe.
EXPANSION SHELVES
CONTROLLER MODULES
I/O MODULES
FlashArray//m can expand outside the
hm Chassis with 12Gb SAS networking.
12TB or 24TB expansion shelves are
available, with 1-4 shelves connected
per chassis.
The hm features four controller options,
to allow different tiers of performance
and capacity. New controllers are
shipped roughty annually, and can
be replaced or upgraded without
performance impact.
The hm has onboard SAS, replication,
and management ports, and host-based
O ports can be configured to meet a
variety of needs. 6 slots per chassis,
configurable with 8 or 16 Gb/s FC,
or 10 Gb/s Ethernet ¡SCSI.
PURESTORAGE
Helio Posslble
salestpurestorage.com 1 800-379-PURE 1 ©purestorage
1
POWERED BY THE
PURITY OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Purity implements advanced data reduction, storage management and flash management features, and
ah features of Purity are included in the base cost of the array.
P4.A*(DUCt
øOTlCT
MTvOe
STORAGE SOFTWARE
BUILT FOR FLASH
GRANULAR
AND ADAPTIVE
The FlashCare technology
virtuahizes the entire pool of
flash within the FlashArray.
and allows Purity to both
extend the life and ensure
the maximum performance of
consumer-grade MLC flash.
Purity Core is based upon a
512-byte variable block size
metadata ¡ayer cahled the Purity
Core. This fine-grain metadata
enables ah of Purity's data and
flash management services to
operate at the highest efficiency.
RIHCAf
DISASTER RECOVERY BUILT IN
BEST DATA REDUCTION
AVAILABLE
HIGHLYAVAILABLE
AND RESIUENT
Purity FlashReduce implements
fve forms of inline and postprocess data reduction to
offer the most complete data
reduction in the industry. Data
reduction operates at a 512byte aligned variable block size,
to enable effective reduction
across a wide range of mixed
workloads without tuning.
Resiliency is job 1 for Purity.
FlashProtect implements
high availabihity, dual-parity
RAID-3D, non-disruptive
upgrades, and encryption,
al¡ of which are designed to
dehiver fuhi performance to the
FlashArray during any failure or
maintenance event.
Flash Recover combines spacesaving snapshots, rephication, and
protection pohicies into an end-toend data protection and recovery
solutíon that protects data
against loss locally and globaHy.
AlI Flash Protect services are
fully-integrated in the FlashArray
and leve rage the native data
reduction capabihities.
CLOUD-BASED MANAGEMENT AND SUPPORT
PURE STORAGE
Helio Possibi&
PUREI MANAGE
PUREI SUPPORT
By combining local weh-based
management with cloud-based
monitoring, Purel Manage allows
you to manage your FlashArray
wherever you are - with just a
web hrowser.
FlashArray//m is constanthy
cloud-connected, enabhing
Pure Storage to dehiver the most
proactive support experience
possihle. Highly trained staff
combined with big data analytics
help resolve problems before
they start.
PUREI CONNECT
PUREI COLLABORATE
A rich set of APIs, plugins,
apphication connectors, and
automation toolkits enable you
to connect FlashArray/!m to
aP your data center and cloud
monitoring, management, and
orchestretion tools.
Extend your development and
support experience online,
leveraging the Purel Cohlaborate
community to get peer-based
support, and to share tips, tricks,
and scripts.
salesipurestorage.com 1 800-379-PURE 1 @purestorage
CONSOLIDATE APPLICATIONS
WITH PREVALIDATED SOLUTIONS
The FlashArray//m is tested and vaidated with a wide range of data center
infrastructure and applications ro enable seamless deployment and muti-workIoad
consolidation in your data center. Depioyments can be further accelerated with
FlashStack - end-to-end converged infrastructure powered by flash and supported
by our partners.
BUSINESS APPUCAT1ONS
ORACLE
.7
'HANA
V1RTUAUZATION APID
CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE
vmware
ÓvSphere
SQL Server
O mongoDB
*TURBO redhat. openstack
DESKTOP VIRTUALIZATION
DATA CENTER INFRASTRUCTURE
vmware
U
,la CiTJX
•cIsco
'I'•'i'.
Honzon View
flVIDIA.
Xen top
BROCADE
vrnware
COMMVAULT '
ARISTA
EXPERIENCE EVERGREEN STORAGE
® Evergreen'M Storage
Tired of the 3-5 year array replacement merry-go-round? The move to FlashArrayí/m
can be your last data migration! Purchase and deploy storage once and once only
- then expand capacity and performance incrementaUy in conjunction with your
business and without downtime. Pure Storage's vision for Evergreen Storage is
deJivered by a combination of the FlashArray's stateless, modular architecture and the
ForeverRash business model, enabling you to extend the lifecycle of storage from 3-5
years to a decade or more.
/1m70
11m50
jimiO
100,000 32K IOPS
UP TO 25+ TB
O PLIRESTORAGE
Helio Possible
11m20
150,000 32K IOPS
UP TO 120+ TB
220.000 32K IOPS
UP TO 250' TB
300.000 32K IOPS
UP TO 400 TB
saIespurestorage.com 1 800-379-PURE 1 @purestorage
CAPACITY CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
Capacity packs are avaflabie to accommodate any deployment. Expand capacity onUne within
or outside the base chassis with fIexibity to mix and match flash capacities and generations.
EXPAND UP TO 400TBS
WITH EXPANSION SHELVES
UP TO 120 TB USABLE
IN BASE CHASSIS
Usable
-•-------- ----
-
I5T8
Usable
II1I UtflI 60T8
30TB
____
30TB
WL.1i:11q11 90TB
Usable
ll:lT!F 36TB
60TB
24 T13 Shelf
10-MODULE
CAPACITY PACKS
512 GB
Modules
1TB
Modules
2T
Modules
I
I1U 45T8
132TB
II1IW[I)1I 12OTB
Up to 4 shelves / array
Note. Offly two contigurations supported en //miO are 5T5. and 2 a 5TB
CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
IIMIO
capacity
Performance
Connectivity
Physkal
11M50
//M20
/1M70
Upto25TBs
effective capacity'
Up to 120+ TBs
effective capacity*
Upto 250+TBs
effective capacity*
Up to 450+ TBs
effective capacity
5 - 10TBs raw capacity
5 - 40TBs raw capacity
30— 88TBs raw capacity
44— 136TBs raw capacity
Up to 100,000 32K IOPS"
Up to 150,000 32K IOPS**
Up to 220,000 32K IOPS"
Up to 300,000 32K IOPS"
<ims average latency
<ims average latency
<lms average latency
<ims average latency
Up to 3 GB/s bandwidth
Up to 5 GBIs bandwidth
Up to 7 GBIs bandwidth
Up to 9 GBIs bandwidth
16 Gb/s Fibre Channel
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
16 Gb/s Fibre Channel
16 Gb/s Fibre Channel
10 Gb/s Ethernet ISCSI
10 Gb/s Ethernet SCSI
10 Gb/s Ethernet 1SCSI
10 Gb/s Ethernet 1SCSI
1 Gb/s Management &
Replication ports
10 Gb/s Replication ports
10 Gb/s Replication ports
10 Gb/s Replication ports
1GbIs Management ports
1 Gb/s Management ports
1 Gb/s Management ports
31.1
3U"'"
610 Watts (nominal)
742 Watts (nominal)
105 lbs (47.6 kg)
110 lbs (49.9 kg) fully loaded 110 lbs (49.9 kg) fully
loaded+ 44 lbs per
5.12 x 18.94" x 29.72"
¡
expansion shelf
chassis
5.12" x 18.94" x 29.72"
chassis
5.12" x 18.94" x 29.72"
chassis
13U - 7U
1007- 1447 Watts (nominal)
5U-11U
1439 - 2099 Watts (nominal)
110 lbs (49.9 kg) fully
Ioaded+ 44 lbs per
expansion shelf
5.12" x 18.94" x 2972"
chassls
Note: 411 specificateons toe FlashArray//miO te?" pelsminery and suhjecttofeaielezaiior before GA.
Effective cacacety assurnes HA. RAID, and neetadata overhead GB-lo-GiS corversiore. and includes the benefit of dala rteductjon weth always-ore inline deduplication, compresmon, & parterre
removal. Average data reductoei a caecuiated al 5-to-1
'ley dotes Pure Storage quotei 32K, set 4K IOPS? The industry corremorrly fiCiSteIs 4K IOPS herechmarks 10 inhale oerfcrmance nurnbees, but real-world envetonrnents are dominated by 1O
ivzes of 32K or larger. FlashArray adapts autornatic&lyto 5128.32KG 10 fr cuocro- oeriorrnarec€-. scaiob'lty. cred dala reductos.
/'m20 can be expended beyond the 31) base chassis wth expansion shelvos.
flntre Oro ,ighout es based os 100% 32KiB reads.
<1PURESTORAGE"
Heflo Possibl&
sales@purestorage.com 1 800-379-PU RE 1 @purestorage
© 2016 Pure Storege. Inc. Alt riglets reserved. Pure Storage, and the P logo are trademarks oc tegislered trademarks of Pure Slorage, Inc. Alt olher nemes may be trademarks of their respective owners.
ps_ds5p_flashae-reyml0_04
c3 P u rel
Compatibility Matrix
The compatibility matrix Hsts third-party products thai have been fully tested and qualified for use with the Pure Storage
FlashArray.
Pure Storage provides best-effort integration support for all vendors/models. If a specific vendar or praduct model is not
usted, please contact your Pure Storage representative to determine if it is supported.
Please refer ta best practices documentation in the joiution section for your environment when deploying FlashArray
with supported operating systems and hypervisars. FoUowing best practices documentation wUh hehp aptimize
FlashArray performance and resihiency for the supported operating systems and hypervisars.
For any caveats rehated to switch and HBA cannectivity, please see aur fleid support bulletin. The buhletin wiht cover
caveats with 3rd party hardware praducts and hist mitigation steps.
ndicates a link lo a Best Practice Guide.
indicates a caveat / issue of importance.
Operating Systems
Unless otherwise specified, Pure Storage supports allí major operating system versions usted plus their
minor and maintenance releases.
AIX
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArray//m
1
1
FA-400
FlashArray//m
AhX6.1
[AIX 7-1
HP-UX
sí
FA-300
2016 Copyght Pure Storage. AU ñghts reseed.
b
Operating Systems
Unless otherwise specified, Pure Storage supports ah major operating system versions Usted plus their
minor and maintenance releases.
HP-UX lii v2 (B.11.23)
F
HP-UX 11 i v3 (B. 11.3 1)
Linux
CentOS
(Equivalent to RHEL -see behow)
Oracle Enterprise Linux
5.6
Boot from SAN not supported due
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArray//m
-
-
-
/
Orade Enterprise Linux
6.5, 6.7, 7.1
/
Debian 7.5.0
(With Linux Kernel 3.2)
-
RHEL 5.5 x64, RHEL 5.6
x64, RHEL 5.7 x64, RHEL
5.8 x64, RHEL 5.9
x64, RHEL 5.10 x64,
RHEL 5.11 x64
RHEL 6.0 x64, RHEL 6.1
x64, RHEL 6.2 x64, RHEL
6.3 x64, RHEL 6.4
x64, RHEL 6.5 x64
RHEL 6.6 x64
6.7 x64
-
IL
to Oracle Bug
RHEL
RHEL 6.8
RHEL7.0x64
RHEL 7.1x64
©2016 Copyright Pure Storage. AU nghts reserved.
IL
Operating Systems
Unless otherwise specified, Pure Storage supports afi major operating system versions usted plus their
minor and maintenance releases.
RHEL7.2x64
SLESIOSP3*
1,
1
SLESI1SP3*
Ir
SLES12*
/
SLESI2.l*
/
¡SCSI multipath boot
/
/
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArrayllm
-
/
/
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArray//m
from SAN is currently not supported
Microsoft
BP
Windows Server 2008 R2
SP1
Windows Server2Ol2
Windows Server 2012 R2
Oracle Solaris
8P
Solanslüu9orgreater/
SPARC *
Solaris 10 u9 or greater /
x64 *
Solans ll.2 x86*
Solaris 11.2 SPARC
Solaris 11.3 Sparc
t
!ncludes ZFS Support
©2016 Copyright Pure Storage. AH rights reserved.
3
Unified Compute System
Cisco UCS
-
FA-300
FA-400
-
1
FA-300
FA-400
FI ashArrayl/m
UCS 2.2(7)
(FC, SOS!, Direct
Connect)
UCS 2.2(6)
(FC, 1SCSI, Direct
Connect)
UCS 2.1.2 (FC)
UCS 2.2.2/2.2.3 (FC
SCSI, Direct Connect)
UCS 3.0.2 Mini (FC,
iSOSLDirect Connect)
UCS 3.1(1g)
(FC, SCSI, Direct
Connect)
II
DataCore
FlashArray//m
IL
SANsymphonyN
EMC VPLEX
-L
J
FA400
FlashArray//m
FA-400
FlashArray//m
1
1
VPLEX 53+
Iease see blog posting
:rdptaífs on s,nnort
Hitachi Virtual
g
FA-300
G1000, G800, G600,
G400, G200, VSP, HUSVM
Support vÉa profile
installation tool/ USP-V is
ot supported.
Falconstor
-
EA-_300
©2016 Copyright Pure Storage. AV rights reserved.
-
jJshArrayllrn
f_FA-400
j
[7
St<)i,age
CDP/NSS 8.00, 7.8.0,
7.7,0, 7.6.0, 7.5.0, 7.0.0
FSS
1
1
IBM SVC
FA-300
FA400
FlashArraylIm
Flas
7.2.0.2 and higher
'1
-
Symantec Storage
Foundation
(rebranded Infoscale)
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArray/fm
Solaris SF/ SFHA 5.1
11
/
-
RHELJOEL SFRAC
/
1
1
1
Windows
2008R2 / SFRAC 6.0,6.1,
6.2, 7.0
1
1
1
Windows 2012/ SFRAC
6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 7.0
1
1
1
6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 7.0
SLES/ SFRAC 6.0,61,
6.2, 7.0
Hypervisors
CltrIx
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArray//m
FA-300
FA400
FlashArraylIm
Xen Server 6.2 (FC
&
iSCSI)
XenServer 6.5 (FC &
ÍSCSI)
Citflx HCL Listrng Pendng
XenDesktop 7.0, 7.5
Linux
2016 Coyright Pure Storage. Al¡rights reserved.
Hypervisors
KVM 6.0 (must be
installed on an RHEL
system)
1
1
/
Microsoft
FA-300
FA-400
FlashArrayllm
/
1
FA-400
FlashArrayllm
/
1
Hyper-V in Windows 2012
R2
(covered by Windows
2012 certification)
Oracle
FA-300
Orade VM 3.2
Oracle VM 3.3 FC & iSCSI
/
Note: iSCSI Chap not supported
VMware
ESX 4.1 U3
FA-300
FA-400
FC only
FC only
FlashArrayllm
F
* ESA 5.0, ESA 5.0 Ui,
ESA 5.0 U2, ESA 5.0 U3
FC Only
* ESA 5.1, ESA 5.1
UI, ESA 5.1 U2, ESA 5.1
U3
/
/
/
1'
* ESA 5.5, ESA 5.5 Ui,
ESXi5.5U2
-
-
* ESA 6O
* VAAI must be enabied Qn the ESA hosts that are connected to Pure Storage FlashArray devices.
Contact Pure Storage Support if VAAI is
disabled.
Network Adapters and Switches
r
Fibre Channel HBA's
FA-300
©2016 Copyright Pure Storage. Afl nghts reserved.
FA400
FlashArrayllm
Network Adapters and Switches
Brocade 825
Brocade 826
1
1
-
1
1
1
Emulex LPe11000
Emulex LPeI 2000
Emulex LPeI2002-M8
/
1
Emulex HP-LPeI605
* Emulex LPel600x
(covers both dual and single
portad HBA's - they use the
1
same driver/ASIC)
HP Emulex 82E
1
1
QLogic QLE2400
/
1
QLogic QLE2500
1
1
1
QLogic QLE2600
-
1
1
QLogicQMH2400
1
1
1
1
11 1
HP QLogic 820
/
1BMFC5735
Sun Emulex LPe12002-S
1
Sun QLogic 371-4325-02
II 1
1
* Please refer to fleid supøort bulletin
Note: Direct attached FlashArray is supported for tested HBA's, operating systems, and hypeniisors.
Fibre Channel Switches 11 FA-300
Brocade
300, 4100, 5000, 5100,
VA-40FC, 5300, 54XX,
65XX, 7800, DCX-4S,
DCX, 6505, 6510, 6520,
2016 Copyright Pure Storage. AV rights reserved.
11 FA-400
11 FlashArrayllm
Network Adapters and Switches
DCX 8510-4, DCX
8510-8, G620
co
S 9000 Sedes, Nexus
0 Sedes, Nexus 6000
1
s
[Sede
10Gb Ethernet NICs
FA-300
Broadcom NetXtreme II
57712 10Gb
Chelsio T420-SO
1
FA.400
F
FIashArray/fm
1
1
¶1
1
Emulex OneConnect
OCeII100IOGbE
vy
Intel 82599EB 10Gb
1
/
Mellanox MT27500 Family
1
/
QLogiccLOM82l4l/
1OGbE
/
10Gb Switches
FA-300
Arista 7050S-52
/
Cisco UCS 6248UP
/
Brocade VDX 6370
©2016 Copyright Pure Storage. Afi rights reserved.
1
1
FA-400
FlashArrayllm
/
/
/
/
}
le
O PURESTORAGE
FLASHRECOVER
SNAPSHOTS
lnstant, Iimitless snapshots re-imagined
for 100% flash storage
M
FLASHRECOVER SNAPSHOTS DELIVER SPACE EFFICIENT, SCALABLE, AND SIMPLE
TO MANAGE SNAPSHOTS WITH ZERO COMPROMISES
FlashRecover Snapshots are an intrinsic part of the
Purity Operating Environment. They deliver superior
space efficiency, high scalability, and simplicity ofvolurne
Copy-on-Write Snapshots:
snapshot management.
Severa¡ storage vendors have developed various technologies
to optimize the space requirements and reduce the
performance impact of snapshots on their storage systems.
Sriapshot Creation
Jnstantaneous (No copy required at creation)
No additional space required
The two most commonly used technologies - Copy-on-Write
and Redirect-on-Write - are optimized to reduce the capacity
requirernents of snapshots however they differ in their impact
on performance.
Both Copy-on-Write and Redirect-on-Write snapshots update
the metadata associated with the blocks of a volume at the
time of snapshot creation. However. with Copy-on-Write, any
suman
sumas
plazas
•I•IU
masas
III. liq
Snapshot
subsequent overwrites to the original blocks cause the storage
system to first copy the blocks to a pre-designated snapshot
Original Volume
area and then new data is overwritten in-place, resulting in the
storage system suffering at least a 2X write penalty for each
block overwrite. Redirect-on-Write snapshots overcome this
2X write-penalty of Copy-on-Write snapshots by redirecting ah
Block Overwrites
overwrites to new blocks, thus incurring no additional writes or
• Requires 2X writes (Write performance impact)
data copy.
• Reserved space required for snapshots
Though Redirect-on-Write ¡5 efficient during snaQshot creation
and block overwrites, it pays a high performance penalty on
disk-based storage systems as they age with a large numbers
of snapshots. Each time a new snapshot is created, the
2dVIU
redirection of subsequent writes causes data to become more
fragmented. Thus, disk-based storage systems have difficulty
in cost-efficiently handling large amounts of random reads
and writes with competitively low response times due to non-
New block
update request
III..
IISII
suma
>
unas
goza
1
u.
contiguous data. Pure Storage is able to consistently dehiver
competitively low response times for both random reads and
Original Volume
writes as the fragmentation caused by Redirect-on-Write
snapshots does not impose the performance penalties en flash
drives as experienced by the disk-based storage systems.
¡1
PURESTORAGE
=
_III
© Pure Storage 2014 12
Redirect-on-Write Snapshots:
Snapshot Creation
Block Overwrites
• !nstantaneous
Data pattern in aged systems
Directed to new location
• Fra gmented data allocation
• Metadata update on creation
• Snapshots and Unused spaces
spread over array
u
II
cet
Wrlte
3tI u r
Recast
New Wntes and
wr$tes are
directed to new
I.u...s.0
location
II II 1 III
alIl:UIl
• :l lis 1
masas
suuuu
III •U lIUU •U UuUuuu• •o u@
i ilil liii 111111 U liii U
I U •l
UI
1 U I:ll
III: U •. malos loma aula la
Snapshot
The Purity Operating Environment uses distributed three-
or overwritten on a Pure Storage FlashArray, new blocks
dimensional metadata that introduces a leve¡ of redirection
are allocated for the incoming writes or overwrites and the
associated with each volume. The metadata is used as a
redirection ¡ayer is updated to reflect the most recent data on
logical ¡ayer to lookup physical blocks on the FlashArray. The
the flash. As data grows in the system, the Purity Operating
metadata is laid out in a format that helps the Purity Operating
Environment's proprietary metadata optimization process
Environment reduce the space required for metadata and to
actively collapses the metadata to further reduce block lookup
improve block lookup for faster reads. When a block is written
to a single metadata mapping, making data reads much faster.
FlashRecover Snapshots:s
FlashArray's aged data layout with metadata
Snapshot Creation
u.u..
suma
sumas
!uIuI
Re*ectlars Iayer
aMetadata with
Iogkal rangeof
I5ed blocks
Blocks on Flash
ArTay
Client lO
Request
post.
snapshots
-
I!
duÑg snapshot
aeatlon
II
iuuuuu
uuuuu
iuuuuu
,
Redirection tayer of
Metadata with
logical range of
usad blocks
Blocks on
FlashArray
1
01PURESTORAGE
1
© Pure Storage 2014 13
FlashRecover Snapshots:
New block writes or overwrites
New volume activation from existing Snapshot
masas
New nmte~ and blodcs
creMed for overwrftes
11111
liii"
11111
iilii
iui.i
•
u.
*15111
Blocks on Rash
Array
New Volume
created from
snapshot
Bbdon
1
RashArray
Redrection Iayer
of Metadata wlth
Iogic& range of
used blocks
r
Redfrection layer
of Metadata after
metadata
optimization
The three-dimensional metadata and the redirection ¡ayer
make snapshots inherent to the Purity Operating Environment.
Snapshots share the same metadata structure as volumes,
incurring no additional cost on capacity and performance.
During snapshot creation, only the red irection ¡ayer is updated
in an atomic operation with no data copy or block move.
The atomic operation aliows Pure Storage FlashArray to
instantaneously take snapshots off multiple volumes with no
impact to the client lO and to the performance of the overall
storage system. Writes and overwrites, following the creation of
a snapshot, continue to allocate new blocks on flash as usual.
Zero Performance Penalties
100% Metadata Operation
• lnstantaneously create mu/ti-volume time consistent
FLASHRECOVER SNAPSHOTS ARE
JUST NEW VOLUMES WITH FULL
CAPABILITIES. THEY INHERIT THE
DATA REDUCTION CHARACTERISTICS
OF THEIR PARENT VOLUME AND CAN
BE RESTORED INSTANTANEOUSLY TO
ANY VOLUME
The Purity Operating Environment does not differentiate
between volumes and snapshots. Snapshots are just volumes
with static data and are programmaticafly made non-writable.
Unlike snapshots in other storage arrays, FlashRecover
snapshots are not owned by a volume, and hence can be used
to restore any volume or to create new volumes.
O PURESTORAGE
snapshots with zero impact to client ¡O
• Create 1000s of snapshots without disrupting
system latency
Zero Recovery Restrictions
• Create new volumes from any snapshot or assign
snapshots to any existing volume
• !nstantly recover snapshots to active volumes
© Pure Storage 2014 14
FlashRecover snapshots are thin provisioned with no
dedicated space allocated. As data ¡5 overwritten in the
volumes, new capacity ¡5 assigned to the overwritten blocks
while unchanged blocks are shared between snapshots and
volumes. Additionally, the Purity Operating Environment data
structures allow snapshots to preserve the granular data
reduction efficiencies of volumes through global deduplication
and compression, thus volume snapshots require minimal
physical capacity on flash drives.
Zero
Data Duplication
Snapshots preserves data reduction of parent
volume through pattern removal, deduplication
The snapshot management interface is designed to provide
and compression
flexibility, scale, and ease of use. The interface allows users
to select one or multiple volumes simultaneously in order to
create a consistent point-in-time snapshot of ah the selected
volumes. Snapshots can also be created instantaneously
for al¡ the volumes owned by a host or host group thereby
providing a consistent view of data for al¡ the volumes
assigned to selected hosts at a given point in time. Purity
snapshot also protect volumes from accidental deletion
by creating an interna¡ snapshot before a volume delete is
triggered. Leveraging FlashArray's flexible protection pohicy
management, user can automate the creation and retention of
snapshots for local data protection and recovery.
Zero Space Overhead
Snapshots are aiways (hin provisioned and
share (he blocks with volumes incurring
practically Zero space overhead
ACCELERATED VOLUME CLONING
AND XCOPY LEVERAGE PURE
STORAGE'S ROBUST AND RELIABLE
SNAPSHOT TECHNOLOGY
Pure Storage heverages FlashRecover Snapshots' robust and
flexible design to incorporate data rephication and protection
solutions such as fast cloning of VMs, apphication-offloaded
workloads (XCOPY), and volume data protection. As Pure
Zero Complexity
Automate multi-volume snapshot
Storage introduces new capabihities to its Fha shArray, Purity
creation and retention through
snapshot's rehiable and efficient technology will continue to
flexible pollcy-based management
evolve in new forms.
(S PURESTORAGE
© Pure Storage 2014 15
FI
ffl
PURESTORAGE
Pure Storage, Inc.
Twitter: ©purestorage
650 Castro Street, Suite #400
Mountain View. CA 94041
T:650-290-6088
F:650-625-9667
Sales: salespurestorage.com
Support: support@purestorage.com
Media: pr@purestorage.com
General: info@purestorage.com
p
O PURESTORAGE
PURE STORAGE
DATA-AT-REST ENCRYPTION
FLASHARRAY DELl VERS ALWAYS-ON AES-256 DATA-AT-REST ENCRYPTION WITH ZERO
COMPROMISES
Pure Storage FlashArray deploys always-on data-at-rest encryption using secure AES-256 encryption to
protect against data compromise due to loss of individual SSD or a group of SSDs from the FlashArray.
Each SSD attached to the FlashArray is encrypted using a key that is interna! to the SSD. The drive keys
are also protected using an interna¡ Purity Operating Environment generated password that is specific
and never leaves the Purity Operating
for each SSD. The password is randomly generated
Environment. The combination of SSD keys and interna¡ password enhances the protection leve¡ for
Pure Storage FlashArray.
The figure below walks through the process of generating individual password for each of the SSD
drives. The Purity Operating Environment first generates a random initial secret which is used to
generate the per-device key to lock or unlock individual devices. After the initial secret is generated,
FlashArray uses a unique secret sharing mechanism that encodes the secret, generating N shares.
SSO
Share
Share 1
1
lrstial Secret
II
Share
1
Split Purity Secret
into multiple shares
2J
Share N
Share 3
Drive
Quorum
with
dlstbuted
shares
SSS 2
Share..
.
SS N
SSO N
1
Each of the N shares are then written to headers of N SSDs. M out of N drives form a quorum of drives
within FlashArray. The quorum is formed in such a way that slightly more than half of the number of
SSDs attached to FlashArray are required to rebuild the secret and thus to unlock the drives. If a single
drive is separated from the quorum, its data will be unreadable without having sufficient number of
shares from other drives. A new initial secret is generated daily and its shares are re-distributed among
SSDs. The daily generation of initial secret protects the data in the case of losing one drive a day from
the FlashArray, as any drives with oid shares cannot be used to reconstruct the new secret.
The distributed shares are used to generate the password for each individual drive as shown in the
figure below. The shares are gathered together to reconstruct the initial secret, which is then hashed
with serial number of each SSD to generate drive specific password. The password is then used to
protect the SSD lock keys.
Drive Quorum
with distobuted
shares
1
1
Gather sufflcient
shares to
reconstruct secret
1
Purity Secret
1
Hash
ty Secret
1
1
Drive
password
Hash initial secret and drive
serial number to generate
drive password
Drive Serial #
b
,l
0.
O PURE STORAG EJLJJ1
© Pure Storage 2013 12
Proprietary and Confidential.
kIrA r1,%I itrr
When the Purity Operating Environment starts, it attempts to unlock the drives in the quorum. To do
this, it gathers all of the shares from the drives in the system. If there is a quorum of drives with keys
that agree, the system can unlock the drives. When a device is added to the system, it should have the
updated headers written first to show the device in the system. Once the headers have been written,
onhy then should the key be changed from its default value to the new key based on the quorum. Only
after the key is changed on the drive can the drive be used to store data.
FlashArray's data-at-rest encryption is efficíent in protecting physical loss of drives but does not protect
the data from the loss of entire system as the entire system has enough shares to reconstruct the initial
secret.
PURESTORAGE
Pure Storage, Inc.
Twitter: ©purestorage
650 Castro Street, Suite #400
Mountain View, CA 94041
T: 650-290-6088
F: 650-625-9667
O PURESTORAGEI1
Proprietary and Confidential.
NDA REQUIRED
Pure Storage 2013 13
E
inner
consulting
Anexo
Técnico
0
J---- (+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
aLte 119A # 70 G -91/ Bogotá, Colombia
ThinkPad P50 Platform Specifications
6th Generation Intel CoreTM 17 Processor or Intel Xeonll Processor E3 v5 Family
1
Processor 1 # of
f#ot
Processor
Base 1 Max Turbo ' Cache
INumber
Graphics
Cores Threadsi Frequencyl Frequencyl
Types 1
1
[i7-6700HQ 1
GHz 1 6MB
2.6 GHz 1
lIntel HO Graphicsj
530
117-6820HQ
2.7 GHz 1 3.6 GHz 8MB
4
8
DDR4-21331
2.8 GHz 1 3.7 GHz 1
lIntel HO Graphicsl
1E3-15051VI v5I
P530
5351VI v51
19 GHz 1 3.8 GHz T-811
1
1
Product Spocificatioris Reference(PSREF)
Smart card readerOptional: Smart card reader
One slot (ExpressCard/34)
ExpressCard
4-in-1 reader (MMC, SD, SDHC, SDXC), supports UHS-II SD card
Media reader
Four USB 3.0 (one Always On), USB Type-C /Thunderbolt 3, Mini DisplayPort,
Ports
HDMI, Ethernet (RJ-45), Dock connector
Camera (optional)HD720p resolution, 10w light sensitivo, fixed focus
HD Audio, Realtek® ALC3268 codec / stereo speakers, 1.5W x 2 /
Audio support
dual array microphone, combo audio/microphone jack
Graphics
Intel HD Graphics 530 or P530 in processor and
6-row, spill-resistant, multimedia Fn keys, numeric keypad, optional LED backlight
Keyboard
NVIDIA Quadroll M1 000M (2GB or 4GB memory) or M2000M (4GB memory);
UItraNavTM
3-button TrackPoint pointing device and
supports external digital monitor via HDMI, Mini DisplayPort, or Thunderbolt°M;
3-button crystal silk surface multi-touch touchpad
supports four independent displays;
Power-on password, hard disk password, supervisor password, security keyhole
Security
Max resolution: 3840x2160@60Hz (DisplayPort via Mini DisplayPort cable);
Security chip
Trusted Platform Module, TCG 1 .2-compliant
3840x2160@60Hz (Thunderbolt); 3840x21 60@3OHz (HDMI)
Delivers improved thermal and power efficiency, up to 30 day standby,
ThinkEngine
Chipset
Mobile Intel CM236 Chipset (Intel GL82CM236 PCH)
faster resume time, enhanced security, as well as anti-tampering measures
Memory
64GB max7 / 2133MHz DDR4, ECC or non-ECC (ECC function supported only on vPro (optional)
Intel vPro Technology
Xeon processor), dual-channel capable, four DDR4 SO-DIMM sockets
Fingerprint readerTouch style fingerprint reader on the paim rest
Display
Sorne: 15.6" (396mm) FHD (1920x1080), anti-glare, LED backlight, IPS, 250 nits, Color calibration Optional: Pantone color calibrator by X-Rite01 color cal ibration sensor in palm rest
16:9 aspect ratio, 600:1 contrast ratio, 45%gamut, 160° viewing angle
Lithium Polymer 4-ceIl (66Wh) or 6-ceIl (90Wh)
Battery
Sorne: 15.6 (396mm) 4K (3840x2160), anti-glare, LED backlight, IPS, 300 nits,
Max battery life1° Mode!
6-ce!!
4-ce!!
16:9 aspect ratio, 1000:1 contrast ratio, 100% gamut, 1780 viewing angle
(MobiIeMark 2014) Discreta Graph!cs
9.7 hr
7.1 hr
Multi-touch
Capacitive-type multi-touch, supports lO-finger gesture, 220 nits
13.2 hr
9.6 hr
HybridGraph!cs
ThinkPad Pen Pro, active pen for multi-touch display
Pen (optior
AC adapter
170W AC adapter
Storage
Up to 3 drives (two M.2 SSD and one HDD)
Windows 10 Pro 64
Sorne: Genuine Windows!'7
Preload
Sorne: M.2 SSD / SATA 6.OGb/s
• Lenovo Solution Center
Professional 64
Sorne: M.2 SSD / PCle NVMe, PCle 3.0 x 4, 32Gb/s
Lenovo SHAREit
•
Sorne: Windows 7 Professional 64
Sorne: HDD / SATA 6.OGb/s, 2.5" wide, 7mm high,
preinstalled through downgrade • Lenovo Companion
Shock Mounted Hard Drive, Active Protection SystemTM
• Lenovo Setting
rights in Windows 10 Pro 64
Optical
Nono
• Microsoft Office preloaded;
• Lenovo Solution Center
Ethernet
Non-vPro rnodel: Intel Ethernet Connection 1219-V (Jacksonville)
purchase a product key to activate
• Lenovo SHAREit
vPro model:
Intel Ethernet Connection 1219-LM (Jacksonville)
• McAfee LiveSafeÁ (30-day trial)
• ThinkVantage Product Recovery
WLAN4
11 ac+BT, Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260, 2x2, M.2 card
• Rescue and RecoveryTM
BluetoothTM
Bluetooth 4.1 wireless, integrated in Wi-Fi + Bluetooth combo adapter
• ThinkVantage System Update
• Adobe° Reader
WWAN (optional) Wireless WAN, Sierra Wireless EM7455,
• Microsoft" Office preloaded;
Qualcomm° 4G LTE-Advanced/DC-HSPA+/HSPA+/HSPAJUMTS/GNSS, M.2 card
purchase a product key to activate
SIM card
Micro-SIM card slot
• McAfee0 LiveSafe°M (30-day trial)
Dimensions3
WxDxH:
14.86" x 9.93" x 0.96-1.16"; 377.4mm x 252.3mm x 24.5-29.4mm
For !SV certifications, pisase visit wwwienovo.corn/support/ISV
WxDxH(Touch): 14.86" x 9.93" x 1.02-1.21"; 377.4mm x 252.3mm x 25.8-30.7mm
One of the foi!owing, configurabie by mode!:
Limited
warranty12
Weight2
Models
4-ce!!
6-ce!!
• 3-year/1-yr battery depot repair service
Non-touch
5.6 Ib! 2.55kg
5.9 lb /2.67kg
• 3-year/1-yr battery limited onsite service24
____________________________________________________
Mu!ti-touch
6.2 Ib! 2.82kg
6.4 lb / 2.90kg
• 3-year/1-yr battery limited onsite service, OID (Onsite International Delivery)
Case material
Display cover:Glass-Fiber
.
Reinforced Plastic;
MIL-STD-810G military certification
Mil-Spec test
Bottorn:
Magnesium/Aluminum
EPAVM GoId (US only); ENERGY S1R 6.1; GREENGUARD*; RoHS-compliant
Environment
Processor
inner
consu Iti ng
Anexo
Técnico
El
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
atLe 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, CoLombia
L. .J '.J L. 1 1 'rt Y Vii..) L. II J a-1- Li 1 VI %../ 1 Yl 1 '..JI
29' UltraWide IPS LED monitor with panoramic cinematic
screen. 21:9 aspect ratio at 2560x1080 resolution.
Q2963PM
DCR
a HDMI
Lir*?
e-savei
1#III!
SUN
uew
s
VA
al
ndows 8
MODEL: Q2963PM DATA SHEET
OTHER FEATURES
GENERAL FEATURES
panel type:
IPS
user control:
button
screen size:
29"
plug and play:
NA
viewable image size:
29"
speakers:
yes - 3 watts x 2
aspect ratio:
21:9
web cam:
no
brightness:
300 cd/m2
headphone out:
NA
contrast ratio (DCR):
50,000,000:1
wall mount:
yes - 100 x 100 mm
el pitch (H x V):
0.263 x 0.263 mm
height adjustable:
NA
display area (H x V):
672.8 x 283.8 mm
tilt:
-50 -200
vewing angle:
horizontal ° x vertical 178°
(CR >= 10)
SIGNAL INPUT
response time:
6 ms
analog D-sub 15 pm:
1 x VGA
color:
black
DVID 24pin
O x DVI-D
HDMI:
IxHDMI
HDMI wIMHL:
1 x HDMI w/MHL
USB 2.0:
0 x USB 2.0
USB 3.0:
0 x USB 3.0
display port (in):
1 x DP (in)
display port (out):
1 x DP (out)
support MHL:
NA
CANNING FREQUENCY
scanning frequency:
horizontal: Hz
vertical: 50-76 Hz
RESOLUTION
max resolution:
2560 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
recommended resolution:
2560 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
color resolution:
16.7 million
nower source:
Universal 110-240VAC,
50160Hz
power consumption:
QN: <45 W
STANDBY: <0.5 W
REGULATIONS
Energy Star, EPEAT Silver, CE, FCC, RoHS Compliant,
cTUVus
IN THE BOX
VGA Cable, HDMI Cable, Power Cord, USB Cable, User
Manual, Warranty Card, Driver, AOC Software, Audio Cable
tVi '.J L/ L. L... '..,
y
LOADING QUANTITY
container loading wI paflet:312 pcs
40' STD container loading w! 728 pcs
palfet:
QU.J 1 IVI LJr 1r'. 'JI 1 L L. 1
DIMENSIONS
product (WxHxD:
714mm x 388mm x 214mm
28.1" x 15.3" x 8.4"
packaging (WxHxD:
826mm x SOOmm x 172mm
32.5" x 19.7" x 6.8"
weight (NET):
6.9 kg 115.2 lbs
weight (GROSS)
10.4 kg 122.9 lbs
warranty:
3 years
UPC code:
685417054589
"•
''(
£ .L3i
Product Specifications Reference (PSÁFJ)
Thinkffinn P41fl Phitfnrm Snptifin.tinn
Cponents
ents
Intel C612 Platform Controller Hub (PCH)
Intel Active Management Technology 9
Up to one 140W Intel Xeon E5-1600 v4 family processors.
E5-2600 v4 processers are also available:
E5-2637 v4
C/3.5GHz/1 5MB/1 35W/DDR4-2400
E5.2623 v4
C/2.6GHzI1OMB/85W/DDR4-2133
E5-2620 v4
C/2.1 GHz/20MB/85W/DDR4-21 33
E5-1680 v4
C/3.4GHz/20MB/140W/DDR4-2400 333
E5-1660 v4
C/3.2GHzI2OMB/140W/DOR4-2400
C/3.6GHz/15MB/140W/DDR4-2400
E5-1650 v4
E5-1 630 v4
C/3.7GHzI1 OMB/1 40W/DDR4-2400
C/3.5GHz/1OMB/140W/DDR4-2400
E5-1620 v4
E5-1 607 v4
C13.1 GHz/1 OMB/1 40W/DDR4-21 33
IC12.8GHz/1OMB/140W/DDR4-2133
E5-1603 v4
Mecilanical
-
Memory DIMM slots14 DIMM sockets. 4-channel capable. RDIMM. ECC. DDR4-2400
Memory capacity 128GB (32GB x 4)
Two PCIe 3.0 x16 slots, up to two NVIDIA Quadro M4000, or up to one Quadro
Graphics
rap ics
M5000
Connector***
Adapter
js Memo!
$JI
2xDP
48
1GB l/_
NVS 310
2xDVI-I SL/2xDP
48
1GB 15W
NVS 315
4xmini DP
35W
192
2GB
NVS 510
8xmini DP
4GB
68W
1024
Supporting Graphic NVS 810
41W
DVI-I DL+OP
192
2GB
Quadro K420
and
45W
DVI-I OL+DP
384
2GB
Quadro K620
GPU computing
4xmini DP
4GB
45W
Quadro K1200 512
4GB
75W
4xDP
Quadro M2000 768
4xDP
8GB 120W
Quadro M4000 1664
DVI-I DL+4xDP
8GB 150W
Quadro M5000 12048
RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 with onboard SAlA controller in criipset, SAlA b(iO/S.
Disk drive
Optional RAID 0, 1, 10 with optional LSI 9340-8i PCIe adapter, 12Gb/s SAS
controller
and_SATA,_optional_upgrade_to_RAID_5_is_available
Two externa¡ 5.25' flex bays, two interna¡ 3.5' bays. Up to one 9.5mm optical
Drive Bays
plus four 3.5/2.5" disk drives plus three M.2 PCIe SSD (see ri9ht)
3.5 HDD, 7.2K SATA6Gbs OOGB/1TB/2TBI3TB/4TB, 1TB/2TB hybrid
2.5" HDD, 10K SAS12Gbs OOGB/600GB
8OGB/240GB/256GB/480GB with ORAL,
Supporting storage 2.5» SSO, SATA6Gbs
56GB/512GB/1TB without OPAL
PCle SSO, M.2 vía PCIe 156GB/SUGB/1TB, NVMe
-
Environmental
spectftcation
Base warranty
Speclficatlon
'6.89W x 16.770 x 14.8"H
'l75mmWx426mmDx376mmH
• 30.86 lb (14kg) max conf iguration
• 25-liter
Temperature operating
so "F to 95 «F (10 «c 1035 «C)
Temperature -non operating (no package) 14 "F lo 140 "F (-10 "c 1060 "C)
Temperature non operating (with package)
Átude operating
Humidity operating
Humidity storage (with package)
-
None
Hex connector
One onboard gigabit ethernet, Intel 1218LM, supports Wake-on-LAN. Optional
Networknt erfaces discrete ethernet adapters are available
HD Audio
Realtek ALC662 codec
PM
TCG 1 .2-compliant
One fixed 450 watts, autosensing, 92%, 80 PLUS Platinum
Power supply
Two USB 3.0, microphone (3.5mm)headpone (3.5mm)
Front ports
Two USB 2.0, four USB 3.0, one ethernet (RJ-45),
RearortS
three analog audio ports (line-in, Iine-out, mic-in)
Supports the following optional ports:
Two IEEE 1394 (one on rear and one on front flex module) via PCIe adpater,
up to one adapter per system.
Two rear USB 3.0 per PCIe adapter, up to three adapters per system.
One rear Thunderbolt via PCIe adapter, or two front Thunderbolt (on flex
Additional ports
module) via PCIe adapter, front and rearThunderbolt cannot be intermixed.
One rear serial via cable, up to one per system.
One front eSATA (on flex module), or one rear eSATA via cable and PCIe slot
bracket, up to one eSATA port per system
9-in-1 USB 2.0 card reader. Optional 29-in-1 USB 2.0 card reader on flex
Media reader
module
-
-40 "F lo 140 "F (-40 "C 1060 "C)
(unpressurized): 0-10000ft (0.3048m)
10%-80%, non-condenslng
10%-90%, non-condensing
1
RoHS-compliant, GREENGUARO on alt models. EPEAT Goid rating, ENERGY STAR 6.1
'uailfied on selected models.
1 or 3-year limited onsite service with 9x5/NBD
ay 1
Flex bay 2
-
-
Front ports
PCI
(top
HDD bay 2
Expansion slots
ltlI
irw
X,J
MM.iifllE!i
X'FLilE!iIIiTt1ii
Drive Bays
)HM -bay j._.5". for one 35L25 drive
HDD bay 2
.. for ope 3.5'f.5" drive
FIex bay 1 HH optical, or 3.5 HDD bay via optional conversion kit, or slim optical+3.5" HDD bay
kit via optional conversion kit, or flex module
Flex bay 2 HH optical, or 3.5' HDD bay via optional conversion kit, or slim optical+3.5" HDD bay
it via optional conversion M. or flex module
Note:
1.HDD bay 2 is not available when one Quadro M5000, two Quadro M4000, or two NVS 810 are usod.
2. FIex module supports one or more of (he following options: 9.5mm opticaLf29.in. 1 USB 2.0 reader/one (ron! IEEE 1394/one (ron!
eSA TAJ? wo (ron! Thindorbolt. Up lo one flex module is suppor!ed por system.
3. Up lo one slim optical+3.5" HDD bay kit is suppor!ed por system.
l
For the list of ISV certifications, please visit www.thinkworkstations.corrz'lsv-certifications
For a list of all supported options, please visit
https://downloaci.lenovo.corrVpccbbs/Qptions Iso/ocm apríl 2016.xlsx sheet
© Copyright Lenovó 2016. A.
a reserved.
P
inner
consulting
Anexo
Te c...nico
(+571) 475 75 55
¡nnerconsutting.co
Ile 119A # 70 G - 91/ Bogotá, Colombia
00401
U2 19V170.9cm (28") LCD MONITOR
Experimenta los últimos avances en monitores con el
AOC U2879VF de 28 pulgadas. La impresionante
resolución 4K proporciona una calidad de imagen
increíblemente nítida, respaldada por conexiones
DisplayPort 1.2a y HDMI 2.0. El tiempo de respuesta
ultrarrápido de 1 ms, la frecuencia de refresco de
60 Hz y la tecnología FreeSync" se combinan para
ofrecer una acción suave y fluida, para que los juegos
y las películas sean aún más emocionantes.
H
SCREEN+
HDH
HDMI
MHL
,.7
MHL
SAUDADE
AUEICULARES
_
DISPI.AYPOET
TILT
OTRAS CARACTERÍSTICAS
CARACTERÍSTICAS GENERALES
Plug and play
Sí
Línea
AOC Gaming
Kensington Lock
Sí
'ipo de panel
TN
Multiview
Sí
amaño del panel
28'
/ 70.9 cm
-Menu
Sí
Relación de aspecto
16:9
e-Saver
Sí
Brillo
300 cd/m2
Screen+
Sí
Relación de contraste
dinámica
80M:1
Vesa
no
Contrast Ratio Static
1000:1
Reglamentaciones
Pixel Pitch(H) (V)
0.16
Área de visualización (H x V)
620.93 x 341.28
Energystar 6
TCO 6
EPEAT Silver
TUV-GS
TUV-Bauart
CE
FCC
EAC
RoHS compliant
ACCESORIOS
VGA Cable
HDMI Cable
Displayport Cable
Power Schuko C5 Cable
ngulo de visión (CR >= 10)
¡empo de respuesta
Color
170/160
ims
/
Negro plata
FRECUENCIA DE EXPLORACIÓN
Frecuencia de exploración
30-99khz/50-76hz
Frecuencia de píxeles
185.58MHz
RESOLUCIÓN
3840x2160@60hz
ERGONOMIC DATA
Resolución recomendada
3840x2 160@6OHz
Pivotación
No
Colores
1.07 Billion
Inclinación
-5/+24
HDCP compatible
Sí
.esolución máxima
DIMENSIONES
CONECTORES
D-Sub
Sí
DVI
Sí
HDMI (entrada digital)
lx
USB
-
MHL
Sí
DisplayPort
lx
Producto con soporte
(AnxAlxPr)
658.9 x 560.6 x 245 mm
Embalaje (AnxAlxPr)
689.3 x 394.8 x 169 mm
Peso
7.94 kg Sin embalaje
10.95 kg Con embalaje
Garantía
3 año
EAN
4038986185714
ALIMENTACIÓN
Fuente de alimentación
nsumo de energía
ero Power Switch
100 - 240V 50/601-Iz
Activar: 49W, En espera:
0.32W,
Desactivado: 0.23W
-
D00402
/kppleLare rrotecuon rian
;u you: cnpc
iice ano support to cnree years
pui chase date. Only the AppleCare Protection Plan
provides pu wth direct telephone techncai support from Apple experts and
the assurarice that repars viiI be handied by Apple-au!br:7ed thrcians
usinq ge nume Apple narts. For more information, visir Apple Support r cal]
macu jrr.i
macUS s the ue;.iinq svstem that powers everything you do on a Mac.
HCCS ri
tc MaC4
dong with new ways to enjoyyour
re iv onhne. and work more seamlessly between
Learn more
Apple takes a complete prociuci. Hfe cycie approach to determining our
e nvronnie nta mpac.
6
-
e
Mac Pro
Sta rting at S2,999
Compare modeis>
0004Q3
On in-stock items ordered by
Appiy for speciai flnancing and
Have a question? Cali a
5pm.
Buy online and pick up availabie
earn rewards.
Specialist or chat oriline.
Learn more>
items in an hour.
Learn more>
Cali 1-800-MY-APPLE.
Tn
tú .
Configurable to 3.5GHz 6-core
Configurable to 3.0GHz 8-core
processor with 1 2M L3 cache,
processor with 25MB L3 cache or
3.0GHz 8-core processor with
2.7GHz 1 2-core processor with
25MB L3 cache, or 2.7GHz 12-
30MB L3 cache
core processor with 30MB L3
cache
r 11
o
.SFEEt'AHz DDftEt
Configurable to 1 6GB (four 4GB),
Configurable to 32GB (four 8GB) or
32GB (four 8GB) or 64GB (four
64GB (four 16GB)
16GB)
600404
o>'fl)
Dual AMD - rePo {)300 çraph;cs
Dual AMD FirePro D500 graphics
pro cessorsvtth 2G8 ot CDDR5
processors with 3GB of GDDR5
VRAM each
VRAM each
. rem
D roc
ssor
1526 stream processors
384-bit-wide memory bus
240GB;s memory bandwidth
2.2 teraflops performance
Configurable to dual AMD FirePro
Configurable to dual AMO FirePro
D500, each with 3GB GDDR5
D700, each with 6GB of GDDR5
VRAM, 1526 stream processors,
VRAM, 2048 stream processors,
384-bit-wide memory bus,
384-bit-wide memory bus,
240GB/s memory bandwidth, and
264GB/s memory bandwidth, and
2.2 teraflops performance; or
3.5 teraflops performance
dual AMD FirePro D700, each
with 6GB of GDDR5 VRAM, 2048
stream processors, 384-bit-wide
memory bus, 264GB/s memory
bandwidth, and 3.5 teraflops
performance
Connect up to
Configurable to 512GBor 1TB2
000405
riuvn port supporzs mwticnannei ¿LUCIO OUtPUt
8uitHn speak
S02.i ac Wi--Fi . - trees netvorkinq:3 IEEE 80211a b:g 'n compat::.
BIuetcotn
¿reJess recnnolo;.
Jne voltaae: 1 00-240'J AC
Freqiiencv: 50Hz to 60Hz. single phase
MaXmUrn continuous oov'er: 450W
I:peratnq temperature: 30 to 95 F (10 to 35 C)
arive hurnidjtv 5/ to 95/ noncondensino
/LXi mum u t'tLde : o400 le et 5000 mete rs)
Typcai acoustal performance. sound pressure leve¡ (operator p:
2 •dBA at a
Your Mac Pro comes s-ith 90 days oí cornplimentary teephone technic
900406
1.Weight varien by conflguratiori and manufacturing process.
2. 1138 = 1 billion bytes and 1TB = 1 trillion bytes; actual forrnatted capadty less.
3.Interne, access required. 802 Jlac is based onanlEEE draft specification.
4. Sin rnay nos be available in afl languages os in ah aseas, and features rnay vary by area
S. Mac Pro achievech a Gold rating (rorn EPEAT in the U.S. and Canada.
6. PVC-free power cord available in all regions except India and South Koi'ea.
Mac
Mac Pro
Technical Specifications
.
About AonIo
Mac
Find a Store
Apple and Education
iPad
Genius Bar
Shop for Cohlege
iPhone
Workshops and Learnrng
Watch
Youth Programs
ManageYour Apple ID
Apple Info
Apple Store Account
Newsroom
iCloud.com
Job Opportunities
Press lnfo
TV
Apple Store App
Apple and Business
Music
Refurbished
Shop tos Business
Tjnes
..
lnvestors
Accessibility
Events
Financing
Education
Contad Apple
iPod
Reune and Recycling
Environment
Accessories
Order Status
lnclusion and Diversity
Gift Cards
Shopping Help
Pnivacy
Supphier Responsibihity
More ways lo shop: Visit an Apple Store, calI 1-800-MV-APPLE, os find a reseller
Copyright 2016 Apple Inc. Al¡ rights reserved.
Pnivacy Pohicy
1
Terms of Use
1
Sales and Refunds
1
Legal
1
Site Map
United States
000407
inner
consutting
Anexo
Técnico
el
,
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsuIting.co
11e 119A # 70 G -91 / Bogotá, Colombia
000408
Product Specifications
ThinkCe,.e M700Tiny Platform Specificatioul3
Intel CeIeron', Intel Pentium, or 6th Generation Intel CoreTM i3 / i5 / i7Processor Keyboard
Integrated
Frequency
Cores /
Memory Types Graphics
Processor
Cache
Threads Base/Max(GHz)
DDR4-2133
HD 510
PentiumG4400T 2/2
2.9G
3MB
Mouse
HD 530
3.0G
3MB
DDR4-2133
PentiumG4500T 2/2
2/4 3.2 G
3MB
DDR4-2133
HD 530
Core i3-6100T
Mechanical
DDR4-2133
HD 530
Core 13-6300T
2/4 3.3 G
4 MB
6 MB
DDR4-21 33
HD 530
Core 15-6400T
4/4
2.2 G 12.8 G
6 MB
DDR4-2133
HD 530
Core i5-6500T
414
2.5 G/ 3.1 G
HD 530
Core i5-6600T
2.7G/3.5G
6MB
DDR4-2133
4/4
Core i7-6700T 1 4/8 1 2.8G/3.6G 1 8MB 1 DDR4-2133 1 HD 532j
Processor
Memory
_-
Disk
-.
(
Optical
-
32GB max, DDR4 2133, two 260-pm SO-DIMM sockets, dual-channel capable
Sorne: SATA 6.OGb/s, 2.5 Wide, 5400 rpm or 7200 rpm
Sorne: 500GB (5400 rpm) Solid State Hybrid Drive (SSHD) /
with 8GB MLC NAND flash memory, SATA 6.OGb/s, 2.5" wide
Sorne: Solid State Drive (SSD)1 SATA 6.OGb/s, 2.5 Wide
Sorne: M.2 Solid State Drive (SD) / SATA interface
Sorne: external ODD box with DVD-ROM, 9.5mm high, via USB
Sorne: external ODD box with DVD±RW, 9.5mm high, via USB
Sorne: external ODD box (forTIO) with DVD-ROM, 9.5mm high, via USB
Sorne: external ODD box (forTIO) with DVD±RW, 9.5mm high, via USB
One SATA cable (1-drop to device), one SATA 6.0Gb/s connector on planar
None
Intel HD Graphics 5101530 in processor, uses main memory, DirectX' 12, two
DisplayPortTM, one optional HDMI, VGA, or 3rd DP, up to 3 independent displays;
Max resolution: 4096x2304 )@6OHz; 4096x21 60 (HDMI)@24Hz;
@6OHz
1920x 1200
Optional DP to VGA, DP to DVI-D (single link), or DP to HDMI 1.4 dongle
Intel B150 Chipset
VESA mount
Floor Stand
Power sunni
Sorne:
Sorne:
Sorne:
Sorne:
Sorne:
Sorne:
once (PSREF)
Preferred Pro USB Keyboard (USB connector), Lenovo logo
Lenovo Slim USB Keyboard (USB connector), black, Lenovo logo
Lenovo USB Fingerprint Keyboard (USB connector)
Ultraslim Plus Wireless Keyboard (2.4GHz via USB receiver), black
Enhanced Optical USB Mouse, black, Lenovo logo
Ultraslim Plus Wireless Mouse (2.4GHz via USB receiver), black
Tiny (1 L), black color; metal case
M700 Tiny only:
7.05' W X 7.20" D X 1.36" H
1 79mm W X 1 82.9mm D X 34.5mm H
2.9 lb (1.3 kg), weight may vary by conf iguration
With VESA mount & ODD box:
7.42" W X 7.30" D X 2.48' H
188.4mm W X 185.38mm D X 63mm H
4.12 lb (1.87 kg), weight may vary by contiguration
With VESA mount & I/O box:
7.42" W X 7.30" D X 2.62' H
188.4mm W X 185.38mm D X 66.6mrn H
3.53 lb (1.6 kg), weight may vary by configuration
Optional VESA mount bracket kit, supports VESA 75mm and loomm
Optional system lloor stand for vertical orientation
65 watts AC/DC adapter, autosensing, 88% PSU (not included for TIO models)
90 watts AC/DC adapter, autosensing, 88% PSU (only for rnodehs with I/O box)
Lirnited warranty3 Sorne: 1 -year or 3-year, depot service / service upgrades available
Sorne: 1 -year or 3-year, limited onsite service / service upgrades available
Sorne: 3-year, limited onsite service, OID (Onsite International Dehivery) /
service upgrades available
For Lenovo service upgrade options, please go to S-TC sheet
Sorne: Windows 7 Professional 32/64 Sorne: Windows` Embedded
Preload
Standard 7 (WES 7)
preinstalled through downgrade
DP cable
rights in Windows 10 Pro 64-bit Sorne: LeTOS (Lenovo Terminal
Chipset
Operating System, Linux-based)
Sorne: Windows 7 Professional 32/64
Sorne: Windows 10 Pro 64-bit
Preloaded applications (only sorne
Two USB 3.0 (one is Always On and fast charge), one microphone (stereo, 3.5rnrn),
Front ports
Sorne: Windows 10 Home 64-bit
listed)
one headphone / microphone combo jack (stereo, 3.5rnm)
Preloaded applicatlons (only sorne
- WES 7 only:
Four USB 3.0 (optional external optical box or external I/O box occupies one
Rear ports
usted)
• RDP Client (RDP 8.1 support)
or two specific USB 3.0 on sorne models), ethernet (RJ-45), two DisplayPort,
• Desktop Power Manager
• Citrix Client
one optional port (VGA, 3rd DP, HDMI, or serial on sorne models), one headphone
• Lenovo Solution Center
• VMware Client
Optional external I/O box, extends two USB 2.0, two USB 3.0, and one serial on
I/O box
• Lenovo REACHit
• Internet Explorer 11
rear, two USB 2.0 on front, via USB (occupy two specific USB 3.0 of M700 Tiny)
• Lenovo SHAREit
• Java
High Definition (HD) Audio, Realtek ALC223 / optional interna¡ speaker (1 watt) 7
Audio support
• Lenovo Bluetooth Lock
• Flash
(for models with Wi-Fi/BT card)
W1-AN13
Sorne: 11 ac wireless, M.2 Card, Realtek RTL8821AE (dual band),
• .Net Framework
• McAfee' LiveSafeTM (30-day trial)
Wi-Fi + Bluetooth 4.0 combo adapter, 1 x
• Microsoft" Silverhight
• Microsoft Office preloaded;
Sorne: 1 iac wireless, M.2 Card, Qualcornm Atheros QCA9377 (dual band),
• Echo Agent (client for LTM,
purchase a product key to activate
Wi-Fi + Bluetooth 4.1 combo adapter, 1 x
Lenovo Thin Client Manager)
• PowerDVD Create (DVD±RW)
1 a wireless, M.2 Card, Qualcomm Atheros QCA6174 (dual band),
Sorne: 1
• Adobe Reader
• Lenovo ThinkVantage Tools
Wi-Fi + Bluetooth 4.1 combo adapter, 2x2
• UItraVNC
• Intel Unite (vPro models only)
Sorne: 1
1 a wireless, M.2 Card, Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165,
- LeTOS only:
- OnIy for Window 10
Wi-Fi + Bluetooth 4.0 combo adapter, 1 x
• xFreeRDP
• Lenovo Companion
Sorne: 11 ac wireless, M.2 Card, Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260,
• Citrix ICA Client
• Cyberlink PowerDVD (DVD, DVD±RW) • VMware View Client
Wi-Fi + Bluetooth 4.1 combo adapter, 2x2
BluetoothTM
• Lenovo QuickOptimizer
,$ome: Bluetooth 4.0 or 4.1 wireless, integrated in Wi-Fi + BT combo adapter
• Java
- OnIy for Window 7
/tigabit ethernet, Intel Ethernet Connection 121 9-LV (Jacksonville), Wake on LAN
Ethernet
• Mozilla Firefox
None
• Rescue and Recovery
U-Modem
• Password Manager
ana9eability
None
• ThinkVantage System Update
ecunty chip
Trusted Platform Module, TCG 1 .2-compliant
• Lenovo Message Center Plus
ecurlty features • Security siot (in rear for optional
Administrator password
• Adobe Rear
Kensington MicroSaver cable)
Hard disk password
ENERGY STAR" 6.0", EPETM Gold rating" (*for Windows models only);
Environment
• Padlock loop
Boot sequence control
ErP Lot 3; GREENGUARD; RoHS-compliant
cz
• Smart USB protection, aliows keyboard! Boot without keyboard and mouse
Individual USB port disablement
MIL-STD-810G military certification (Low Pressure [Altitude], High Temperature,
mouse only, blocks ah storage devices
MIL-SPEC test
Chassis intruslon switch
• Power-on password
Low Temperature, Temperature Shock, Humidity, Sand and Dust, Vibration, Shock)
Onboard SATA
Media reader
Graphics
ZA)
•
•
•
•
•
•
,.-
Accessories
See footnotes for more detailed information
For compatible accessories, please go to TC-AQP sheet
(M700 Tiny-Spec) July 2016 © Lenovo
inner
consulting
:
Anexo
Técnico
7
•
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
aL1e 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
000410
•
HOME ENTERTAINMEJT
#LG
.
Lifes Good
25'
* Class size: See below for detajis.
21:9 FHD IPS
sRGB over 99%
Color Calibrated
Screen Sp(it 20 (PIP Mode)
Dual Link-up / Dual Controlter
Game Mode
Presets
CABINET / ACCESSORIES
PANEL
Screensize
25"
Power Cord
Ves
PaielTe
¡PS
HDMI
Ves
Color Gamut(ClE 1931)
sRGBove99%
CD
Ves
Color Depth(NttcíColors)
8bits 167M
°itch(m)
se Time
SG
Ves
02286mmx0.2286m
Manual
Ves
5msGm
Cabe holder
Ves
,.eshRate
751-Iz
STANDARD
AspectRatio
21:9
UL(cUt.)
Pesokition
2560 x 1080
Bnghtrsess
Ves
JV-TYPF
Ves
250 cd/m2
FCC-B,CE
Ves
Contrast Ptio
Mega
EPA 6.0
Ves
Vievsng P19e
178/178
ErP
yes
EPEAT
Yes (Goid)
INPUT/OUTPUT
HDMI (ver l.4)
2
Wr,dr,'as
POWER
-
'ls(win10)
UMITED WARRANTV/ UPC
Type
Adapte
al On (EPA 6.0)
-
-
Linted Warranty
1 Year Parts and Labor
100-240V
UPC
719192199156
24W
Country of Ori9n
rCIAL FEATURES
FctureMode
Ves
Reader Mode
Ves
0rinalRatlo
Ves
-
PIP
Ves
Color weakness
Ves
Flkkersale
Ves
Autornac Sta,dby
Ves
SixAxisControl
Ves
Smart Energy Saving
Ves
S&çerResolution.
Ves
4screensplit
Ves
0n-ScreanContr
0ders
-
-
-.
Ves
Bb& Staber
DIMENSIONS/WEIGHT
VVithout Stand(Wd-lxD)
24x 22"x 11.3'
With Stand (fMHxC)
24 'x 7.4" x 15.1"
9ippngDnensions(WxFbcD)
26.9'x 14'x 5.2'
WfthStandWeht
&81s
gVkight
11.9 lbs
000411
P) 2016 LG Electror,cs USÍ Inc. Alt ng6ts reservad. "LG ljfesGood" a aregistered trademark of IG Corp. AS other produce arel brand saínes are trademarksor reqistered trademarks of ther respective owners. Desgn, features and specificatons aresubect en
La—
........k.- ...-1
*......,*i* C,.,,** tun
,.,* I*n*-*,,
*.-4
i..
..—1,— .. h*.,* ,..k..,í
tQf(il /IC
inner
consulting
Anexo
Técnico
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsulting.co
Ate 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
000412
f
, ili.ilii
Data Sheet
cisco
Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone
Highlights
e
For business or home office use
• FA-featured 4-une business-class IP phone supporting Power over Ethernet (POE)
e
Monochrome backlit display for ease of use, aesthetics, and on-screen applications
• Connects directly to an Internet telephone service provider or to an IP private branch exchange (PBX)
• Dual switched Ethernet ports for connecting a computer behind the phone, red ucing cabling costs
• Wideband audio for unsurpassed voice clarity and enhanced speaker quality
• Easy installation and highly secure remote provisioning, as well as menu-based and web-based configuration
• Supports up to two Cisco® SPA500S Expansion Module, adding up to 64 additional buttons*
• Supports both Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and Smart Phone Control Protocol (SPCP) with the Cisco
Unified Communications 500 Series for SmaII Business
Comprehensive Interoperability and SIP-Based Feature Set
Part of the Cisco SmalI Business Pro Series, the SIP-based Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone (Figure 1) has been
tested to ensure comprehensive interoperability with equipment from voice over IP (V0IP) infrastructure leaders,
enabling service providers to quickly rolI out competitive, feature-rich services to their customers.
With hundreds of features and configurable service parameters, the Cisco SPA504G addresses the requirements of
traditional business users while building on the advantages of IP telephony. Features such as easy station moves
and shared une appearances (across local and geographically dispersed locations) are just sorne of the many
advantages of the SPA504G.
The Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP phone also supports productivity-enhancing features such as VoiceView Express and
Cisco XML applications when used with the Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series in SPCP mode.
Carrier-Grade Security, Provisioning, and Management
The Cisco SPA504G uses standard encryption protocols to perform highly secure remote provisioning and
unobtrusive in-service software upgrades. Remote provisioning tools include detailed performance measurement
and troubleshooting features, enabling network providers to deliver high-quality support to their subscribers. Rernote
provisioning also saves service providers the time and expense of managing, preloading, and reconfiguring
customer prernises equipment.
000413
© 2010 cisco and/or its affihiates. Alt rights reserved. Tuis document is cisco Public Informatiori.
Pagelof7
Data Sheet •'
Figure 1.
Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone
lo
Telephony Features
• Four voice unes
• Four Independent SIP Registrations*
• Line status: active une indication, with name and number
• Menu-driven user interface
• Shared une appearance**
• Speakerphone
• CalI hold
• Music on hold**
• Cali waiting
• Cailer ID name and number
• Outbound caller ID biocking
• Cali transfer: attended and biind
• Three-way caí¡ conferencing with local mixing
lo
• Multiparty conferencing via externai conference bridge
• Automatic redial of iast calling and last calied numbers
• On-hook dialing
• Cali pickup: selective and group**
• Cali park and unpark**
• Cali swap
• Cali back on busy
• Cali biocking: anonymous and selective
e
Cali forwarding: unconditional, no answer, on busy
• Hot une and warm une automatic caiuing
• Cali logs (60 entries each): made, answered, and missed calls
• Redial from cali logs
e
Personal directory with auto-dial (100 entries)
• Do not disturb
'WJt
© 2010 cisco and/or its affiliates. Al¡ rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public lnformation.
Page 2 of 7
Data Sheet
• Digits dialed with number auto-completion
• Anonymous caUer biocking
• Uniform Resource identifier (UR1) (IP) diaiing support (vanity numbers)
T
e
On-hook default audio configuration (speakerphone and headset)
e
Muitipie ring tones with selectabie ring tone per Une
• Cailed number with directory name matching
C/)
• Ability to cal¡ number using name: directory matching or via cafler ID
• Subsequent incoming calis show caliing name and number
• Date and time with support for inteiiigent dayiight savings
• Cali start time stored in cal¡ logs
• Cali timer
• Name and identity (text) dispIayed at startup
• Distinctive ringing based on cailing and calied number
• 10 user-downioadabie ring tones
• Speed diaiing, eight entries
• Configurabie diai/numbering pian support
• Intercom**
• Group paging
• Network Address Transiation (NAT) Traversai, inciuding Simple Traversal of UDP Through NATs (STUN)
support
• DNS SRV and muitipie A records for proxy lookup and proxy redundancy
• Syslog, debug, report generation, and event logging
• Highiy secure cali encrypted voice communications support
• Buiit-in web server for administration and configuration with muitipie security ieveis
• Automated remote provisioning, muitiple methods; up to 256-bit encryption (HTTP, HTTPS, Trivial File
Transfer Protocol [TFTP])
• Option to require administrator password to reset unit to factory defauits
Hardware Features
• Pixel-based display: 128 x 64 monochrome LCD graphical display with backiight
• Dedicated iliuminated buttons for:
Audio mute on/off
Headset on/off
° Speakerphone on/off
• 4-way rocking directionai knob for menu navigation
• Voicemail message waiting indicator (VMWi) iight
• Voicemaii message retrieval button
• Dedicated hoid button
• Settings button for access to feature, setup, and configuration menus
• Volume control rocking up/down knob controis handset, headset, speaker, ringer
© 2010 cisco andlor i ts affiliates. Ah rights reserved. This document is cisco Public hnformation.
000414
Page 3 of 7
Data Sheet
CO
.I)
cn
• Standard 12-button dialirig pad
• High-quality handset and cradie
u
Built-in high-quaUty microphone and speaker
• Headset jack: 2.5 mm
u
8
U)
5
LED test function
• Two Ethernet ports with integrated Ethernet switch: 10/100BASE-T RJ-45
• 802.3af-compliant PoE
o
Optional 5 VDC universal (100-240V) switching; power supply is ordered separately (Cisco PAl 00)
Regulatory Compliance
• FCC (Part 15, Class B), CE Mark, A-Tick, C-Tick, Telepermit, UL, CB
• Secunty Features
• Password-protected system, preset to factory default
• Password-protected access to administrator and user-level features
• HTTPS with factory-installed client certificate
• HTTP digest: encrypted authentication via MD5 (RFC 1321)
• Up to 256-bit Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption
• SIP over Transport Layer Security (TLS)
• Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
Documentation
• Quick-Start Installation and Configuration Cuide
• User Cuide
• Administration Cuide
• Provisioning Guide (for service providers only)
Package Contents
la
• Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP phone, handset, and stand
• Handset cord
• RJ-45 Ethernet cable
• Quick-Start Cuide
• CD
' \ ,
© 2010 cisco and/or ¡ts afflliates. Al¡rights reserved. This document is cisco Pubhic Information.
Page 4 of 7
Data Sheet
Specifications
Table 1 gives speciftcations for the Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone.
L
Table 1.
(J)
Specifications for the Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone
Note: Many features are programmable within a defined range or list of options. Please see the SPA Administration Guide for details. The target
configuration profile is uploaded to the SPA504 at the time of provísioning.
Specifications
• MAC address (IEEE 802.3)
Data networking
0
• IPv4(RFC 791)
• Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
• DNS: A record (RFC 1706), SRV record (RFC 2782)
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client (RFC 2131)
• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) (RFC 792)
• TCP (RFC793)
• User Datagram Protocol (UDP) (RFC 768)
• Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) (RFC 1889, 1890)
• Real-Time Control Protocol (RTCP) (RFC 1889)
• Differentiated Services (DiffServ) (RFC 2475)
• Typeofservice(T0S) (RFC 791, 1349)
• VLAN tagging 802.1 p/0: Layer 2 quality of service (QoS)
• Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) (RFC 2030)
• SIP version 2 (RFC 3261, 3262, 3263, 3264)
Voice gateway
• SPCP with the Cisco Unifled Communications 500 Series
• SIP proxy redundancy dynamic via DNS SRV, A records
• Reregistration with primary SIP proxy server
• SIP support in NAT networks (including STUN)
• SIPFrag (RFC 3420)
• Secure (encrypted) calling via SRTP
• Codec name assignment
• Voice algonthms:
0.711 (A-Iaw and p-law)
G.726 (16/24/32/40 kbps)
0.729 A
G.722
• Dynamic paytoad support
• Adjustable audio trames per packet
• Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF), in-band and out-of-band (RFC 2833) (SIP INFO)
• Flexible dial plan support with interdigit timers
• IP address/URI dialing support
• Cal¡ progress tone generation
• Jitter buffer: adaptive
• Frame loss concealmeni
• Comfort Noise Generation (CNG)
• Voice activity detection (VAD) with silence suppression
• Attenuation/gain adjustments
• Message waiting indicator (MWI) tones
• VMWI via NOTIFY, SUBSCRIBE
• Caller ID support (name and number)
Third-party
L
-
control (RFC 3725)
--
Provisioning, adrninistration,
and maintenance
-
-
• Integrated web server provides web-based administration and configuration
e Telephone keypad configuration via display menu/navigation
• Automated provisioning and upgrade via HTTPS, HTTP, TFTP
• Asynchronous notification of upgrade availability via NOTIFY
• Nonintrusive in-service upgrades
• Report generation and event Iogging
• Statistics transmitted in BYE message
-
SIog and debug server records: configurable per fine
© 2010 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public tnformation.
Page 5 of 7
Data Sheet
Specifications
• Power supply is optional and is purchased separately
Power supply
Modeis: Cisco PA100-NA, PA100-EU, PA100-UK, PA100-AU
• DC output voltage: +5 VDC at 2.OA maximum
• Switching power adapter 100-240V 50-60 Hz AC input
• Two 10/100BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet ports (IEEE 802.3)
Physlcal interfaces
• Handset: RJ-9 connector
• Built-in speakerphone and microphone
• Headset 2.5-mm port
• Speakerphone oníoff button with LEO
Indlcator lights/LEDs
• Headset on/off button with LEO
• Mute button with LED
• Message waiting LEO
Body dlmenslons (W x H x D)
8.42 x 8.35. x 1.73 in. (214 x 212 x 44 mm)
Unit weight
2.00 lb (0.9kg)
Storage temperature
- 104°F (0° - 40°C)
-4° - 158°F (-20° - 7(rC)
Operatlng humldity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Storage humldity
5% to 95% noncondensing
Operatlng temperature
32°
Table 2 compares the SPA504G with other Cisco SPA 500 Sedes IP Phones.
Table 2.
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phone Companson
Modet
Voice Unes
Ethernet Ports
High- Resolution Graphical Display
PoE Support
SPA5OIG
8
2
No
Ves
SPA502G
1
2
Ves
Ves
SPA504G
4
2
Ves
Ves
SPA508G
8
2
Yes
Yes
SPA509G
12
2
Ves
Yes
SPA525G/SPA525G2
5
2
Color
Ves
Tables 3 and 4 give part numbers for the Cisco SPA504G and optional support and accessories.
Table 3.
Ordenng Information
PartNumbør
Description
SPA504G
Cisco SPA504G 4-Line IP Phone
CON-SBS-SVCI
3-year Cisco SmaII Business Support Service
Table 4.
Optional Accessones
Part Number
Description
MBIOO
Wall-mount brackets for SPA500, CP500, and SPA 900 Series
PAIOO-NA
Power supply for SPA500, C12500, and SPA 900 Series-5V/2A (North Americe style plug)
PAIOO-UK
Power supply for SPA500, CP500. and SPA 900 Series-5V/2A (UK style plug)
PAIOO-EU
Power supply for SPA500, CP500, and SPA 900-5V/2A (EU style plug)
Power supply for SPA500, CP500, and SPA 900 Series-5V/2A (AU style plug). Power supply for SPA500 and SPA900__________ 5V/2A(NA)
PAIOO-AU
WBP54G
t,Á'
802.11 bIg wireless bridge
Data Sheet
Service and Support
The Cisco Small Business Support Service provides three years affordable peace of mmd coverage, to help protect
your investment and derive maximum value from your Cisco Small Business solution. The subscription-based
service offers software updates, telephone and online chat access to the Cisco Small Business Support Center, and
-
next business day hardware replacement.
o
Cisco Small Business products are supported by professionals in Cisco Small Business Support Center locations
worldwide who are specifically trained to understand your needs. The Cisco Small Business Support Community, an
O
onhine forum, enables you to cohlaborate with your peers and reach Cisco technical experts for support information.
Warranty
This Cisco Small Business product is covered by a Cisco 1-year himited hardware warranty with return to factory
replacement and a 90-day himited software warranty. In addition, Cisco offers software updates for bug fixes for the
warranty term, and telephone and onhine chat technicah support at no charge for the first 12 months foUowing the
date of purchase. To download software updates, go to: httD://www.cisco.com/ciscp/web/download/index.html.
Product warranty terms and other information apphicable to Cisco products are available at
http:I/www.cisco.com/golwarranty.
For More Information
To learn more about the Cisco SPA 500 Series IP Phones please visit: http:llwww.cisco.com/ço/5OOphones.
For more information on Cisco Small Business products and sohutions, visit: http:I/www.císcp.comfsmallbusiness.
Feature supported only in SIP mode.
Feature requires support by cali server.
tilisili.
cisco.
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
San Jose. CA
Asia Pacific Headquarters
Cisco Systems (USA) Pte. Ltd.
Singapore
Europe Headquarters
Cisco Systems International 8V Amsterdam.
The Netherlands
Cisco has more than 200 of fices worldwide. Addresses. phorie numbers. and fax numbers are usted on the Cisco Website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems. Inc. andfor its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries A listing of Ciscos trademarks can be found at
www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a
partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1005R)
Pflnted in USA
© 2010 Cisco arid/or Rs affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is cisco Pubhic Information.
oo
lo/lo
O48T401
Page 7 of?
¡
1
t1
1
1
______________________________
1
P
inner
consulting
Anexo
Técnico
9
(+571) 475 75 55
www.innerconsutting.co
.atLe 119A # 70 G - 91 / Bogotá, Colombia
Data Sheet
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches
Product Overview
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches are fixed-configuration, stackable Gigabit Ethernet switches that provide
enterprise-class access for campus and branch applications (Figure 1). Designed for operational simplicity to lower
total cost of ownership, they enable scalable, secure and energy-efficient business operations with intelligent
services and a range of advanced Cisco IOS® Software features.
Figure 1.
A Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switch Family
-
--.---
.L__L .1 •
1-
-..
Product Highlights
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X switches feature:
• 24 or 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports with line-rate forwarding performance
• Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) or 1 O SFP+ uplinks
• FlexStack Plus for stacking of up to 8 switches with 80 Gbps of stack throughput (optional)
• Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) support with up to 740W of PoE budget
• 24-port PoE fanless switch for deptoyment outside the wiring closet
• Reduced power consumption and advanced energy management features
• USB and Ethernet management interfaces for simplifled operations
a
Application visibility and capacity planning with integrated NetFlow-Lite
• LAN Base or LAN Lite Cisco lOS software features
• Enhanced limited lifetime warranty (E-LLW) offering next-business-day hardware replacement
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR modeis also offer:
• Power res iliency with optional dual fleld-replaceable power supplies
• IP Lite Cisco los software with dynamic routing and Layer 3 features
000418
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Al¡ rights reserved. This document is Cisco Publio Information.
Page 1 of 27
-
-.
Switch Mod&s and Configurations
Catalyst 2960-X switches include a single flxed power supply and are available with either the Cisco LOS LAN Base
or LAN Lite feature set. Catalyst 2960-XR switch modeis ¡nclude a fleid-replaceable modular power supply and can
accommodate a second power supply. Catalyst 2960-XR is available only with the Cisco ¡OS IP Lite feature set.
Table 1.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Configurations
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
740W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
370W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24P0-L
24
2 SFP+
LAN Base
370W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TD-L
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
-
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
24
2 SFP+
LAN Base
-
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-1-
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
740W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X.481-PS-1-
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
370W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-1-
24
4 SFP
LAN Base
370W
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-1-
24 (8P0E)
2 SFP,
2 10/100/1000BT
LAN Base
110W
-
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-L
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
-
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-1-
24
4 SFP
LAN Base
-
Y
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48TS-LL
48
2 SFP
LAN Ute
-
-
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
24
2 SFP
LAN Lite
-
-
Table 2.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Configurations
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR48FPD-1
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
740W
1025WAc
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-I
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
370W
640WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PD-I
24
2 SFP+
IP Lite
370W
640WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD4
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
-
250WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-I
24
2 SFP+
IP Lite
-
250WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-I
48
4 SFP
IP Lite
740W
1025WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS-I
48
4 SFP
IP Lite
370W
640WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-I
24
4 SFP
IP Lite
370W
640WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-I
48
4 SFP
IP Lite
-
250WAC
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-I
24
4 SFP
IP Lite
-
250WAC
Catalyst 2960-X series Software Features
Al¡ Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches use a single Universal Cisco LOS Software Image for ah SKUs. Depending on
the switch model, the Cisco ¡OS image automatically configures the LAN Lite, LAN Base, or IP Lite feature set.
LAN Lite models have reduced functionality and sCalability for small deployments with basic requirements. Cisco
Catalyst 2960-X Family of Switches are available with the LAN Base and LAN Lite feature sets and Catalyst 2960XR Family of switches are available IP Lite feature sets.
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Alt rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 2 of 27
Note that each switch model is tied to a specific feature leve¡-, LAN Lite cannot be upgraded to LAN Base and LAN
Base cannot be upgraded to IP Lite.
For more information about the features included in the LAN Lite, LAN Base and IP Lite feature sets, refer to Cisco
Feature Navigator: http://tools.cisco.com/ITDIT/CFN/jsp/index.jsp.
Cisco ONE Software
Cisco ONE Software for Access Switchinu is available for the Cisco Catalyst 2960-X and Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR
Series Switches.
Cisco ONE Software is a new way for customers to purchase and use our infrastructure software. It offers a
simplified consumption model, centered on common customer scenarios in the data center, WANs, and LANs.
Cisco ONE Software and services provide customers with four primary benefits:
• Software suites that address typical customer use scenarios at an attractive price
• Investment protecon of their software purchase through software services-enabled ¡¡cense portability
• Access to ongoing innovation and new technology with Cisco Software Support Service (SWSS)
• Flexible licensing modeis to smoothly distribute customers software spend over time
For ordering information for Cisco ONE Software for the Cisco Catalyst 2960-X and Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Series
Switches, go to http://vvww.cisco.com/clen/us/products/software/one-access/switching-part-numbers.html.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR IP-Lite High-Performance Routing
The Cisco hardware routing architecture delivers extremely high-performance IP routing in the Cisco Catalyst
2960-XR IP-Lite Switches:
• IP unicast routing protocois (Static, Routing Information Protocol Version 1 [RIPvI], RIPv2, RlPng,
and EIGRP-Stub) are supported for network routing applications.
• Advanced IP unicast routing protocois (OSPF for Routed Access) are supported for load balancing and
constructing scalable LANs. lPv6 routing (OSPFv3) is supported in hardware for maximum performance.
• EJGRPv3-Stub and PIMv6-Stub are supported as a part of the tPv6 routing suite.
• Equal-cost routing facilitates Layer 3 load balancing and redundancy across the stack.
• PoIicy-based routing (PBR) aliows superior control by facilitating flow redirection regardless of the routing
protocol configured (for both lPv4 and IPv6).
• Hot Standby Routing Protocol (HSRP) and Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) provides
dynamic load balancing and failover for routed Iinks.
• Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) for IP multicast is supported, including PIM sparse mode (PIM-SM),
PIM dense mode (PIM-DM), PIM sparse-dense mode and Source Specific Multicast (SSM).
000419
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affihiates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Information,
Page 3 of 27
Network Security
The Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches provide a range of security features to limit access to the network and
mitigate threats, induding:
• MAC-based VLAN assignment enables different users to authenticate on different VLANs. This feature
enables each user to have a different data VLAN on the same interface.
• Cisco TrustSec uses SXP to simplify security and policy enforcement throughout the network. For more
information about Cisco TrustSec security solutions, visit cisco.com/Qo/TrustSec.
• Comprehensive 802.IX Features to control access to the network, induding Flexible Authentication,
802.1x Monitor Mode, and RADIUS Change of Authorization.
• lPv6 First-Hop Security enhances Layer-2 and Layer-3 network access from proliferating IPv6 devices
especially BYOD devices. It protects against rogue router advertisements, address spoofing, fake DHCP
replies and other risks introduced by IPv6 technology.
• Device Sensor and Device Classifier enable seamless versatile device profiles including BYOD devices.
They also enable Cisco Identity Services Engine (¡SE) to provision identity based security policies. This
feature is available on both the 2960-X and the 2960-XR product families.
• Cisco Trust Anchor Technology enables easy distribution of a single universal image for aII models of
Catalyst 2960-X by verifying the authenticity of ¡OS images. This technology allows the switch to perform
los integrity checks at boot-up by verifying the signature, verifying the Trusted Asset under Management
and authenticating the license.
• Cisco Threat Defense features including Port Security, Dynarnic ARP Inspection, and IP Source Guard.
• Private VLANs restrict traffic between hosts in a common segment by segregating traffic at Layer 2, turning
a broadcast segment into a nonbroadcast multi access like segment. This feature is available in IP-Lite
feature set only.
° Private VLAN Edge provides security and isolation between switch ports, which helps ensure that users
cannot snoop on other users' traffic.
• Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (uRPF) feature helps mitigate problems caused by the introduction of
maiformed or forged (spoofed) IP source address into a network by discarding IP packets that lack a
verifiable IP source address. This feature is available in IP-Lite feature set only.
• Multidomain Authentication allows an IP phone and a PC to authenticate on the same switch port while
placing them on appropriate voice and data VLAN.
• Access Control Lists (ACLs) for lPv6 and IPv4 for security and QoS ACE5.
° VLAN ACLs on al¡ VLANs prevent unauthorized data flows from being bridged within VLANs.
° Router ACLs define security policies on routed interfaces for control-plane and data-plane traffic. IPv6
ACLs can be applied to filter IPv6 traffic.
° Port-based ACLs for Layer 2 interfaces allow security policies to be applied on individual switch ports.
• Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol, Kerberos, and Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3
(SNMPv3) provide network security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP sessions.
SSH Protocol. Kerberos, and the cryptographic version of SNMPv3 require a special cryptographic software
image because of U.S. export restrictions.
© 2016 Cisco arid/or its affihiates. Al! rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 4 of 27
• Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN), Mth btdirectional data support, allows Cisco Intrusion Detection System
(IDS) to take action when an intruder is detected.
e
TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication facilitates centralized control of the switch and restricts
unauthorized users from altenng the configuration.
• MAC Address Notification allows administrators to be notified of users added to or removed from the
network.
e
Multilevel security on console access prevents unauthonzed users from altenng the switch configuration.
• Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) Guard shuts down Spanning Tree Port Fast-enabled interfaces when
BPDUs are received to avoid accidental topology loops.
e
Spanning Tree Root Guard (STRG) prevents edge devices not in the network administrator's control from
becoming Spanning Tree Protocol root nodes.
e
IGMP filtering provides multicast authentication by filtering out nonsubscribers and limits the number of
concurrent multicast streams available per port.
• Dynamic VLAN assignment is supported through implementation of VLAN Membership Policy Server
client capability to provide flexibility in assigning pons to VLANs. Dynamic VLAN facilitates the fast
assignment of IP addresses.
Redundancy and Resiliency
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches offer a number of redundancy and resiliency features te prevent outages
and help ensure that the network remains available:
• Cross-stack EtherChannel provides the ability to configure Cisco EtherChannel technology across
different members of the stack for high resiliency.
e
Flexlink provides link redundancy 'Mth convergence time less than 100 milliseconds.
• IEEE 802.lsIw Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
provide rapid spanning-tree convergence independent of spanning-tree timers and also offer the benefit of
Layer 2 load balancing and distributed processing. Stacked units behave as a single spanning-tree node.
• Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST+) allows rapid spanning-tree reconvergence on a per-VLAN
spanning-tree basis, without requiring the implementation of spanning-tree instances.
• Cisco Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is supported to create redundant, fail safe routing topologies
in 2960-XR IP-Lite SKUs.
• Switch-port auto-recovery (Error Disable) automatically attempts to reactivate a link that is disabled
because of a network error.
• Power redundancy with an optional second power supply on 2960-XR models, or with an extemal RPS on
2960-X models.
Enhanced Quality of Service
The Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches offers intelligent traffic management that keeps everything fiowing
smoothly. Flexible mechanisms for marking, classification, and scheduling deliver superior performance for data,
voice, and video traffic, al¡ at wire speed. Primary Q0S features include:
Up te eight egress queues per pon and strict priority queuing so that the highest priority packets are
serviced ahead of alI other traffic.
000420
© 2016 cisco ardlor its affihiates. AN nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Information
Page 5 of 27
• Shaped Round Robin (SRR) scheduling and Weighted Tafl Drop (WTD) congestion avoidance.
• FIow-based rate limiting and up to 256 aggregate or individual policers per port.
• 802.1p class of service (CoS) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) classil9cation, with
marking and reclassification on a per-packet basis by source and destination IP address, MAC address. or
Layer 4 TCP/UDP port number.
• Cross-stack QoS to allow QoS to be configured across a stack of 2960-X series switches.
• The Cisco committed information rate (CIR) function provides bandwidth in increments as low as 8 Kbps.
• Rate limiting is provided based on source and destination IP address, source and destination MAC
address, Layer 4 TCP/UDP information, or any combination of these fields, using QoS ACLs (IP ACLs or
MAC ACLs), class maps, and policy maps.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switching Database Manager
Switching database manager (SDM) templates for LAN Base and IP Lite licenses allows the administrator to
automatically optimize the ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM) allocation to the desired features based
on deployment-specific requirements. MAC, routing, security, and QoS scalability numbers depend on the type of
template used in the switch.
Table 3.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Family LAN Lite and LAN Base Scalability Numbers
I*r.iui*.
Unicast MAC Addresses
16K
16K
IPv4 Unicast Direct Routes
320
2K
IPv4UnicastlndirectRoutes
32
1K
IPv6 Unicast Direct Routes
256
2K
Pv6 Unicast Indirect Routes
0
1K
lPv4 Multicast Routes and IGMP Groups
1K
1K
lPv6 Multicast Groups
1K
1K
Pv4 QoS ACEs
384
500
IPv6 QoS ACEs
256
500
IPv4 Security ACEs
256
625
IPv6 Security ACEs
256
625
TabIe4.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Family IP Lite Scalability Numbers
AWIHjII@
IWII1?- UI(4
Unicast MAC Addresses
16K
32K
16K
IPv4 Unicast Direct Routes
4K
250
16K
Pv4 Unicast Indirect Routes
1.25K
250
8K
tPv6 Unicast Direct Routes
4K
250
0
JPv6 Unicast Inclirect Routes
1.25K
250
0
IPv4 Multicast Routes and IGMP
Groups
1K
1K
1K
IPv6 Multicast Groups
1K
1K
0
IPv4 QoS ACEs
500
500
500
IPv6 QoS ACEs
250
500
0
IPv4 Security ACEs
1K
1K
875
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affihiates. Al]rights reserved. This document is cisco Pubhic Information.
Page 6 of 27
'1WI (IP1!ll
I(I2UIoi
500
500
0
500
0
375
Resources
•ITTIIlll2!1
lPv6 Security ACEs
IPv4 Policy Based Routing
ACEs
Cisco FlexStack-Plus
Cisco FlexStack-Plus provides stacking of up to eight 2960-X switches with the optional FlexStack-Plus module
(Figure 2).
The FlexStack-Plus module is bat swappable and can be added to any Cisco Catalyst 2960-X or Catalyst 2960XR
with a FlexStack-Plus siot. Switches connected to a stack will automatically upgrade to the stack's Cisco OS
Software version and transparently join the stack without additional intervention.
Cisco FlexStack-Plus and Cisco ¡OS Software offer true stacking, with al¡ switches in a stack acting as a single
switch unit. FlexStack-Plus provides a unified data plane, unified configuration, and single IP address for switch
management. The advantages of true stacking include lower total cost of ownership and higher availability through
simplified management as well as cross-stack features including EtherChannel, SPAN, and FlexLink.
To provide investment protection, FlexStack-Plus is backwards-compatible with FlexStack. Cisco Catalyst 2960-X
LAN Base switches equipped wth a FlexStack-Plus module can be stacked Wth Catalyst 2960-S and 2960-SF
LAN Base switches equipped with a FlexStack module (see Table 5).
Table 5.
FlexStack and FlexStack Plus Supported Combinations
WI['IitALite
2960-X LAN Base
2960-S.,SF LAN Base
2960-XR IP Lite
Yes
-
-
2960-X LAN Base
-
Yes
Yes
2960-S or 2960-SF LAN Base
.
Yes
Yes
Table 6.
FlexStack-Plus Scalability and Performance
2960-XR IP Lite
80G
8
¡OS IP Lite
2960-XLAN Base
80G
8
¡OS LAN Base
2960-X LAN Base mixed with
2960-SISF LAN Base
40G
4
lOS LAN Base
Figure 2.
Cisco FlexStack-Plus Switch Stack
000421
© 2016 cisco and/or its affihiates. Afl nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Information.
Page 7 of 27
Power Supply
The Catalyst 2960-X switches comes with one fixed power-supply and options for an externa¡ redundant power
supply source (RPS2300).
The Catalyst 2960-XR switches support dual redundant power supplies. The Catalyst 2960-XR ships with one
power supply by default. The second power supply can be purchased at the time of ordering the switch or as a
spare. These power supplies have in-built fans to provide cooling.
Figure 3.
2960-XR Family Power Supply
The following table shows the different power supplies available in these switches and the available PoE power.
Table 7.
2960-XR Default Power Supply Configurations
ll
WS-C2960XR-24TS-I
pwR-c2-250wAc
-
PWR-c2-640WAC
3701N
PWR-C2-1 025WAC
740W
1.wL1
WS-C2960XR-48TS-I
WS-C2960XR-24TD-I
WS-C2960XR-48T0-I
WS-C2960XR-24PD-I
WS-C2960XR-48LPD-I
WS-C2960XR-24PS-I
WS-C2960XR-481LPS-I
WS-C2960XR-481FPD4
WS-C2960XR-481FPS-I
Intefligent Power over Ethernet Plus
Cisco Catalyst 2960-Xseries switches support both IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at
PoE+ (up to 30W per port) to deliver lower total cost of ownership for deptoyments that incorporate Cisco IP
phones, Cisco AironJ wireless access points, or other standards-compliant PoE/PoE+ end devices. PoE removes
the need to supply wall power to PoE-enabled devices and eliminates the cost of adding electrical cabling and
circuits that would otherwise be necessary in IP phone and WLAN deployments.
The Catalyst 2960-X series PoE power allocation is dynamic and power mapping scale up to a maximum of 740W
P0E+ power.
The 2960-XR switch configurations offer the additional beneflt of dual redundant power supplies. If both power
supplies are used, then the 2960-XR shares the load between the two power supplies for non stop power.
© 2016 cisco and/or its affiliates. Al¡rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Information,
Page 8 of 27
Table 8.
2960-X PoE and PoE+ Power Capacity
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
24 ports up lo 30W
48 ports up to 154W
740W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up to 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-L
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up to 15,4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-1-
24 ports up to 30W
48 ports up to 15.4W
740W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-L
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up lo 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-1-
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up lo 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-L
3 ports up to 30W
7 ports up to 15.4W
110W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPD-1
24 ports up to 30W
48 ports up to 15.4W
740W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LP0-I
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up lo 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PD-4
12 ports up to 30W
24 ports up lo 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-1
24 ports up to 30W
48 ports up to 15.4W
740W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS-1
12 ports up lo 30W
24 ports up to 15.4W
370W
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-I
12 ports up lo 30W
24 ports up to 15.4W
370W
lntelligent power management allows flexible power allocation across aU ports
Table 9.
2960-XR Avaihable POE and Switch Power Capabihities with Different Combinations of Power Supplies
PWR-C2-250WAC
-
-
PWR-C2-250WAC
PWR-C2-250WAC
PWR-C2-640W4C
-
No
-
-
Yes
-
370W
No
-
PWR-C2-640WAC
PWR-C2-640WAC
370W
Yes
370W
PWR-C2-I025WAC
-
740W
No
-
PWR-C2-I025WAC
PWR-C2-1025WAC
740W
Yes
740W
AppliCation Visibihty
Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches support NetFlow Lite, which enables IT teams to understand the mix of traffic on
their network and identify anomahies by capturing and recording speciflc paCket fiows. NetFlow Lite supports
flexible samphing of the trafflc, and exports flow data in the NetFlow Version 9 format for anaysis on a wide range
of Cisco and third-party collectors.
NetFlow Lite is induded on al¡ Catalyst 2960-X and 2960-XR LAN Base and IP Lite models.
Cisco Catalyst SmartOperations
Cisco Catalyst SmartOperations is a comprehensive set of capabilities that simplify LAN planning, deployment,
monitoring, and troubleshooting. Deploying SmartOperations tools reduces the time and effort required to operate
the network and lowers total cost of ownership (TCO).
• Cisco AutoConfig services determine the leve¡ of network access provided to an endpoint based on the
type of the endpoint device. This feature also permits hard-binding between the end device and the
interface,
000422
© 2016 cisco andlor ¡ts aftiliates. Al¡ rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 9 of 27
e
Cisco Smart Insta¡¡ services enable minimal-touch deployment by providing automated Cisco OS
Software image installation and configuration when new switches are connected to the network. This
enables network administrators to remotely manage Cisco OS Software image installs and upgrades.
Cisco Auto SmartPorts services enable automatic configuration of switch ports as devices connect to the
switch, with settings optimized for the device type resulting in zero-touch port-policy provisioning.
• Cisco Auto QoS is a service that automatic configuration of QoS that aliows switch to manage QoS
policies based on traffic types resulting in zero-touch traffic engineering. Auto-QoS supports 8 egress
queues in both 2960-X and 2960-XR product families.
• Cisco Smart Troubleshooting is an extensive array of diagnostic commands and system health checks
within the switch, including Smart Cali Home. The Cisco GOLD (Generic Onhine Diagnostics) and Cisco
onhine diagnostics on switches in ¡¡ve networks help predicting and detecting failures faster.
For more information about Cisco Catalyst SmartOperations, visit csco.com/Qo/SmartOperations.
Operational SmpIicity Features
• Cisco AutoSecure provides a single-Une CLI to enable base une security features (Port Security, DHCP
snooping, DA¡). This feature simplifies security configurations with a single touch.
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) autoconfiguration of multiple sMtches through a boot
server eases switch deployment.
• Stacking master configuration management and Cisco FlexStack Plus technology helps ensure that aH
switches are automaticaily upgraded when the master switch receives a new software version. Automatic
software version checking and updating help ensure that ah stack members have the same software
version.
• Autonegotiation on all ports automatically selects half- or fuhl-duplex transmission mode to optimize
bandwidth.
e
Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) facihitates dynamic trunk configuration across ah switch ports.
• Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) automates the creation of Cisco Fast EtherChannel® groups or Gigabit
EtherChannel groups to link to another switch, router, or server.
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) allows the creation of Ethernet channeling with devices that
conform to IEEE 802.3ad. This feature is similar to Cisco EtherChanneh technology and PAgP.
e
Automatic media-dependent interface crossover (MDIX) automaticahly adjusts transmit and receive pairs
if an incorrect cable type (crossover or straight-through) is installed.
e
Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol (UDLD) and Aggressive UDLD alhow unidirectional links caused
by incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults to be detected and disabled on fiber-optic interfaces.
• Switching Database Manager (SDM) templates for access, routing, and VLAN deployment allow the
administrator to easihy maximize memory ahlocation to the desired features based on deployment-specific
requ i rements.
e
Local Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) works in conjunction with Private VLAN Edge to
minimize broadcasts and maximize available bandwidth.
e
VLANI minimization ahhows VLAN1 to be disabled on any individual VLAN trunk.
© 2016 cisco and/or its affiliates. Al¡rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic hnformation.
Page 10 of 27
ig-
• Smart Multicast, with Cisco FlexStack-Plus technology, allows the Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series to offer
greater efficiency and support for more multicast data streams such as video by putting each data packet
onto the backplane only once.
• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping for lPv4 and lPv6 MLD vi and v2 Snooping
provide fast client joins and leaves of multicast streams and limit bandwidth-intensive video traffic to only
the requestors.
• Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) continuously sends multicast streams in a multicast VLAN while
isolating the streams from subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
• Per-port broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control prevents faulty end stations from degrading
overali systems performance.
• Voice VLAN simplifies telephony installations by keeping voice traffic on a separate VLAN for easier
administration and troubleshooting.
• Cisco VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) supports dynamic VLANs and dynamic trunk configuration across
all switches.
• Remote Switch Port Analyzer (RSPAN) allows administrators to remotely monitor ports in a Layer 2
switch network from any other switch in the same network.
• For enhanced traffic management, monitoring, and analysis, the Embedded Remote Monitoring (RMON)
software agent supports four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events).
• Layer 2 trace route eases troubleshooting by identifying the physical path that a packet takes from source
to destination.
• Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) reduces the cost of administering software upgrades by downloading
from a centralized location.
• Network Timing Protocol (NTP) provides an accurate and consistent timestamp to alt intranet switches.
Power Management
The 2960-X switches offer a range industry leading features for effective energy efficiency and energy
management. 2960X Series are the greenest switches in the industry.
Switch Hibernation Mode (SHM) is an industry first and available on all 2960-X series switches. This feature puts
the switch in ultra low power mode during periods of non-operation such as nights or weekends. Switch
Hibernation Mode on the 2960-X switches can be scheduled using EnergyWise compliant management software.
IEEE 802.3az EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet) enables ports to dynamically sense ¡die penods between traffic
bursts and quickly switch the interfaces into a low power ¡die mode, reducing power consumpthon.
Cisco EnergyWise policies can be used to control the power consumed by PoE-powered endpoints, desktop and
data-center IT equipment, and a wide range of building infrastructure. Energywise technology is included on alI
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches.
For more information about Cisco EnergyWise' , visit cisco.com/go/energvwise.
000423
© 2016 Cisco aridlor its affihiates. Al¡ nghts reserved. This document is Cisco PubVc Inforrnation.
Page 11 of 27
Network Management
The Cisco Catalyst 2960XSeries Switches offer a superior CLI for detailed configuration and administration.
2960-X Series Switches are also supported in the fuIl range of Cisco network management solutions.
Cisco Prime Jnfrastructure
Cisco Prime network management solutions provide comprehensive network lifecycle management. Cisco Prime
Infrastructure provides an extensive Iibrary of easy-to-use features to automate the initial and day-to-day
management of your Cisco network. Cisco Prime integrates hardware and software platforrn expertise and
operational experience into a powerful set of workflow-driven configuration, monitoring, troubleshooting, reporting,
and administrative tools.
For detailed information about Cisco Prime, visit cisco. com/go/prirne.
Cisco Network Assistant
A Cisco network management application designed for srnall and rnedium-sized business (SMB) networks with up
to 250 users that runs on PCs, Tablets and even Smartphones, Cisco Network Assistant offers centralized network
management and configuration capabilities. This application also features an intuitive GUI where users can easily
apply common services across Cisco switches, routers, and access points.
For detailed information about Cisco Network Assistant, visit cisco.com/go/cna.
Security Management
Cisco Identity Services Engine (¡SE) support enables the 2960-XR switches to offer security management for alI
devices connected to it.
Figure 4.
Fanless Quiet Coal 24-Port PoE Switch
The Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series adds a new member to its 2960-X family, the WS-C2960X-24PSQ-1L (CooI). This
is a 24-port 1OM/100M/1000M switch that can power up to 8 ports of PoE (first eight ports only) with ability to
deliver a sum total of 110W of PoE power. This switch has four Gigabit Ethernet uplinks: two of them SFP and the
other two 1OM/100M/1000M copper interfaces enabling choice of fiber or copper connectivity to the aggregation
point. This switch ships with the Cisco lOS LAN Base irnage.
Sorne important 2960-X "cool" switch highlights are:
• Extends a highly secure, intelligent, managed Cisco Catalyst infrastructure with a single Ethernet cable or
fiber from the wiring closet
• Support for advanced security and intelligent services, including Netflow-Lite and Switch Hibernation,
including voice, video, AP powering, and Cisco Enterprise Network services to rernote endpoints
• Less than 12" depth fit in user work spaces where multiple cable runs could be challenging with very Iow
power consumption and heat dissipation
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. AV nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 12 of 27
• Higher MTBF rates due to no moving mechanical parts, no fans help ensure that 2960X cooi switch is
convenient to be used for colocated applications
• Easy to deploy using smart-install, configure with auto-smart-ports and device sensors and manage using
Cisco Prime or CNA
2960-X CooI Switch Use Cases
RetaD
Major retailers are increasingly moving customer-facing IP-based applications and services to the middle of the
sales floor or POS that is far away from their access router that connects the retail outlets to the outside network. .4
typical retail outlet needs to serve customers at multiple sales points, each with a POS machine, phone, printer. or
video display with network and sorne PoE powering. Because of their quiet operation and ability to cater to up to 24
ports with flexible mounting options, these switches are idealiy suited for mounting in confined spaces on the fioor.
Education
The 2960X cool switch extends access to labs, classrooms, and other training rooms from the central/fioor
distnbution rooms, reducing cost of cabling and providing superior quality of service with enhanced secunty and
enterprise network features. Quiet operation and shallow depth make them ideally suited for classrooms or
confined areas nearby.
Defense
Defense establishrnents often look to an access switch that is portable in mobile units. These units require multi pie
network access devices, sorne of thern residing in inconvenient locations in the rnobile unit that requires being
powered by the switch, reducing nurnber of cables to that location and reducing possible failure sources. The
switch is expected to be very quiet and have longer MTBF rates, which is served by the 2960X coci switch.
Technical Specifications
Table 10.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X
Series Hardware
Flash memory
128 MB for LAN Base & IP Lite SKUs, 64 MB for LAN Lite SKIJs
DRAM
512 MB for LAN Base and 256 MB for LAN Lite
Cpu
APM86392 600MHz dual core
Console Porte
usB (Type-B), Ethernet (RJ-45)
Storage Interface
uSB (Type-A) for externa¡ flash storage
Network Management Interface
101100 Mbps Ethernet (RJ-.45)
Table 11.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Performance
2960-X LAN Lite
29604 LAN Base
2960-XR IP Lite
Forwarding bandwidth
50 Gbps
108 Gbps
108 Gbps
Switching bandwidth
100 Gbps
216 Gbps
216 Gbps
Maximum active VLANS
64
1023
1023
VLAN lDs available
4096
4096
4096
Maximum transmission unit (MTIJ)-L3 packet
9198 bytes
9198 bytes
9198 bytes
Jumbo trame - Ethernet trame
9216 bytes
9216 bytes
9216 bytes
Switching bandwidth is full-duplex capacity.
© 2016 cisco andlor its affihiates. Alt nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Pubtic Information.
OOO4'
Pa9e 1 o127
Tabte 12.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Forwarding Performance
Catalyst 2960-XFamily
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
130,9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
130.9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-L
95.2 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48TD-L
130.9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
95.2 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-L
107.1 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48LPS-L
107.1 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-L
71.4 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-L
71.4 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-L
107.1 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-L
71.4 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-LL
104.2 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
68.5 Mpps
Catalyst 2960-XR Family
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPD-1
130.9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-I
130.9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PD-I
95.2 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD-1
130.9 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-I
95.2 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-1
107.1 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS4
107.1 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-I
71.4 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-1
1071 Mpps
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-1
71.4 Mpps
Table 13.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Mechanical Specifications
Dlmenslons
Inches (H x D x W)
Ceritimeters (H x O x W)
WS-C2960X-48FPD-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 36,8 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-48LPD-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 368 x 44.5
WS-C2960X.48TD-L
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 279 x 445
WS-C2960X-24PD-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 36.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-24T0-L
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 27.9 x 44.5
WSC2960X-48FPS-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 36.6 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-48LPS-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 36.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-48TS-L
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 27.9 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-24PS-L
1.75 x 14.5 x 17.5
4.5 x 36.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-24PSQ-L
1.73 x 11.03 x 17.5
4.45 x 28.0 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-24TS-L
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 27.9 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-48TS-LL
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 27.9 x 44.5
WS-C2960X-24TS-LL
1.75 x 11.0 x 17.5
4.5 x 27.9 x 44.5
© 2016 Cisco andlor its affihiates. Al¡nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Infomiation.
Page 14 of 27
Weights
Pounds
Kilograms
WS-C2960X-481FPD-1L
12.9 lbs
5.8 Kg
WS-C2960X-48LP0-L
12.9 lbs
5.8 Kg
WS-C2960X-48T0-1L
9.6 lbs
4.3 Kg
WS-C2960X-24PD-1L
12.7 lbs
5.7 Kg
WS-C2960X-24TD-L
8.9 lbs
4.0 Kg
WS-C2960X-48FPS-L
12.9 lbs
5.8 Kg
WS-C2960X-48LPS-L
12.9 lbs
5.8 Kg
WSC2960X-48TS-L
9.4 lbs
4.2 Kg
WS-C29SOX-24PS-L
12.8 lbs
5.8 kg
WSC2960X-24115SQ-1L
12.8 lbs
5.8 kg
WS-C2960X-24TS-L
8.9 lbs
4.0 kg
WS-C2960X-48TS-LL
8.9 lbs
WS-C2960X-24TS4IL
8.2 lbs
Tabie 14.
4.0kg
-- -
3.7 kg
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Sedes Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions
Inches (Pl x D x W)
Centimeters (H x
WS-C2960XR-48FPD4
1.75x 16.0x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-481LPD4
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-4.8TD-I
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR.24PD-1
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-241D-I
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-481FPS-1
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-48LPS-I
1.75 x 1 6.Ox 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-48TS-1
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-24PS-I
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
WS-C2960XR-24TS-1
1.75 x 16.0 x 17.5
4.45 x 40.8 x 44.5
Weights
Pounds
Kllograns
WS-C2960XR-481FPD4
14.6
6.6
WS-C2960XR-48LPD-
14.0
6.4
WS-C2960XR-MM-I
13.3
6.1
WS-C2960XR-24P0-I
13.6
6.2
WS-C2960XR-241D-1
13.0
5.9
WS-C2960XR-48FPS-1
14.7
6.7
WS-C2960XR-481LPS-1
14.2
6.4
WS-C2960XR-48TS-I
13.2
6.0
WS-C2960XR-24PS-I
13.7
6.2
WS-C2960XR-24TS-I
13.0
5.9
000425
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. AlI nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Public lnfomiation.
Page 15 of 27
Table 15.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Environmental Specifications
Fahrenheit
Centigrade
Operating temperature up to 5000 ft (1500 m)
23°F to 113°F
-5°C to 45°C
Operating temperature up to 10,000 ft (3000 m)
23°F to 104°F
-5°C to 40°C
Short-term exception at sea leve¡
23°F to 131°F
-5°C to 55°C
Short-term exception up to 5000 feet (1500 m)
23°F to 122°F
-5°C to 50°C
Short-term exception up to 10,000 feet (3000 m)
23°F to 113°F
-5°C to 45°C
Short-term exception up to 13,000 feet (4000 m)
231to 104°F
-5°C to 40°C
Storage temperature up to 15,000 feet (4573 m)
-13° to 158°F
-250 to 70°C
Fe
Operating altitude
Up to 10,000
Up to 3000
Storage altitude
Up to 13,000
Up to 4000
Operating relative humidity
10% to 95% noncondensing
Storage relative humidity
10% to 95% noncondensing
Acoustic Noise
Measured per SO 7779 and declared per SO 9291 PoE output of 185W or less where applicable.
Bystander positions operating mode at 25°C ambient.
Modet
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
Sound Power
Sound Pressure
LwAD (Maximum)
LpA (Typical)
LpAD (Maximum) LwA (Typical)
39 dB
43dB
4.98
5.3 B
42 dB
46 dB
5.1 8
5.5 B
39 dB
43 dB
4.9 B
5.3 8
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-1L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TD-1L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-481LPS-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-L
N/A
NÍA
NJA
N/A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-L
42 dB
46 dB
5.1 B
5.5 B
42 dB
46 dB
5.1 B
5.5 B
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPD-I
40dB
43dB
5.213
5.58
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-I
40dB
43dB
5.213
5.513
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24P0-1
40dB
43dB
5.213
5.513
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD-I
22dB
25dB
3.313
3613
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-L
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-LL
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-1
22dB
25dB
3.39
3.613
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS4
40dB
43dB
5.29
5.513
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS-I
40dB
43dB
5.213
5.58
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-I
40dB
43dB
5.213
5.513
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-1
22dB
25dB
3.38
3.69
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-I
22dB
25dB
3.313
3.613
© 2016 Cisco andior its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Inforrnation.
Page 16 of 27
Predicted ReliabIity
Model
MTBF in hours
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FP13-L
233,370
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
277,960
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-1L
325,780
Cisco Catalyst 29€OX48TD.L
445,460
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
569,520
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-L
232,610
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-481—PS-L
276,870
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-L
324,280
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-1-
462,680
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS -L
442,690
Cisco Catalyst 2960X -24TS-L
564,910
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-1-1-
476,560
Cisco Catalyst 2960X -24TS-LL
622.350
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-STACK
17,128,090
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FP0-I
231,590
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-1
275,430
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PD-1
322,740
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48T0-1
440,880
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-1
561,890
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-I
230,860
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS-I
274,380
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-1
321,290
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-I
438,130
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-1
557,320
Cisco PWR-C2-250WAC
1,000,000
Cisco PWR -C2-640WAC
1,000,000
Cisco PW11-C2-1025WAC
1.000,000
Not more than the following in a 1-year period: 96 consecutive hours, or 360 hours total, or 15 occurrences.
Currently estimates; Later will be Based on Telcordia SR-332 lssue 2 methodology.
Table 16.
Connectors and Interfaces
Ethernet Interfaces
• 1 OBASE-T
ports: RJ-45 connectors, 2-pair Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded tsted-pair (UTP) cabling
• 100BASE-TX ports: RJ-45 connectors, 2-pair Category 5 UTP cabling
• 10008ASE-T ports: RJ-45 connectors, 4-pair Category 5 UTP cabling
• 1000BASE-T SFP-based ports: RJ-45 connectors, 4-pair Category 5 UTP cabling
SFP and SFP+ Interfaces
For information about supported SFP/SFP+ modules, refer to the Transceiver CompatibiRty matrix tables at
cisco, com'enJt.JS/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products device support tables list.html.
Indicator LEN
• Per-port status: Link integrity, disabled, activity. speed, and fui¡ duplex
• System status: System, RPS, Stack link status, link duplex, PoE, and link speed
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Al¡ rights reserved. This document is Cisco Publtc Information
000426
Page 17of27
1
Connectors and Interfaces
Stacking Interfaces
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XFlexStack-Plus stacking cables:
• CAB-STK-E-0.5M FlexStack-Plus stacking cable with a 0.5 m length
• CAB-STK-E-1 M FlexStack-Plus stacking cable with a 1.0 m length
• CAB-STK-E-3M FlexStack-Plus stacking cable with a 3.0 m length
Console
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X console cables:
• CAB-CONSOLE--RJ45 Console cable 6 ft. with RJ-45
• CAB-CONSOLE-USB Console cable 6 ft. with USB Type A and mini-B connectors
Power
• The internal power supply is an auto-ranging unit and supports input voltages between 100 and 240V AC
• Use the supplied AC power cord to connect the AC power connector to an AC power outlet
• The Cisco RPS connector offers connection for an optional Cisco RPS 2300 that uses AC input and supplies DC output to the switch
• Only the Cisco RPS 2300 (model PWR-RPS2300) should be attached to the redundant-power-system receptacle
Table 17.
Management and Standards Support
Management
• BRIDGE-MIB
• CISCO-TC-MIB
• CISCO-CABLE-DIAG-MIB
• CICSO-TCP-MIB
• CISCO-CDP-MIB
• CISCO-UDLDP-MIB
• CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB
• CISCO-VIAN-IFTABLE
• CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB
• RELATIONSHP-MIB
• CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB
• CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB
• CISCO-DICP-SNOOPING-MIB
• CISCO-VTP-MIB
• CISCO-ENTITY-VENDORTYPE-01D-MIB
• ENTITY-MIB
• CISCO-ENVMON-MIB
• ETHERLIKE-MIB
• CISCO-ERR-DISABLE-MIB
• IEEE8021-PAE-MIB
• CISCO-FLASH-MIB
• IEEE8023-LAG-MIB
• CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB
• IF-MIB
• CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB
• INET-ADDRESS-MIB
• CISCO-IMAGE-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB
• CISCO-lP-STAT-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB
• CISCO-LAG-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MIB
• CISCO-MAC-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-lP-MIB
• CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB
• CISCO-PAGP-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB
• CISCO-PING-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB
• CISCO-POE-EXTENSIONS-MIB
• RFC1213-MIB
• CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB
• RMON-MIB
• CISCO-PORT-SECURITY-MIB
• RMON2-MIB
• CISCO-PORT-STORM-CONTROL-MIB
• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• CISCO-PRODUCTS-MIB
• SNMP-MPD-MIB
• CISCO-PROCESS-MIB
• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• CISCO-RTTMON-MIB
• SNMP-TARGET-MIB
• CISCO-SMI-MIS
• SNMPv2-MIB
• CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MlB
• TCP-MIB
• CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB
• UDP-MIB
ePM MIB
• CISCO-FLEXSTACK-PLUS-Ml B (2960-X)
Foran updated tist of supported MBs, referto the MIB Locator atcsc»conYomibs.
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. AlI rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 18 of 27
Standards
• IEEE 802.ID Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
• 1 EEE 802.1p CoS Prioritization
• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
• IEEE 8O2.1QVLAN
• IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T
• IEEE802.1s
• IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X
• IEEE 802.1w
• RMON 1 and II standards
• IEEE802.1X
• SNMP vi, v2c, and v3
• IEEE 802.1 ab (LLDP)
• IEEE 802.3az
• IEEE 802.3ad
• IEEE 802.3ae lüGigabit Ethernet
• IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802,3at
• IEEE8O2.lax
• IEEE 802. 3ah (100BASE-X sngIefmuItirnode fiber
only)
• IEEE 802.3x fut duplex on 10BASE-T, 100BASETX, and 1000BASE-T ports
RFC compliance
• RFC 768 - UDP
• REO 1901 - SNMP v2C
• RFC 783-TFTP
• REO 1902-1907- SNMP v2
• RFC 791 - IP
• RFC 792-ICMP
• RFC 1981 - Maxirnum Transmission Unit (MTU) Path
Discovery lPv6
• RFC 793-TOP
• FRO 2068 - HTTP
• RFC 826-ARP
• REO 2131 -DHCP
• RFC 854-Telnet
• REO 2138-RADIUS
• RFC 951 - Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
• REO 2233-lE MIBv3
e REO 2373- 1Pv6 AggregatableAddrs
• RFC 959-FTP
• REO 1112-IP Multicast and IGMP
• REO 2460 - IPv6
•
• REO 2461 - IPv6 Neighbor Discovery
RFC 1157-SNMPv1
• RFC 1166- IP Addresses
• REO 2462 - IPv6 Autoconfiguration
• RFC 1256 - Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) Router Discovery
• RFC 2463 - ICMP lPv6
•
e REO 2597 - Assured Forwarding
RFC 1305-NTP
• REO 1492-TAOACS+
e REO 2474 - Differentiated Sences (DiffServ) Precedence
e REO 2598 - Expedited Eorwarding
• RFC 1493- Bridge MI
e REO 2571 - SNMP Management
• REO 1542- BOOTP extensions
• REO 3046 - DHOP Relay Agent lnforrnation Option
• RFC 1643 - Ethernet Interface MIB
e REO 3376 - IGMP v3
• RFC1757-RMON
e REO 3580 - 802.1X RADIUS
Table 18. Voltage and Power Ratings
Model
Voltage (Auto ranging)
Current
Frequency
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
100 to 240 VAC
9A-4A
50 to 60Hz
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-1L
5A-2A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-1L
5A-2A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TD-1L
1A - 0.5A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24T0-L
lAto 0.5A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-L
9A - 4A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-1-
5A - 2A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-L
5A - 2A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-L
2A - 4A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-L
1A-0.5A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-L
1A - 0.5A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-LL
lA - 0.5A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
1A-0.5A
000427
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Al! nghts reserved. This docurnent is Cisco Public lnforrnation.
Page 19of27
Model
Vottage (Auto ranglng)
Current
Frequency
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPD-1
100 to 240 VAC
lOA to 5A
50 to 60Hz
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-I
SA to 3 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PDI
6A lo 3 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD-I
lA lo 0.5 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-1
lAto 0.5 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-4FPS-I
lOA to 5 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS-1
6A to 3 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-1
6A to 3 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-1
lA to 0.5 A
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-1
lA to 0.5 A
Power Rating (Switch maximum consumption values)
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-1
0.89 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LP0-L
0.48 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X24PD-L
0.47 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TD-1
0.049 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
0.034 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-L
0.89 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-L
0.49 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-L
0.49 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-L
0.16 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-L
0.051 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-L
0.039 kVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-4.8TS-LL
0.46KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
0.035KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPD-I
0.89KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPD-1
0.48KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24P0-1
0.46KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD-1
0.047KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24T0-1
0.O39KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-I
0.89KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR48LPS4
0,47KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-1
0.46KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-1
0.046KVA
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-1
0.038KVA
12V
53V
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPD-L
4A
15A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPD-L
4A
8A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PD-L
3A
8A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TD-L
4A
NIA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
3A
N/A
© 2016 Cisco andlor its affihiates. Afl rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic information.
Page 20 of 27
Cisco Catalyst 2960X.48FPS-L
4A
15A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-L
4A
8A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PS-1-
3A
8A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-1-
N/A
N/A
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48TS-1-
5A
tWA
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-1-
4A
N/A
Note;
The wattage rating on the power supply does not represent actual power draw. It indicates the maximum
power draw possible by the power supply. This rating can be used for facility capacity planning. For PoE switches,
cooling requirements are smaller than total power draw as a significant portion of the load is dissipated in the
endpoints.
Table 19.
Power Consumption'
Model
0% Trafftc3
10% Traffic
100% Traffic
Weighted Average
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48FP0-L
50.8
65.9
66.7
66.0
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-481-PD-L
45.7
61.1
62.0
61.2
Cisco Catalyst 2960X.24PD-L
44.7
52.3
53.1
52.3
Cisco Catalyst 2960X48TD-L
32.9
47.0
47.8
47.1
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TD-L
24.9
32.2
33.1
373
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48FPS-1-
51.9
66.6
66.8
66.6
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48LPS-L
46.7
60.8
61.1
60.9
Cisco Catalyst 2960X.24PS-1-
41.4
49.0
49.2
49.0
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24PSQ-1-
28.5
32.8
34.8
33.0
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-1-
34.9
49.5
49.7
49.5
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-L
28.0
36.8
37.1
36.9
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-48TS-LL
31.4
44.3
44.5
44.4
Cisco Catalyst 2960X-24TS-LL
25.2
32.0
32.0
32.0
Cisco Catalyst 296OXR-4.8FPD-I
46.7
61.8
62.5
61.9
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-481PD-I
40.7
54.6
55.9
54.8
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PD4
36.1
42.9
43.7
43.0
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TD-1
29.7
44.7
45.6
44.8
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TD-I
29.3
37.2
38,1
37.3
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48FPS-I
44.8
58.5
58.8
58.5
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48LPS.I
37.9
52.8
53.0
52.9
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24PS-1
36.5
43.2
43.4
43.2
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-48TS-I
30.0
44.8
45.0
44.8
Cisco Catalyst 2960XR-24TS-I
28.8
36.0
36.2
36.0
Disclaimer: AH power consumption numbers were measured under controlled laboratory conditioris and are provided as
esti mates.
2
ATIS Methodology
All Traffic measured with EEE enabled.
© 2016 cisco and/or its affihiates. Al¡ rights reserved. This document is cisco Public Information.
000428
Page 21 of 27
Table 20.
Safety and Compliance
UL 60950-1 Second Edition
Safety
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 Second Edition
EN 60950-1 Second Edition
IEC 60950-1 Second Edition
ASINZS 60950-1
EMC - Emlsslons
47CFR Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A
ASINZS CISPR22 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
ICES003 Class A
VCCI Class A
EN61 000-3-2
EN61 000-3-3
KN22 Class A
CNS13438 Class A
EMC - Immunity
EN55024
CISPR24
EN300386
KN24
Environmental
Reduction of Hazardous Substances (R0HS) ¡ncluding Directive 201 1165/EU
Telco
Common Language Equipment Identifler (CLEI) code
US Government Certifications
USGv6 and lPv6 Ready Logo
Cisco Enhanced Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Sedes Switches come with an enhanced limited lifetime warranty (E-LLW). The E-LLW
provides the same terms as Ciscos standard limited lifetime warranty but adds next business day delivery of
replacement hardware, where available, and 90 days of 8X5 Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) support.
Your formal warranty statement, including the warranty applicable to Cisco software, appears in the Cisco
information packet that accompanies your Cisco product. We encourage you to review carefully the warranty
statement shipped with your specific product before use.
Cisco reserves the right to refund the purchase price as its exclusive warranty remedy. For further information
about warranty terms, visit http://www.cisco.com/Qo/warranty.
Table 21.
Warranty Terms
Device covered
Applies to all Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches.
Warranty duration
As long as the original end user continues to own or use the product.
End-of-Iife policy
In the event of discontinuance of product manufacture, Cisco warranty support is limited to five (5) years from the
announcernent of discontinuance.
Hardware replacement
Cisco or its service center wffl use commerciahly reasonable efforts to ship a Cisco Catalyst 2960-X replacement part
for next business day delivery, where availabte. Otherwise, a replacement will be shipped within ten (10) working
days after the receipt of the RMA request. Actual delivery times may vary depending on customer location.
Effective date
Hardware warranty commences from the date of shpment to custorner (and in case of resale by a Cisco reseller, not
more than ninety [90] days after original shipment by Cisco).
© 2016 Cisco andlor its affihiates. Al¡nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 22 of 27
TAC support
Cisco wiH provide during customer's local business hours, 8 hours per day, 5 days per week basic configuration,
diagnosis, and troubleshooting of device-level problems for up to 90 days from the date of shipment of the onginally
purchased Cisco Catatyst 2960-X product. This support does rrot include solution or network-level support beyond
the specific device under consideration.
Cisco.com Access
Warranty allows guest access only to Cisco.com.
Software PoIicy
Customers with Cisco Catalyst IP Lite, LAN Base and LAN Lite software feature sets will be provided with
maintenance updates and bug fixes designed to maintain the compliance of the software with published
specifications, release notes, and industry standards compliance as long as the original end user continues to own
or use the product or up to one year from the end-of-sale date for this product, whichever occurs earlier.
This policy supersedes any previous warranty or software statement and is subject to change without notice.
Technical Support and Services
Table 22.
Technical Services Available for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Series Switches
Cisco Smart Net Total Care' Service
• Around-the-dock, global access to the Cisco TAC
• Unrestricted access to the extensive Cisco.com knowledge base and tools
• Next-business-day, 8x5x4, 24x7x4, or 24x7x2 advance hardware replacement and onsite paris replacement and irrstallation available
e
Ongoing operating system software updates within the licensed feature set
• Proactive diagnostics and real-time alerts on Smart Cali Home enabled devices
Cisco Smart Foundatiori Service
• Next-business-day advance hardware replacement as available
• Access to SMB TAC dunng business hours (access levels vary by region)
• Access to Cisco.com SMB knowledge base
• Onhine technical resources through Smart Fourrdation Portal
• Operating system software bug fixes and patches
Cisco Smart Care Service
• Network-Level coverage for the needs of smalt and medium-sized businesses
e
Proactive heahth checks and periodic assessments of Cisco network foundatiorr, voce, and security technologies
e
Technical support for ehigible Cisco hardware and software through Smart Care Portal
• Cisco operating system and application software updates and upgrades2
• Next-business-day advance hardware replacement as available, 24x7x4 option available'
Cisco SP Base Service
• Around-the-clock, global access to the Cisco TAC
• Registered access to Cisco.com
• Next-business-day, 8x5x4, 24x7x4, and 24x7x2 advance hardware replacement. Return lo factory option available'
• Ongoing operating system software update52
Cisco Focused Technical Support Services
Three levels of premium, high-touch services are available
• Cisco High-Touch Operations Management Service
• Cisco High-Touch Technical Support Service
e
Cisco High-Touch Engineenng Service
Vahid Cisco Smart Net Total Care or SP Base contracts are required on ah network equipment
•
Advance hardware replacement is available in various service-level combinations. For example, 8x5xNBD indicates that
shipment will be initiated dunng the standard 8-hour business day, 5 days a week (the generaily accepted business days within
the relevant region), with next-business-day (NBD) dehivery. Where NBD is not available, same day shipping is provided.
Restrictions apply; please review the appropnate service descnptions for details.
000429
© 2016 Cisco and/or its aflihiates. All hghts reserved. This document is Cisco Pubhic Information.
Page 23 of 27
Cisco operating system updates include the following: maintenance releases, minor updates, and major updates within the
icensed feature set.
Ordering Information
Tabo 23.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Sedes Switches Ordering Information
WS.C2960X.48lPD1
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
740W
Optional
WS-C2960X-481LPD-1L
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
370W
Optional
24
2 SFP+
LAN Base
370W
Optional
WS-C2960X-48TD-1L
48
2 SFP+
LAN Base
-
Optional
WS-C2960X-24TD-1L
24
2 SFP-'-
LAN Base
-
Optional
WS-C2960X-481FPS-1-
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
740W
Optional
WS-C2960X-48LPS-L
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
370W
Optional
WS-C2960X-24PS-L
24
4 SFP
LAN Base
370W
Optional
WS-C2960X-24PSQ-L
24
2 SFP,
2 10/100/1000BT
LAN Base
110W
No
WS-C2960X-48TS-1-
48
4 SFP
LAN Base
-
Optional
WS-C2960X-24TS-1-
24
4 SFP
LAN Base
-
Optional
WS-C2960X-48TS-LL
48
2 SFP
LAN Lite
-
No
WS-C2960X-24TS41
24
2 SFP
LAN Lite
-
No
WS-C2960X-24PD-1L
Table 24.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Configurations Ordering Information
WS-C2960XR-48FPD-11
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
740W
1025W
Optional
370W
640W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-48LPD-1
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
WS-C2960XR-241PD-1
24
2 SFP+
IP Lite
370W
640W
Optional
250W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-48TD-I
48
2 SFP+
IP Lite
-
WS-C2960XR-24TD-1
24
2 SFP+
IP Lite
-
250W
Optional
4 SFP
IP Lite
740W
1025W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-48FPS-1
48
WS-C2960XR48LPS-1
48
4 SFP
IP Lite
370W
640W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-241PS-I
24
4 SFP
IP Lite
370W
640W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-48TS-1
48
4 SFP
IP Lite
-
250W
Optional
WS-C2960XR-24T84
24
4 SFP
IP Lite
-
250W
Optional
Tabo 25.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Accessones
tF1i11TTII1.jai.
Description
C2960X-STACK
FlexStack-Plus hot-swappable stacking module
CAB-STK-E-0.51VI
FlexStack-Plus stacking cable with a 0.5 m length
CAB-STK-E-1M
F!exStack-Plus stacking cable with a 1.0 m length
CAB-STK-E-3M
FlexStack-Plus stacking cable with a 3.0 m length
CAB-CONSOLE-RJ45 Console cable 6 feet with RJ45
CAB-CONSOLE-USB
Console cable 6 feet with USB Type A and mini-B connectors
PWR-CLP
Po~ cable restraining clip
© 2016 Cisco andlor its affiliates. Al! nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 24 of 27
•IT1llr.n
RCKMNT1RU-2KX
Spare rack-mount kit for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X and 2960XR Series for 1 9-inch racks
IRCKIVINT-REC-2KX=
1 RU recessed rack-mount kit for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X and 2960-XR Series
Table 26.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Redundant Power Supply Options
PWR-RPS2300
Cisco Redundant Power System 2300 and blower, no power supply
BLNK-RPS2300=
Spare bay insert for Cisco Redundant Power System 2300 for Cisco Catalyst 2960 and Cisco Catalyst 2960-X switches
CAB-RPS2300-E=
Spare RPS2300 cable for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X switches
BLWR-RP82300=
Spare 45 CFM b!cmer for RPS 2300
C31(-PWR.750WAC=
RPS 2300 750W AC power supply spare for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X
For more information about the RPS-2300, visit cisco.com/en/US/products/ps7130/index.html.
Table 27.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Power Supply Options
PWR.C2-250WAC4
Second FRU power supply and fan for al! non-PoE 2960-XR switches, provides 250W AC of power
PWR-C2-640WAC4
Second FRU power supply and fan for al! 370W PoE+ 2960-XR switches, provides 640W AC of power
PWR-C2-1025WAC4
Second FRU power supply and fan for al! 740W P0E+ 2960-XR switches, provides 1025W AC of power
PWR-C2-260WAC=
Spare FRU power supply and fan for al! non-PoE 2960-XR switches, provides 250W AC of power
PWR-C2-640WAC=
Spare FRU power supply and fan for a!! 370W P0E+ 2960-XR switches, provides 640W AC of power
PWR-C2-I025WAC=
1 Spare FRU power supply and fan for ah 740W P0E+ 2960-XR switches, provides 1025W AC of power
Table 28.
Cisco Catalyst 2960-X and 2960-XR SFP/SFP+ Modules
SFP and SFIP+ Modules
For the hist of supported SFP and SFP+ modules, visit
http://www.cisco.com/enJLiS/productslhw/rnoduleslps5455/products device support tables list. html.
Table 29.
Power Cords for Cisco Catalyst 2960-X Product Family
CAB-I6AWG.AC
AC power cord, I6AWG
CAB-ACE
AC power cord (Europe). Cl 3, CEE 7, 1.5M
CAB-1-620P-C13-US
Power cord, 250VAC, iSA, NEMA L6-20 to C13, US
CAS-ACI
AC power cord (Ita/y), C13, CE! 23-15, 25m
CAB-ACU
AC power cord (UK), C13, BS 1363, 2.5m
CAB-ACA
AC power cord (China/Australia), C13, AS 3112, Z 5
CAB-ACS
AC power cord (Switzeriand), Cl 3, IEC 60884-1 2.5m
CAB-ACR
AC power cord (Argentina), C13, EL 219 (IRAM 2073), 2.5m
CAB-ACC
CORD, PWR, CHINA, lOA, IEC 320, C13 (APN=CS-PWR-CH)
CAB-JPN-12A
CABASY, POWER CORD, JAPAN 2P, PSE, 12A @125VAC
CAB-L620P-C13-JPN
Power cord, 250VAC, 15A, NEMA L6-20 to C13, JAPAN
CAB.IND
Power cable for India
CAB-C15-ISR
Power cable for Israel
CAB-ACSA
Power cable for South Africa
The first FRU power supply and fan module is configured automaticalty wtien the switch is ordered. The second redundant FRU
oower SUODIV and fan module is an oDtion white confiourinci the order
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Al! rights reserved. This document is Cisco Pub!ic Information.
00043V
Page 25 of 27
CAB-ACI5A-901--US
15A AC power caíd, left angle (United States)
CAB-ACE-IRA
Power cord Europe, right angle
CAB-ACI-RA
Power cord Italian, right angle
CAB-ACU-RA
Power cord UK, right angle
CAB-ACC-RA
Power cord China, right angle
CAB-ACA-RA
Power cord, Austrahan, right angle
CAB-ACS-RA
Power cord for Switzerland, right angle
CAB-ACR-IRA
Power cord, Argentina, right angle
CAB-JPN-RA
Power cord, Japan, right angle
CAB-C15-CBN
Cabinet jumper power cord, 250 VAC 13A, C14-C15 connectors
CAB-ACBZ12A
AC power cord (Brazil) 12A/1 25V BR-3-20 plug for tess than 12A device
Table 30.
Power Cords for Cisco Catalyst 2960-XR Product Family
CAB-TA-NA=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (North Amenca)
CAB-TA-AP=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Australia)
CAB-TA-AR=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Argentina)
CABTA-SW=
AC power cord for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Swerland)
CAB-TA-UK=
AC power cord for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (United Kingdom)
CAB-TA-JP=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Japan)
CA13.TA-250V-JP
Japan 250VAC power cord for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Japan)
CAB-TA-EU=
AC power cord for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Europe)
CAB-TA.IT=
AC power cord for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Italy)
CAB-TA-IN=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (India)
CAB-TA-CN=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (China)
CABTADN=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Denmark)
CAB-TA-IS=
AC power caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR (Israel)
CA13-C15-C13N
Cabinet jumper pr caíd, 250 VAC 13A, C14-Cl 5 connectors
CA13-C15-C13N-JP=
Japan Cabinet Jumper Power Caíd, 250 VAC 13A, C14-C15
CAB-TA-JP-RA=
Japan AC Right Angled Power Caíd for Cisco Catalyst 2960XR
Contact Cisco
For more information about Cisco products, contact:
• Phone: +1 800 553-NETS (6387)
• Worldwide Product Suport
• Company Website: cisco.com
Cisco Capital
Financing to Help You Achieve Your Objectives
Cisco Capital can help you aCquire the technology you need to achieve your objectives and stay competitive. We
can help you reduce CapEx. Accelerate your growth. Optimize your investment dollars and ROl. Cisco Capital
financing gives you fiexibility in acquiring hardware, software, services, and comp!ementary third-party equipment.
And there's just one predictable payment. Cisco Capital is available in more than 100 countries. Learn more.
© 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. Afi nghts reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information.
Page 26 of 27
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising